1. 根本法门品复注巴利 1. Mūlapariyāyavaggo
全篇 1197 段
《根本法门经》的注释巴利
1. Mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
内因缘的注释巴利
Abbhantaranidānavaṇṇanā
1 像这样,先点明外因缘中应当解说的内容;现在为了从开头逐一注释内因缘,便说出了“然而这……”等话。在这里,作注释的人应当先为所注释的法展示词句的分解和词义,然后才按义理汇集等方式作注释;因此他先展示词句,说出了“‘如是’是虚词”等话。其中,“词句分解”指词与词之间的区别,不是指词的拆分。另一种理解是:按省略同一词的规则,“词和词句分解”和“词拆分和词句分解”,都可以用“词句分解”这个词来表达。其中,词的拆分应当这样来看,例如“吉祥的树林,所以叫‘幸运林’”;“娑罗树中的王”,或者说“既是娑罗树又是王,所以叫‘娑罗树王’”。巴利
1. Evaṃ bāhiranidāne vattabbaṃ atidisitvā idāni abhantaranidānaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya saṃvaṇṇetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ paneta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karontena saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme padavibhāgaṃ padatthañca dassetvā tato paraṃ piṇḍattādidassanavasena saṃvaṇṇanā kātabbā, tasmā padāni tāva dassento ‘‘evanti nipātapada’’ntiādimāha. Tattha padavibhāgoti padānaṃ viseso, na padaviggaho. Atha vā padāni ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgo, padaviggaho ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgoti vā ekasesavasena padapadaviggahā padavibhāgasaddena vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha padaviggaho ‘‘subhagañca taṃ vanañcāti subhagavanaṃ, sālānaṃ rājā, sālo ca so rājā ca itipi sālarājā’’tiādivasena samāsapadesu daṭṭhabbo.
“以义”是指从词义上来说。接着,为了依照提取义理的方式首先说明“如是”这个词的含义,论师说了“先说‘如是’一词……”等话。这里“决定等”中的“等”字,应当理解为包含“此义”“询问”“衡量”等含义。因为在“如是所趣的种种技艺处”“如是种类、如是相貌”等语句中,“如是”这个词就是“此”的意思。因为“已趣”是“方式”的同义词,“种类”“相貌”这些词也一样。世间人就是把“种类”“相应”“已趣”这些词用在“方式”这个意思上。在“你们是否这样善沐浴、善涂香、理好须发、佩戴摩尼耳环等饰物、穿着白衣、具足五种欲乐功德,就像你现在这样,有老师吗?”
“乔达摩尊者,不是这样”这类问答中,“如是”用于询问。在“有这样迅速变坏的”“有这样长的寿命”等语句中,则用于衡量。巴利
Atthatoti padatthato. Taṃ pana padatthaṃ atthuddhārakkamena paṭhamaṃ evaṃsaddassa dassento ‘‘evaṃ-saddo tāvā’’tiādimāha. Avadhāraṇādīti ettha ādi-saddena idamatthapucchāparimāṇādiatthānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi ‘‘evaṃgatāni puthusippāyatanāni (dī. ni. 1.163), evavidho evamākāro’’ti ca ādīsu idaṃ-saddassa atthe evaṃ-saddo. Gata-saddo hi pakārapariyāyo, tathā vidhākāra-saddā ca. Tathā hi vidhayuttagata-sadde lokiyā pakāratthe vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṃ etarahi sācariyakoti. No hidaṃ, bho gotamā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.286) pucchāyaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃlahuparivattaṃ (a. ni. 1.48) evamāyupariyanto’’ti (pārā. 12) ca ādīsu parimāṇe.
有人会问:在“你们是不是这样好好沐浴、好好涂香,寿命就这么长”这些句子里,因为“这样”这个词已经表达了询问的方式、衡量的方式等等,那么“这样”这个词不就只是表示方式吗?不是的,因为它表达的是特定的差别。实际上,“这样”这个词只是笼统地表示方式,就像在“这样说了之后”这类句子里那样,所以才说它有“方式之义”,而不是指某种特定的方式。正是这样理解,“这样出生的人”等譬喻和例证才能成立。就像在“犹如……众多”这段里,从像花堆一样的人身转生、亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、财富成就,以及布施等种种福行因缘的集合,又从具足美丽、芳香等功德的角度,说明与花鬘功德相似的众多福行,应当由必死的众生去造作。因此,花堆和花鬘功德只是譬喻;它们所譬喻的方式,虽然是用“犹如”这个词不特定地说出来,但因此说“这样”这个词是用来归结譬喻的方式,也是合理的。然而,当那个譬喻的方式被确定下来时,从意义上说它本身就是譬喻,所以说“用于譬喻时”。同样,在教导与沙门相应的威仪成就时,比如说“应当以这样的方式前进”等等,其中所教导的方式,从意义上就是教导本身,所以说“这样……用于教导”。又如“世尊,正是这样;善逝,正是这样”这里,是那些无误了知世尊所说之义的人,以现存诸功德的方式,生起欢喜、令心踊跃、令心满足。其中那令心满足的方式,应当这样连接理解。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā, evamāyupariyanto’’ti ettha evaṃ-saddena pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vuttattā ākārattho eva evaṃ-saddoti? Na, visesasabbhāvato. Ākāramattavācako hi evaṃ-saddo ākāratthoti adhippeto yathā ‘‘evaṃ byā kho’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.234, 396), na pana ākāravisesavācako. Evañca katvā ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccenā’’tiādīni upamādiudāharaṇāni upapannāni honti. Tathā hi ‘‘yathāpi…pe… bahu’’nti (dha. pa. 53) ettha puppharāsiṭṭhāniyato manussūpapatti-sappurisūpanissaya-saddhammassavana-yonisomanasikāra- bhogasampatti-ādidānādi-puññakiriyahetusamudāyato sobhā-sugandhatādiguṇayogato mālāguṇasadisiyo pahūtā puññakiriyā maritabbasabhāvatāya maccena sattena kattabbāti jotitattā puppharāsimālāguṇāva upamā, tesaṃ upamākāro yathā-saddena aniyamato vuttoti ‘‘evaṃ-saddo upamākāranigamanattho’’ti vattuṃ yuttaṃ. So pana upamākāro niyamiyamāno atthato upamāva hotīti āha ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti. Tathā ‘‘evaṃ iminā ākārena abhikkamitabba’’ntiādinā upadisiyamānāya samaṇasāruppāya ākappasampattiyā yo tattha upadisanākāro, so atthato upadeso evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ te…pe… upadese’’ti. Tathā ‘‘evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’ti ettha ca bhagavatā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aviparītato jānantehi kataṃ tattha saṃvijjamānaguṇānaṃ pakārehi haṃsanaṃ udaggatākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ. Yo tattha sampahaṃsanākāroti yojetabbaṃ.
同样地,在这里“此女人真是如此而来”这句话,应当理解为带有呵责的意味。而这种呵责的意味,是因为紧挨着“贱婢”等辱骂的词,所以知道这里是由“如此”这个词显示出来的。就像在这里一样,由于紧挨着“花堆”等词,也应当看出譬喻等的意味是由譬喻等方式说出来的。然而,“是的,尊者”这句话,是比丘们在被善巧地引导去听闻、如理作意于法之后,以承认自己安住于那种状态的方式说出来的,所以这里的“如此”一词是表示接受话语的意思。因此,这就等于说了“是的,尊者”“说得好,尊者”“太好了,尊者”。而“你应当这样说”是指“像我所说的那样,去对沙门阿难说”这个即将说出的说法方式,现在要由“如此”一词来指示,所以说它用于“指示”。在“是这样吗,不是吗”等处,为了对那些所说的法会带来无益和痛苦这件事产生确定的认识,以征求同意的方式问道:“它们会导致呢,还是不会?你们对此怎么看?”对方回答“我们在这里认为不是这样”,因此那种以如此方式产生的确定,然而那些法导致无益和痛苦的方式,在加以确定时具有限定的意义,所以说“在‘我们在这里认为不是这样’等句中,是用于限定”。巴利
Evamevaṃ panāyanti ettha garahaṇākāroti yojetabbaṃ, so ca garahaṇākāro ‘‘vasalī’’tiādikhuṃsanasaddasannidhānato idha evaṃ-saddena pakāsitoti viññāyati. Yathā cettha, evaṃ upamākārādayopi upamādivasena vuttānaṃ puppharāsiādisaddānaṃ sannidhānato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ, bhanteti pana dhammassa sādhukaṃ savanamanasikāre sanniyojitehi bhikkhūhi attano tattha ṭhitabhāvassa paṭijānanavasena vuttattā ettha evaṃ-saddo vacanasampaṭicchanattho vutto. Tena evaṃ, bhante sādhu, bhante, suṭṭhu, bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Evañca vadehīti ‘‘yathāhaṃ vadāmi, evaṃ samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ vadehī’’ti yo evaṃ vadanākāro idāni vattabbo. So evaṃsaddena nidassīyatīti ‘‘nidassane’’ti vuttoti. Evaṃ noti etthāpi tesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ ahitadukkhāvahabhāve sanniṭṭhānajananatthaṃ anumatigahaṇavasena ‘‘saṃvattanti vā no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotī’’ti pucchāya katāya ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotī’’ti vuttattā tadākārasanniṭṭhānaṃ evaṃ-saddena vibhāvitanti viññāyati. So pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanākāro niyamiyamāno avadhāraṇattho hotīti āha ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotītiādīsu avadhāraṇe’’ti.
“种种理趣而微细”:所谓“种种理趣”,是指由一性与异性、无杂事、如是法性所构成的,或者是指依所依等差别,如同钩索、狮子嬉戏、大象游荡般的观察眼目所构成的各种理趣。或者说,“理趣”即巴利圣典的种种流派,这些流派由于施设与随施设等、杂染部分等、世间等、厌逆与无厌逆两者及混合等、善等、蕴等、摄等、时解脱与非时解脱等、安立等、善根等、三法发趣等而有种种差别,所以称为“种种理趣”。由这些理趣而微细、柔和、极为精妙,因此说为“种种理趣而微细”。“以种种志趣为起源”:“意乐”也就是“志趣”,这些志趣因常见等而有种种不同,在此又因尘垢少等而有多类差别;或者说,自己内心的志趣等即是它生起的根源、生起的因,所以称为“以种种志趣为起源”。“义理与文句圆满”:指义理与文句完全圆满,已无需要再补充的;或者应这样理解其义理:以宣说、开显、揭示、分别、阐明、施设六种义句而为圆满,以及以字母、词句、文句、行相、语法、论说六种文句而为具足。巴利
Nānānayanipuṇanti ekattanānattaabyāpāraevaṃdhammatāsaṅkhātā, nandiyāvattatipukkhalasīhavikkīḷitaaṅkusadisālocanasaṅkhātā vā ādhārādibhedavasena nānāvidhā nayā nānānayā, nayā vā pāḷigatiyo, tā ca paññattianupaññattiādivasena saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissakādivasena kusalādivasena khandhādivasena saṅgahādivasena samayavimuttādivasena ṭhapanādivasena kusalamūlādivasena tikappaṭṭhānādivasena ca nānappakārāti nānānayā. Tehi nipuṇaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumanti nānānayanipuṇaṃ. Āsayova ajjhāsayo, te ca sassatādibhedena, tattha ca apparajakkhatādibhedena aneke, attajjhāsayādayo eva vā samuṭṭhānaṃ uppattihetu etassāti anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthabyañjanasampannanti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇaṃ upanetabbābhāvato, saṅkāsanapakāsana-vivaraṇa-vibhajana-uttānīkaraṇa-paññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkhara-padabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatanti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
“种种神变”这句话里,对“神变”这个词的含义,《优陀那注》《如是语注》《相应部注·天众相应》等处说:“因为能排除对立面,能去除贪等烦恼,所以叫神变。”可是世尊并没有需要排除的贪等对立面。即使是凡夫,在远离烦恼染污、具足八种功德、已经排除对立面的心中,也能生起神通变化,所以不能仅凭那里流行的世俗说法,就在这里把它叫作“神变”。不过,如果把大悲世尊所教化的众生的烦恼当作对立面,因为去除这些烦恼而说“神变”,这样说是合理的。或者,世尊和教法的对立面是外道,因为排除他们而叫神变。因为他们以排除邪见、以及使其无法彰显邪见的方式,被神通、记说、教诫所排除、驱离。另外,“paṭi”这个词有“之后”的意思,比如在“tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo”这样的句子里。所以,在心得定、远离烦恼染污之后,由已经完成修行的人随后去排除、去令生起,就是神变;或者,自己的烦恼染污被第四禅和道排除之后,再去排除,就是神变。而神通、记说、教诫,也是由远离烦恼染污、已经完成修行的人为了利益众生而再次令其生起,并且在自己的烦恼染污已被排除之后,成为去除其他众生烦恼染污的,所以成为神变。神变本身就是神变,或者在神变中,也就是在神通、记说、教诫这个整体中,所生起的每一个,都叫神变。又或者,神变就是第四禅和道,因为能排除对立面;生于其中、以它为所缘、或从它而来的,就叫神变。而这种神变,因为神通等的差别和所缘的差别而多种多样,在世尊的说法中可以获得,所以说“种种神变”。巴利
Vividhapāṭihāriyanti ettha pāṭihāriyapadassa vacanatthaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 1; itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1 devatāsaṃyutta) ‘‘paṭipakkhaharaṇato, rāgādikilesāpanayanato ca pāṭihāriya’’nti vadanti, bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi, ye haritabbā. Puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ pavattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhipakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā hontīti . ‘‘Paṭī’’ti vā ayaṃ saddo ‘‘pacchā’’ti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 985; cūḷani. 4) viya, tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpakkilese ca katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti pāṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ, iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo ca vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena ca sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakilesaharaṇāni hontīti pāṭihāriyāni bhavanti. Pāṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ, pāṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanisamudāye bhavaṃ ekamekaṃ pāṭihāriyanti vuccati. Pāṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ, tasmiṃ vā nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyaṃ. Tassa pana iddhiādibhedena visayabhedena ca bahuvidhassa bhagavato desanāyaṃ labbhamānattā āha ‘‘vividhapāṭihāriya’’nti.
不是另外不同的样子,意思是:并非不同于从世尊面前亲耳听闻的那种形态,而不是并非不同于世尊所开示的形态。因为世尊的开示确实具有不可思议的威力。这样理解之后,“以一切方式,谁能了知”这句话就站得住脚,同时,显示忆持之力也并不矛盾,因为这里的意思是不偏离所听闻的形态。在这里,并不是要舍弃另一种义理,因为两种义理属于同一个范围。否则,长老对于世尊的开示,就会变成既能完全领受、又不能完全领受,陷入矛盾。巴利
Na aññathāti bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato na aññathāti attho, na pana bhagavato desitākārato. Acinteyyānubhāvā hi bhagavato desanā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātu’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ bhavati, dhāraṇabaladassanañca na virujjhati sutākārāvirajjhanassa adhippetattā. Na hettha atthantaratāparihāro dvinnampi atthānaṃ ekavisayattā. Itarathā thero bhagavato desanāya sabbathā paṭiggahaṇe samattho asamattho cāti āpajjeyyāti.
“凡不是他人的,那就是自己”,如是以此所说;三种格位的“me”这个词,由于在被称为自身内在的自身相续中转起,虽然看似只表示一种意义,但鉴于依工具格、与格、属格的标示而存在的差别,才说“me这个词出现在三种意义中”。巴利
‘‘Yo paro na hoti, so attā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya niyakajjhattasaṅkhātāya sasantatiyā vattanato tividhopi me-saddo kiñcāpi ekasmiṃyeva atthe dissati, karaṇasampadānasāminiddesavasena pana vijjamānaṃ bhedaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissatī’’ti.
虽然前缀能限定动词的作用,但由于它本身具有说明的功能,即使有前缀,“听闻”这个词仍然表达那个具体的意思;为了说明在提取无前缀“听闻”的词义时,把带前缀的也一并纳入并不矛盾,所以说了“带前缀的和无前缀的”等话。这里的“assā”指的是“听闻”这个词。在此,“听闻”一词可以从业格、状态格等衍生方式来理解,所以说“意思是已持守,或正在持守”。当取“由我”的意思时,是以作者的方式用工具格来说明,那时就是这个意思;当取“我的”的意思时,是以所属关系的方式用属格来说明,那时也是这个意思。巴利
Kiñcāpi upasaggo kiriyaṃ viseseti, jotakabhāvato pana satipi tasmiṃ sutasaddo eva taṃ tamatthaṃ vadatīti anupasaggassa sutasaddassa atthuddhāre saupasaggassa gahaṇaṃ na virujjhatīti dassento ‘‘saupasaggo ca anupasaggo cā’’tiādimāha. Assāti sutasaddassa. Kammabhāvasādhanāni idha sutasadde sambhavantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vā attho’’ti. Mayāti atthe satīti yadā me-saddassa kattuvasena karaṇaniddeso, tadāti attho. Mamāti atthe satīti yadā sambandhavasena sāminiddeso, tadā.
与“听闻”一词相连而使用的“如是”一词,应当是用来显示听闻行为的,所以说“如是”是指示耳识等识的作用。通过“等”字,应当理解它涵盖了领受等五门识,以及由这些识所引生的意门识。由于一切语句都带有“唯”的含义,所以“听闻”一词的意义就是“唯是所闻”;为了说明这一点,才说“因为排除了非听闻的状态”。通过这一强调,显示出没有疑惑。正如应当确定“所闻就是所闻”,那才是正确的听闻,所以说“显示无减、无增、无颠倒的领受”。或者,通过排除其他词的含义,词才能表达意义,因此“听闻”就意味着“不是未闻”,这就是它的意义,所以说“因为排除了非听闻的状态”。由此遮遣了“所见”等。这里说的是:“这不是我所见的,不是以自生智亲证的,而是所听闻的,并且是正确的听闻。”因此说“显示无减、无增、无颠倒的领受”。或者,当“如是”一词表示强调意义时,这样来搭配它的含义,与它相关的“听闻”一词就表达了这个意义,即“因为排除了非听闻的状态”。因此说“显示无减、无增、无颠倒的领受”。在此,“听闻”一词应理解为业/被动义,即“被听闻”。巴利
Suta-saddasannidhāne payuttena evaṃ-saddena savanakiriyājotakena bhavitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassana’’nti. Ādi-saddena sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ pañcadvārikaviññāṇānaṃ tadabhinīhaṭānañca manodvārikaviññāṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sabbesampi vākyānaṃ eva-kāratthasahitattā ‘‘suta’’nti etassa sutamevāti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Etena avadhāraṇena nirāsaṅkataṃ dasseti. Yathā ca sutaṃ sutamevāti niyametabbaṃ, taṃ sammā sutaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Atha vā saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatīti sutanti asutaṃ na hotīti ayametassa atthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti . Iminā diṭṭhādivinivattanaṃ karoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘na idaṃ mayā diṭṭhaṃ, na sayambhuñāṇena sacchikataṃ, atha kho sutaṃ, tañca kho sammadevā’’ti. Tenevāha – ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Avadhāraṇatthe vā evaṃ-sadde ayamatthayojanā karīyatīti tadapekkhassa suta-saddassa ayamattho vutto ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Savanasaddo cettha kammattho veditabbo ‘‘suyyatī’’ti.
像这样,先按听闻之因、听闻者、听闻的差别,把这三个词的意义关联以一种方式显示出来;现在为了以其他方式也显示它,便说了“同样地,如是”等语。其中“它的”,指的是在世尊面前以听法方式生起的那条意门识路,也就是“它的”。因为这条识路能在所缘上以种种方式生起。也正因如此,才说“随顺耳门”。所谓“以种种方式”,是说接下来要讲的各种音节与意义的领会,各有多种方式;由此表明:在这一意义关联中,“如是”一词是取“行相”之义。“显示转起的存在”,就是揭示转起确实存在。“‘听闻’是法的显示”是说:在那个所缘上,所说的识路以种种方式生起,因为那个所缘是法,所以才这样说,并不是因为“听闻”这个词本身有“法”的意思。为了让前面说的意义更清楚,便有“此中,如此”等语。其中,“以识路”是工具格,表示工具的意义。“我”是表示作者。巴利
Evaṃ savanahetusuṇantapuggalasavanavisesavasena padattayassa ekena pakārena atthayojanaṃ dassetvā idāni pakārantarehipi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti yā sā bhagavato sammukhā dhammassavanākārena pavattā manodvāraviññāṇavīthi, tassā. Sā hi nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattituṃ samatthā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘sotadvārānusārenā’’ti. Nānappakārenāti vakkhamānānaṃ anekavihitānaṃ byañjanatthaggahaṇānaṃ nānākārena. Etena imissā yojanāya ākārattho evaṃ-saddo gahitoti dīpeti. Pavattibhāvappakāsananti pavattiyā atthibhāvappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsananti yasmiṃ ārammaṇe vuttappakārā viññāṇavīthi nānappakārena pavattā, tassa dhammattā vuttaṃ, na sutasaddassa dhammatthattā. Vuttassevatthassa pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ ‘‘ayañhetthā’’tiādi. Tattha viññāṇavīthiyāti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Mayāti kattuatthe.
“如是”这个词是用来指出应当被指示的内容,取它“指示”的含义而说,因为应当被指示的事物并非没有可被指示的性质。由此说明,用“如是”这个词,就把整部经都涵盖到了。“听闻”是表示动作的词,而听闻这个行为又与共通的识相续相关联,并且在这里有“人”的称呼,所以说“听闻是说明人的作用”。因为在没有“人”这个称呼的法相续中,是找不到听闻行为的。巴利
Evanti niddisitabbappakāsananti nidassanatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ nidassetabbassa niddisitabbattābhāvābhāvato. Tena evaṃ-saddena sakalampi suttaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti dasseti. Suta-saddassa kiriyāsaddattā savanakiriyāya ca sādhāraṇaviññāṇapabandhapaṭibaddhattā tattha ca puggalavohāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘sutanti puggalakiccappakāsana’’nti. Na hi puggalavohārarahite dhammapabandhe savanakiriyā labbhatīti.
“对于某心相续的”等语,也是取了“如是”一词的行相意义,为了显示与前一种连接方式不同的意义连接方式而说的。其中,“行相的施设”,就是依诸法生起的行相而安立的假名施设,所以才那样说。“听闻是对境的说明”,意思是:可听闻的法,通过听闻行为的作者——也就是那个补特伽罗——的听闻行为,成为生起的处所,所以这样说。虽然在胜义上,离开了心相续,任何作者都不可得,但依语言的惯用,凭借内心构想的差别来表达意愿,把心相续看成好像是另一回事,并让它拥有那个法,所以说“以心相续而具有它”。可听闻的法也是听闻行为的境;因为在这里,通过听闻行为而生起的心相续,在胜义上就是作者,或者仅仅以听闻为形式的心生起本身就是听闻行为,而该行为的作者也有境,所以说“在具有它的作者的境上”。又因为长老对所闻的行相有善加决断的状态,所以说“领受的决断”。或者应当知道,这是取了“如是”一词的强调意义,而作了这样的意义连接。巴利
Yassa cittasantānassātiādipi ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā purimayojanāya aññathā atthayojanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ākārapaññattīti upādāpaññatti eva dhammānaṃ pavattiākārūpādānavasena tathā vuttā. Sutanti visayaniddesoti sotabbabhūto dhammo savanakiriyākattupuggalassa savanakiriyāvasena pavattiṭṭhānanti katvā vuttaṃ. Cittasantānavinimuttassa paramatthato kassaci kattu abhāvepi saddavohārena buddhiparikappitabhedavacanicchāya cittasantānato aññaṃ viya taṃsamaṅgiṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘cittasantānenataṃsamaṅgino’’ti. Savanakiriyāvisayopi sotabbadhammo savanakiriyāvasena pavattacittasantānassa idha paramatthato kattubhāvato, savanavasena cittappavattiyā eva vā savanakiriyābhāvato taṃkiriyākattu ca visayo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃsamaṅgino kattuvisaye’’ti. Sutākārassa ca therassa sammānicchitabhāvato āha ‘‘gahaṇasanniṭṭhāna’’nti. Etena vā avadhāraṇatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā ayamatthayojanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对于先前听闻过的、种种不同的、被称为经的义理与文句,已经持取其行相者,那行相的指示或确定之开显自性,就是“如是”一词;因为对那种行相的持取,是补特伽罗施设的所依——也就是法相续——的作用,所以说“‘如是’是补特伽罗作用的说明”。然而,听闻的行为,即使对主张有补特伽罗的人来说,也离不开识,因此特别指出它是识的作用,而说“‘听闻’是识作用的说明”。“我”这个词,因为词语的运用必然落在有情的范围内,同时识的作用也正应归在那里,所以说“‘我’是与两种作用相连的补特伽罗的说明”。为了显示“不存在的施设”和“存在的施设”这两种自性依次就是“如是”一词和“听闻”一词的意义,并且显示它们正是以那样的施设为所依的法相续的作用,而说“‘如是’是补特伽罗作用的说明,‘听闻’是识作用的说明”。在这里应当知道,通过工具、行为、作者、业的差别来令其明了,通过补特伽罗的作用、境、补特伽罗作用的指示,通过领受行相、能领受者、境的差别的说明,以及通过作者、工具、作用、作者的说明,展示了后面四种意义连接。巴利
Pubbe sutānaṃ nānāvihitānaṃ suttasaṅkhātānaṃ atthabyañjanānaṃ upadhāritarūpassa ākārassa nidassanassa, avadhāraṇassa vā pakāsanasabhāvo evaṃ-saddoti tadākārādiupadhāraṇassa puggalapaññattiyā upādānabhūtadhammapabandhabyāpāratāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso’’ti. Savanakiriyā pana puggalavādinopi viññāṇanirapekkhā natthīti visesato viññāṇabyāpāroti āha ‘‘sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. ‘‘Me’’ti saddappavattiyā ekanteneva sattavisayattā viññāṇakiccassa ca tattheva samodahitabbato ‘‘meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjamānapaññattivijjamānapaññattisabhāvā yathākkamaṃ evaṃ-sadda – suta-saddānaṃ atthāti te tathārūpa-paññatti-upādānabhūta-dhammapabandhabyāpārabhāvena dassento āha – ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso, sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Ettha ca karaṇakiriyākattukammavisesappakāsanavasena puggalabyāpāravisayapuggalabyāpāranidassanavasena gahaṇākāragāhakatabbisayavisesaniddesavasena kattukaraṇabyāpārakattuniddesavasena ca dutiyādayo catasso atthayojanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
一切能够通过言语来了知的意义,都必须借助施设这一途径才能通达;而一切施设又都包含在存在、不存在等六种施设的分类之中。因此,为了从这些施设中辨别出“如是”“我”等施设的自相,就说了“如是以及我”等话。在这里,被称为“如是”和“我”的意义,由于不能像色等行相那样被清楚地执取,所以属于不存在的施设。因此说“依真实胜义来说,是不存在的施设”。其中“依真实胜义”,就是依真实之义、依最上之义。这话的意思是:有些意义像幻象、阳焰那样是不真实的,有些意义像依靠传闻等而接受的那样并非最上之义;而与此不同,凡是色、声等自性,或者可被损害、可被领受等自性,这样的意义才被称为真实义、胜义。“如是”“我”这些词的意义并不是这样。为了让这个道理更加清楚,才说了“这里什么是”等话。至于“听闻”,则是针对声处而说“是存在的施设”。正因为如此,才说“凡在这里由耳所获得的”;如果换说“随顺耳门所获得的”,那么义理、文句等一切就都包括进来了。巴利
Sabbassapi saddādhigamanīyassa atthassa paññattimukheneva paṭipajjitabbattā sabbapaññattīnañca vijjamānādivasena chasu paññattibhedesu antogadhattā tesu ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ paññattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ niddhārento āha – ‘‘evanti ca meti cā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘eva’’nti ca ‘‘me’’ti ca vuccamānassatthassa ākārādino dhammānaṃ asallakkhaṇabhāvato avijjamānapaññattibhāvoti āha – ‘‘saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Tattha saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasenāti bhūtatthauttamatthavasena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo māyāmarīciādayo viya abhūtattho, anussavādīhi gahetabbo viya anuttamattho ca na hoti, so rūpasaddādisabhāvo, ruppanānubhavanādisabhāvo vā attho saccikaṭṭho paramattho cāti vuccati, na tathā ‘‘evaṃ me’’ti padānaṃ atthoti. Etamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘kiñhettha ta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sutanti pana saddāyatanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdha’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘sotadvārānusārena upaladdha’’nti pana vutte atthabyañjanādisabbaṃ labbhati.
依这、依那而应当说:对于进入耳门范围内的诸法,回顾那些被执取的行相等等,以反复把握的方式说“如是”;对于含摄在自己相续中的诸蕴,因为应当说“我的”,所以这样说,这就是含义。即使“听闻”这一说法是在没有所见等自性的声处上生起的,但就像“第二”“第三”等说法是相对于“第一”等而生起的那样,它也是相对于所见、所觉、所识才生起的,因此说“依于对所见等的对照而应当说”——因为如果没有听闻,就不成为“所闻”,所以这“所闻”得以阐明的就是这个含义。长老以“如是”反复把握了亲自通达的经的种种方式,因此说“显示不迷乱”。以能够通达种种方式,由此显示将要说之经的种种性和难通达性。说“显示所闻的不忘失”,是因为所闻的方式被如实显示的缘故。以不迷乱:以没有迷乱,或者唯独由听闻时所生的智慧,来成就其后之时的智慧。在此也应当说“以如是的不迷乱”。所应通达的文句之行相并非过深,在那里所应做的只是如所闻而受持,因此念的作用更为增上,慧在其中成为从属,所以说“慧为先导”等,作“以慧为先导”。而此处的先导性即是主导性,如“意先行”等(法句经1、2)中那样。或者,以先导性如眼识等中作意等之非主导地位那样,慧为此者(念)的先导,这一含义也成立。以如是的念为先导:在此也应当依照所说的方式,按可能的情况理解其含义。具足义与文:具足义与文而圆满者,或者应视为:以开示、阐明、揭示、分别、显了、施设六种义句,以及以字母、词、文、行相、语源、解说六种文句而具足者,这一含义应当被理解。巴利
Taṃtaṃ upādāya vattabbatoti sotapathamāgate dhamme upādāya tesaṃ upadhāritākārādino paccāmasanavasena ‘‘eva’’nti, sasantatipariyāpanne khandhe upādāya ‘‘me’’ti vattabbattāti attho. Diṭṭhādisabhāvarahite saddāyatane pavattamānopi sutavohāro ‘‘dutiyaṃ tatiya’’ntiādiko viya paṭhamādīni diṭṭhamutaviññāte apekkhitvāva pavattoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato’’ti asutaṃ na hotīti hi sutanti pakāsitoyamatthoti. Attanā paṭividdhā suttassa pakāravisesā ‘‘eva’’nti therena paccāmaṭṭhāti āha ‘‘asammohaṃ dīpetī’’ti. Nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hotīti etena vakkhamānassa suttassa nānappakārataṃ duppaṭivijjhatañca dasseti. Sutassa asammosaṃ dīpetīti sutākārassa yāthāvato dassiyamānattā vuttaṃ. Asammohenāti sammohābhāvena, paññāya eva vā savanakālasambhūtāya taduttarakālapaññāsiddhi. Evaṃ asammosenāti etthāpi vattabbaṃ. Byañjanānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro, yathāsutadhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyanti satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā tattha guṇībhūtāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpubbaṅgamāyā’’tiādi ‘‘paññāya pubbaṅgamā’’ti katvā. Pubbaṅgamatā cettha padhānatā ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 1, 2) viya. Pubbaṅgamatāya vā cakkhuviññāṇādīsu āvajjanādīnaṃ viya appadhānatte paññā pubbaṅgamā etissāti ayampi attho yujjati. Evaṃ satipubbaṅgamāyāti etthāpi vuttanayānusārena yathāsambhavamattho veditabbo. Atthabyañjanasampannassāti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇassa, saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatassāti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
“显示如理作意”的意思是:以“如是”这个词所指示、所强调的行相,因为其对象是不颠倒的正法。“显示不散乱”则是说:通过“根本法门在哪里说”等提问方式,对于将要讲解的、属于本论的这部经,如果没有心的等持,听闻就不可能发生,所以才这样说。“心散乱者……”等语句,是为了说明这个道理而说的。“一切成就”是指义理、文句、说法者、目的等方面的圆满。“以不颠倒的正法为对象”等语,如同指示和强调行相一样,说明如理作意;而通过听闻正法,则说明不散乱。就像以如理作意为果,能成立其因——自己正确的愿力和前世所积的福德——因为二者不可分离;同样,以不散乱为果,也应当能说明其因——听闻正法和亲近善士的成就,因为没有听闻、不亲近善士的人,就不会有这些。然而,通过“心散乱者……”等说明性语句,并不是以不散乱为因、以亲近善士为因,来说明作为果的听闻正法的成就。不过,这里也许可以这样合理地理解其意图:听闻正法和亲近善士并不绝对是不散乱的原因,因为它们属于外在条件;而不散乱则像亲近善士一样,是听闻正法的绝对原因。即使这样,以不散乱来说明亲近善士的成就,也还没有说清楚;但并非完全没说清,因为心散乱的人不可能亲近善士,这个道理是成立的。在这里,前者是以果来说明因的成立,就像河水满溢说明上方降雨一样;后者则应看作以因来说明果的成立,就像一直下雨说明云层降雨一样。巴利
Yonisomanasikāraṃ dīpeti evaṃ-saddena vuccamānānaṃ ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthānaṃ aviparītasaddhammavisayattāti adhippāyo. Avikkhepaṃ dīpetīti ‘‘mūlapariyāyaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādipucchāvasena pakaraṇappattassa vakkhamānassa suttassa savanaṃ samādhānamantarena na sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Vikkhittacittassātiādi tassevatthassa samatthanavasena vuttaṃ. Sabbasampattiyāti atthabyañjanadesakapayojanādisampattiyā. Aviparītasaddhammavisayehi viya ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthehi yonisomanasikārassa, saddhammassavanena viya ca avikkhepassa yathā yonisomanasikārena phalabhūtena attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatānaṃ siddhi vuttā tadavinābhāvato, evaṃ avikkhepena phalabhūtena kāraṇabhūtānaṃ saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayānaṃ siddhi dassetabbā siyā assutavato sappurisūpanissayarahitassa ca tadabhāvato. Na hi vikkhittacittotiādinā samatthanavacanena pana avikkhepena kāraṇabhūtena sappurisūpanissayena ca phalabhūtassa saddhammassavanassa siddhi dassitā. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo yutto siyā – saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayā na ekantena avikkhepassa kāraṇaṃ bāhiraṅgattā, avikkhepo pana sappurisūpanissayo viya saddhammassavanassa ekantakāraṇanti. Evampi avikkhepena sappurisūpanissayasiddhijotanā na samatthitāva, no na samatthitā vikkhittacittānaṃ sappurisapayirupāsanābhāvassa atthasiddhattā. Ettha ca purimaṃ phalena kāraṇassa siddhidassanaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhisabbhāvassa, dutiyaṃ kāraṇena phalassa siddhidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ekantavassinā viya meghavuṭṭhānena vuṭṭhippavattiyā.
世尊言教中义理与文句的分类判别,能完整契入一切教法成就的行相,是圆满无余地利乐众生的因,所以说“这样的行相是如此善妙”。它与“因为不存在”一句相连。所谓“后二轮成就”,就是指“自正愿”和“宿世善业”这两种功德。在这里,“轮”有辗转相续运作之义;或者说,众生依这四轮运转于成就的存在中。正是针对这些,《增支部》中说:“比丘们,有这四种轮,具足它们的天与人,便有四轮在运转。”(《增支部》4.31)这里的前后次第,应按说法的顺序来理解。“以后二轮成就”是指后二轮的现前。因为一个自建正愿、过去又曾造作善业的人,意乐自然清净;那些令意乐不清净的烦恼已被远远隔离,所以说“意乐清净得以成立”。正如所说:“善所安立的心,能使人由此变得更好”(《法句》43),又说:“阿难,你已作善业,当勤精进,不久便成无漏者”(《长部·大品》2.207)。正因为如此,才说“由意乐清净,获得证悟与通晓得以成立”。所谓“由加行清净”,是指以如理作意为前导的闻法加行变得明净;因此又说“得通晓圣教之成就”。或者,就一切身语加行的无过失而言。因为身语加行清净者,由于无追悔,心不散乱,于圣教中得善巧。巴利
Bhagavato vacanassa atthabyañjanapabhedaparicchedavasena sakalasāsanasampattiogāhanākāro niravasesaparahitapāripūrikāraṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhaddako ākāro’’ti. Yasmā na hotīti sambandho. Pacchimacakkadvayasampattinti attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatāsaṅkhātaṃ guṇadvayaṃ. Aparāparavuttiyā cettha cakkabhāvo, caranti etehi sattā sampattibhavesūti vā. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.31). Purimapacchimabhāvo cettha desanākkamavasena daṭṭhabbo. Pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyāti pacchimacakkadvayassa atthitāya. Sammāpaṇihitatto pubbe ca katapuñño suddhāsayo hoti tadasuddhihetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ dūrībhāvatoti āha – ‘‘āsayasuddhi siddhā hotī’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sammāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti (dha. pa. 43), ‘‘katapuññosi tvaṃ ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja, khippaṃ hohisi anāsavo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.207) ca. Tenevāha ‘‘āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Payogasuddhiyāti yonisomanasikārapubbaṅgamassa dhammassavanapayogassa visadabhāvena. Tathā cāha ‘‘āgamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Sabbassa vā kāyavacīpayogassa niddosabhāvena. Parisuddhakāyavacīpayogo hi vippaṭisārābhāvato avikkhittacitto pariyattiyaṃ visārado hotīti.
能显示种种通达等话,是论师就义与文句,说明长老对“如是”和“闻”这两个词不迷惑、不忘失,从而以四无碍解来展示义理的连接。其中,能显示所应闻的差别之通达这句话,借此说明:“闻”这个词因为紧挨着“如是”,或者为了期待下文,以总说的方式指向所闻法的种种差别。由于成为意与见之因的教法特别系于作意而难以审察善通达,所以按前面所说,把它们与能显示如理作意的“如是”一词连接起来;而教法在听闻、忆持、口诵习熟方面,特别系于倾耳,所以把它们与能显示不散乱的“闻”一词连接起来加以说明,这样就能为教法成就而生起闻法的精勤。这里说的“法”,指教法。“以意一一观察”,意思是按“这里讲了戒,这里讲了定,这里讲了慧,这当中有这样那样的连接”等方式,用意识一一审察。“以见而善通达”,意思是以审察忍已成之见,或者以知遍知为名的见,对各处所说的色、无色等法,按“这是色,色有这么多”等方式,善加决断而通达。巴利
Nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakenātiādinā atthabyañjanesu therassa evaṃsaddasuta-saddānaṃ asammohāsammosadīpanato catupaṭisambhidāvasena atthayojanaṃ dasseti. Tattha sotabbabhedapaṭivedhadīpakenāti etena ayaṃ suta-saddo evaṃ-saddasannidhānato, vakkhamānāpekkhāya vā sāmaññeneva sotabbadhammavisesaṃ āmasatīti dasseti. Manodiṭṭhikaraṇā pariyattidhammānaṃ anupekkhanasuppaṭivedhā visesato manasikārapaṭibaddhāti te vuttanayena yonisomanasikāradīpakena evaṃsaddena yojetvā, savanadhāraṇavacīparicayā pariyattidhammānaṃ visesena sotāvadhānapaṭibaddhāti te avikkhepadīpakena suta-saddena yojetvā dassento sāsanasampattiyā dhammassavane ussāhaṃ janeti. Tattha dhammāti pariyattidhammā. Manasānupekkhitāti ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā, ettakā ettha anusandhiyo’’tiādinā nayena manasā anu anu pekkhitā. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti nijjhānakkhantibhūtāya, ñātapariññāsaṅkhātāya vā diṭṭhiyā tattha tattha vuttarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā paṭividdhā.
“以整句来说”这句话,是因为前面已经对三个词分别作了搭配才这样说的。“不把法执为自己所有”,就是不把“这是我的”这种想法安立在自己身上。“非善士地”就是不知恩;正如《律藏·经分别》所说:“在这里,有一类恶比丘,学习了如来所宣说的法与律之后,就把它执为自己所有”,这就是所说的非圣言所依之处,而这非圣言所依之处就是非正法。难道阿难尊者会有“这是我的教言”这样的增上慢吗?而大迦叶尊者等人在当时也没有这种疑惑啊?既然如此,那么“超越非善士地”等话不就没有意义了吗?并非如此,因为说“如是我闻”这句话时,正是要显示这一层含义。不过也有人这样说:“说这句话,是基于当时诸天神内心的遍寻;因此,这样的质疑没有生起的机会。”据说,在那个时候,有些诸天神心中生起了这样的遍寻:“世尊已经般涅槃了,而这位尊者善于说法,现在正宣说教法,他出身释迦族,是如来的兄弟,是如来小叔的儿子。他所宣说的,到底是他自己亲自证得的法呢?还是仅仅随闻于世尊之语而已?”像这样,从当时那种疑惑的方式来看,从进入非善士地等来说,超越等含义也就显示出来了。“显示”就是指示。对于现世、来世和究竟义,按各自所应而引导众生,所以叫引导;法本身就是引导,所以叫法引导。巴利
Sakalena vacanenāti pubbe tīhi padehi visuṃ visuṃ yojitattā vuttaṃ. Attano adahantoti ‘‘mameda’’nti attani aṭṭhapento. Asappurisabhūminti akataññutaṃ ‘‘idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’ti (pārā. 195) evaṃ vuttaṃ anariyavohārāvatthaṃ, sā eva anariyavohārāvatthā asaddhammo. Nanu ca ānandattherassa ‘‘mamedaṃ vacana’’nti adhimānassa, mahākassapattherādīnañca tadāsaṅkāya abhāvato asappurisabhūmisamatikkamādivacanaṃ niratthakanti? Nayidamevaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vadantena ayampi attho vibhāvitoti dassanato. Keci pana ‘‘devatānaṃ parivitakkāpekkhaṃ tathāvacananti edisī codanā anavakāsāvā’’ti vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira khaṇe ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi ‘‘bhagavā ca parinibbuto, ayañca āyasmā desanākusalo, idāni dhammaṃ deseti sakyakulappasuto tathāgatassa bhātā cūḷapituputto, kiṃ nu kho sayaṃ sacchikataṃ dhammaṃ deseti, udāhu bhagavatoyeva vacanaṃ yathāsuta’’nti. Evaṃ tadāsaṅkitappakārato asappurisabhūmisamokkamādito atikkamādi vibhāvitanti. Appetīti nidasseti. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthesu yathārahaṃ satte netīti netti, dhammoyeva netti dhammanetti.
根深蒂固的疑,叫“疑”。没有过度游移、只是见解上有分歧,叫“犹豫”。它能消除不信,因为这是世尊所宣说的,因为是从世尊面前亲自领受的,也因为其中没有执取错误、说错话等过失。这里应当知道:前面三种义理搭配,是就“如是”一词在行相等含义上,只取它未被执取的特殊差别来显示的;其后的四种搭配,则是专就“如是”一词的“行相”义来说明;最后三种则依次就“如是”一词的“行相”义、“示例”义和“确定”义来搭配说明。巴利
Daḷhataraniviṭṭhā vicikicchā kaṅkhā. Nātisaṃsappanā matibhedamattā vimati. Assaddhiyaṃ vināseti bhagavatā desitattā, sammukhāvassa paṭiggahitattā, khalitaduruttādigahaṇadosābhāvato ca. Ettha ca paṭhamādayo tisso atthayojanā ākārādiatthesu aggahitavisesameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā dassitā, tato parā catasso ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vibhāvitā, pacchimā pana tisso yathākkamaṃ ākāratthaṃ nidassanatthaṃ avadhāraṇatthañca evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā yojitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“eka”这个词,可以在表示“其他”“最胜”“无伴”“数目”等意思的地方见到。比如在“我及世间是常,唯此真实,其余皆虚妄”这类话里,有些论者这样说(《中部》3.27),这里的“eka”是在表示“其他”的意思;在“心一境性”(《长部》1.228)这类话里,是在表示“最胜”的意思;在“独处远离”(《长部》1.405)这类话里,是在表示“无伴”的意思;在“比丘们,修梵行的时机与机会只有一刹那”这类话里,是在表示“数目”的意思。在这里,它也是表示数目。为了说明这一点,所以说“eka是对计数的限定”。“时机与机会”:适当之时与因缘和合;“刹那”就是机会。因为如来出世等,是修行道梵行的机会,因为它是获得彼因缘之因的缘故。而那个刹那也就是“时机”。也就是说,被称为“刹那”和“时机”的那个,本身就是唯一的——这就是这里的意思。“大集会”就是大聚集。“samayo pi kho”也是指圆满学处的因。“samayappavādaka”是指宣说各自宗义的人,也就是宣说邪见的人。因为外道们坐在那里,各自宣说自己的宗义。“atthābhisamaya”是指获得利益。应当被通达者,名为“现观”;现观即是义,故名“现观处”——这是把苦等应当被通达的事物,以同一性统摄起来而说的。或者,作为现观(证悟)对象的利益,就叫“现观处”。那些事物就是以同一性来说的。其中,“逼恼”是苦谛,就是对具有苦谛者的伤害、使其无法舒展;“热恼”是依苦苦等而燃烧、灼热。巴利
Eka-saddo aññaseṭṭhāsahāyasaṅkhyādīsu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27) aññatthe dissati , ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.228) seṭṭhatthe, ‘‘eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.405) asahāye, ‘‘ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu saṅkhyāyaṃ. Idhāpi saṅkhyāyanti dassento āha ‘‘ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso’’ti. Kālañca samayañcāti yuttakālañca paccayasāmaggiñca khaṇoti okāso. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayapaṭilābhahetuttā. Khaṇo eva ca samayo. Yo ‘‘khaṇo’’ti ca ‘‘samayo’’ti ca vuccati, so ekovāti hi attho mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Samayopi khoti sikkhāpadapūraṇassa hetupi. Samayappavādaketi diṭṭhippavādake. Tattha hi nisinnā titthiyā attano attano samayaṃ pavadantīti. Atthābhisamayāti hitapaṭilābhā. Abhisametabboti abhisamayo, abhisamayo attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti pīḷanādīni abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā vuttāni. Abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūto attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti. Tāneva tathā ekattena vuttāni. Tattha pīḷanaṃ dukkhasaccassa taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ.
在这里,辅助因聚集、会合在一起,所以叫“samaya”,也就是和合、集合。道与梵行在那个时候和依止的人那里会合、聚集,所以叫“samaya”,也就是刹那。众生或自性法在这里会合,或者通过它与俱生法等以生起等方式会合,所以叫“samaya”,也就是时间。因为从究竟意义来说,时间并不存在,它只是随着法的运转而被当作法的依托和工具,仅仅是以假名来称呼罢了。诸部分平等地、或者共同地运行、生起、安住,所以叫“samaya”,也就是聚集,就像说“集”一样。所谓聚集,就是诸部分一同安住。果从其余诸缘的会合中由此而生起、运转,所以叫“samaya”,也就是因,就像说“集”一样。以结缚的方式结合,在自己的所缘中运转;或者以坚固执取的方式,众生随各自的执著而被系缚、运转,所以叫“samaya”,也就是见;因为众生被见结极度地系缚。和合、相遇、聚合,所以叫“samaya”,也就是获得。缓慢地运行,或者正确地运行、离去,所以叫“samaya”,也就是断除。应当以智慧现前地、正确地趣入、现观,所以叫“abhisamaya”,也就是诸法不颠倒的自性。以现前的方式正确地到达、通晓、觉悟,所以叫“abhisamaya”,也就是诸法不颠倒自性的通达。应当如此理解“samaya”一词在各种不同含义中的用法。在解释“samaya”一词的含义时,“abhisamaya”一词的例证也应按照上述方式理解。“Assā”是“samaya”的词形。这里取时间之义,因为和合等含义在此不可能成立,而且就像诸方、诸众一样,为了说明经的缘起,应当指出时间。巴利
Tattha sahakārīkāraṇaṃ sannijjhaṃ sameti samavetīti samayo, samavāyo. Sameti samāgacchati maggabrahmacariyaṃ ettha tadādhārapuggalehīti samayo, khaṇo. Sameti ettha, etena vā saṃgacchati satto, sabhāvadhammo vā sahajātādīhi uppādādīhi vāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ karaṇaṃ viya ca kappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyatīti. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavasahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūhoti. Avasesapaccayānaṃ samāgame eti phalaṃ etasmā uppajjati pavattati cāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā saṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo, diṭṭhi; diṭṭhisaññojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhantīti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, paṭilābho. Samayanaṃ, sammā vā ayanaṃ apagamoti samayo, pahānaṃ. Abhimukhaṃ ñāṇena sammā etabbo abhisametabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparīto sabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvāvabodho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samaya-saddassa pavatti veditabbā. Samayasaddassa atthuddhāre abhisamayasaddassa udāharaṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Assāti samayasaddassa . Kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ atthānaṃ idha asambhavato, desadesakaparisānaṃ viya suttassa nidānabhāvena kālassa apadisitabbato ca.
那么,为什么这里只是笼统地标出时间,而没有具体限定为季节、年份等呢?回答说:“在此虽亦……”等。为了说明即使没有按季节、年份等来限定,单凭“时”这个词的表述就已经获得了这个殊胜之处,所以说了“或这些……”等。因为一般性的说明就能涵盖具体的差别。其中,现法乐住之时,是指每天以禅那和果等至度过的时段,特别是指那七个七日。极为明显之时,是指以震动一万世界、放大光明等而彰显的时段。为了用另一种方式把前面所说的各类差别中的一部分统摄起来加以说明,所以说了“又如……”等。事实确实如此:智的作用之时和自利修行之时就是正等觉之时;圣默然之时就是现法乐住之时;悲悯作用、利他修行和法谈之时就是说法之时本身。巴利
Kasmā panettha aniyamitavaseneva kālo niddiṭṭho, na utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyametvāti? Āha – ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyamaṃ akatvā samayasaddassa vacanena ayampi guṇo laddho hotīti dassento ‘‘ye vā ime’’tiādimāha. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhatīti. Tattha diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo devasikaṃ jhānaphalasamāpattīhi vītināmanakālo, visesato sattasattāhāni. Suppakāsāti dasasahassilokadhātusaṃkampanaobhāsapātubhāvādīhi pākaṭā. Yathāvuttabhedesu eva samayesu ekadesaṃ pakārantarehi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yo cāya’’ntiādimāha. Tathā hi ñāṇakiccasamayo attahitapaṭipattisamayo ca abhisambodhisamayo, ariyatuṇhībhāvasamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo, karuṇākiccaparahitapaṭipattidhammikathāsamayo desanāsamayo eva.
用工具格的说明,就是这层关联。这里的“于此”,是指在阿毗达摩以及其他经文的句和律当中。“如此”,是指用处格和工具格来表达。所依的意思就是所依的意思。所谓“有”,就是作用;以这种作用来标示另一种作用的特征,就是以“有”来标示“有”。在这里,就像时间虽然被自性法所限定,从究竟意义上说并不存在,却以所依的身份被认知——因为它只在那一刹那生起,之前之后都不存在,比如“午前生,午后去”这类说法;又像“聚集”,虽然离开各个部分并不存在,只是假名安立,却以各部分所依的身份被认知,比如“树上有枝”“麦堆里出生的”这类说法。为了说明这里也是如此,所以说“作为所依故……诸法”。在某个时间或某个法聚中,如果欲界善心生起,那么就在同一时间、同一法聚中,触等也存在——这就是这里的含义。又像“牛在挤奶时去了,挤完奶时回来了”,是用挤奶这个作用来标示去和来的作用;同样地,这里虽然说“在某个时候,在那个时候”,但“有”这个意思,因为句义本身不离存在性,自然就能被领会,于是以时间之有的作用来标示心的生起作用,以触等之有的作用来标示触等的存在作用。所谓“在某个时候”,就是在第九刹那,或者在如理作意等因、因缘和合具足的时候,欲界善心生起;就在那一刹那、那个因、那个因缘和合当中,触等也存在。为了说明这两处的“时”字都是用处格来标示,并且与作为特征的“有”相应,所以说“刹那……被标示”。巴利
Karaṇavacanena niddeso katoti sambandho. Tatthāti abhidhammatadaññasuttapadavinayesu. Tathāti bhummakaraṇehi. Adhikaraṇattho ādhārattho. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, tāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Tattha yathā kālo sabhāvadhammaparicchinno sayaṃ paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññāto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto, sāyanhe gacchatī’’ti ca ādīsu, samūho ca avayavavinimutto avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddho avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññāpīyati ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavarāsiyaṃ sambhūto’’tiādīsu, evaṃ idhāpīti dassento āha ‘‘adhikaraṇañhi…pe… dhammāna’’nti. Yasmiṃ kāle dhammapuñje vā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ eva kāle dhammapuñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho. Yathā ca ‘‘gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato’’ti dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ idhāpi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, tasmiṃ samaye’’ti ca vutte ‘‘satī’’ti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hoti padatthassa sattāvirahābhāvatoti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā phassādīnaṃ bhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyati. Yasmiṃ samayeti yasmiṃ navame khaṇe, yasmiṃ yonisomanasikārādihetumhi, paccayasamavāye vā sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, hetumhi, paccayasamavāye vā phassādayopi hontīti ubhayattha samayasadde bhummaniddeso kato lakkhaṇabhūtabhāvayuttoti dassento āha ‘‘khaṇa…pe… lakkhīyatī’’ti.
因由义和工具义也能成立,就像“靠食物而住,靠诵习而住,用斧头砍,用锄头挖”这类说法一样。因为世尊听到有人违犯之后,就召集比丘僧团,审问那个犯事的人,加以呵责,并且不放过事情发生的那段时间,就在那个时候制定学处,同时也顾及制定学处的因由,就像在第三巴拉基格等戒条中那样。巴利
Hetuatthokaraṇattho ca sambhavati ‘‘annena vasati, ajjhenena vasati, pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya. Vītikkamañhi sutvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ otiṇṇakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena sikkhāpadāni paññapento bhagavā viharati sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno tatiyapārājikādīsu viya.
从最初一开始,一直到说法结束,始终以被称为利他修行的悲心而安住。为了说明那个意义,也就是为了说明彻底连贯的意义。这里用宾格来说明,就像说“学习一个月”那样。巴利
Accantameva ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva desanāniṭṭhānaṃ parahitapaṭipattisaṅkhātena karuṇāvihārena. Tadatthajotanatthanti accantasaṃyogatthajotanatthaṃ. Upayogavacananiddeso kato yathā ‘‘māsaṃ ajjhetī’’ti.
“古代的”是指注释书的老师们。“只是说法上的差别”,意思是差别仅仅在于言语表达。这就说明,在经和律中作了语法格上的区分。巴利
Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Abhilāpamattabhedoti vacanamattena viseso. Tena suttavinayesu vibhattibyattayo katoti dasseti.
“最胜”一词是表达最胜之义的语词,被称为“最胜”,是因为它与最胜的功德相伴。对“最上”这个词,这里也应同样理解。“应受尊重”是指与尊重的状态相连,因为与值得尊重的功德相应,或者因为值得被人尊敬,所以是“应受尊重”。这前面已经说过了,但在这里不应该再讨论,因为这部注释书是《清净道论》的一部分,用意就在这里。巴利
Seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘seṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato. Tathā uttamanti etthāpi. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato, garukaraṇārahatāya vā gāravayutto. Vuttoyeva, na pana idha vattabbo visuddhimaggassa imissā aṭṭhakathāya ekadesabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
另一种解释(相应部义注 1.1.1;精义义注 1.律之利益论注释;清净道论大复注 1.144;如是语义注 发端语):从“bhāgavā”这个词得出“bhagavā”,从“bhatavā”得出“bhagavā”,从“bhāge vanī”得出“bhagavā”,从“bhage vanī”得出“bhagavā”,从“bhattavā”得出“bhagavā”,从“bhage vamī”得出“bhagavā”,从“bhāge vamī”得出“bhagavā”。巴利
Aparo nayo (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; sārattha. ṭī. 1.vinayānisaṃsakathāvaṇṇanā; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.144; itivu. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) – bhāgavāti bhagavā, bhatavāti bhagavā, bhāge vanīti bhagavā, bhage vanīti bhagavā, bhattavāti bhagavā, bhage vamīti bhagavā, bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
世尊是“bhagavā”,是“bhatavā”的“bhāge”;而在“bhage”里是“vanī”的“bhattavā”。
吐弃了诸福德即是“bhage vami”,同样吐弃了诸分即是“bhāge vamī”;因此吐弃者即是世尊,即征服者。巴利
Bhagavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino.
在这里,为什么说“bhāgavā”就是“bhagavā”呢?因为以戒为首的那些法蕴——也就是功德的部分、功德的组成——只有如来才拥有,不与任何人共有,无与伦比,确实存在、可以证得。比如如来的戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见,惭、愧、信、精进、念与正知,戒清净、见清净、止、观,三善根、三善行、三正思惟、三无过失想、三界,四念处、四正勤、四神足、四圣道、四圣果、四无碍解、四生遮断智、四圣种、四自信智,五勤支、五支具足正定、五智具足正定、五根、五力、五出离界、五解脱处智、五熟解脱想,六随念处、六尊敬、六出离界、六恒住、六无上、六抉择分想、六神通、六不共智,七不退法、七圣法、七圣财、七觉支、七善士法、七弃舍事、七想、七应供者品说、七诸漏尽者力说,八慧获得因说、八正性、八世法超越、八发勤事、八非时说、八大人之思惟、八胜处说、八解脱,九如理作意根法、九遍净勤支、九有情居说、九害舍遣、九想、九种种、九次第住,十庇护法、十遍处、十善业道、十正性、十圣居、十无学法、十如来力,十一慈功德,十二法轮相,十三头陀功德,十四佛智,十五解脱成熟法,十六种入出息念,十六种应作进一步修习的法,十八佛法,十九种省察智,四十四种智的事相,五十种生灭智,五十一种善法,七十七种智的事相,以二十四俱胝百千劫的修行所行的大金刚智,以及以无量方式遍观缘起、审察、省察而说的智,同样,在无量世界界域中对无量众生的种种意乐等加以分别的智——如此等等,无量无数、种种差别、不与他人共有、无与伦比的功德部分、功德组成,确实存在、可以证得。因此,正如所说的那样,由于这些功德部分存在于他,本应说“bhāgavā”,但把“ā”音缩短,就说成了“bhagavā”。这样,先说“bhāgavā”就是“bhagavā”。巴利
Tattha kathaṃ bhāgavāti bhagavā? Ye te sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, te anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā tathāgatassa atthi upalabbhanti. Tathā hissa sīlaṃ, samādhi, paññā, vimutti, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ, hirī, ottappaṃ, saddhā, vīriyaṃ, sati sampajaññaṃ, sīlavisuddhi, diṭṭhivisuddhi, samatho, vipassanā, tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tīṇi sucaritāni, tayo sammāvitakkā, tisso anavajjasaññā, tisso dhātuyo, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, cattāro ariyamaggā, cattāri ariyaphalāni, catasso paṭisambhidā, catuyonipaṭicchedakañāṇaṃ, cattāro ariyavaṃsā, cattāri vesārajjañāṇāni, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni, pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi, pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, pañca nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, pañca vimuttāyatanañāṇāni, pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā, cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, cha gāravā, cha nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, cha satatavihārā, cha anuttariyāni, cha nibbedhabhāgiyā saññā, cha abhiññā, cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni, satta aparihāniyā dhammā, satta ariyadhammā, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, satta sappurisadhammā, satta nijjaravatthūni, satta saññā, satta dakkhiṇeyyapuggaladesanā, satta khīṇāsavabaladesanā, aṭṭha paññāpaṭilābhahetudesanā, aṭṭha sammattāni, aṭṭha lokadhammātikkamā, aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni, aṭṭha akkhaṇadesanā, aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakkā, aṭṭha abhibhāyatanadesanā, aṭṭha vimokkhā, nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā, nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni, nava sattāvāsadesanā, nava āghātapaṭivinayā, nava saññā, nava nānattā, nava anupubbavihārā, dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā, dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, dasa kusalakammapathā, dasa sammattāni, dasa ariyavāsā, dasa asekkhadhammā, dasa tathāgatabalāni, ekādasa mettānisaṃsā, dvādasa dhammacakkākārā, terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pañcadasa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, soḷasavidhā ānāpānassati, soḷasa aparantapanīyā dhammā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni, paññāsa udayabbayañāṇāni, paropaṇṇāsa kusaladhammā, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhāsamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇaṃ, anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānapavicayapaccavekkhaṇadesanāñāṇāni tathā anantāsu lokadhātūsu anantānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayādivibhāvanañāṇāni cāti evamādayo anantāparimāṇabhedā anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti, tasmā yathāvuttavibhāgā guṇabhāgā assa atthīti ‘‘bhāgavā’’ti vattabbe ā-kārassa rassattaṃ katvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto. Evaṃ tāva bhāgavāti bhagavā.
因为以戒为首的一切功德分,毫无遗漏地
这些(功德)存在于善逝之中,因此他被称为“bhagavā”(世尊)。巴利
Yasmā sīlādayo sabbe, guṇabhāgā asesato; Vijjanti sugate tasmā, bhagavāti pavuccatīti.
为什么说世尊是“已修习者”呢?那些为了利益一切世间而发起精勤的人,具备了人身等八种条件之后,以大誓愿为求证正等觉而修行的诸大菩萨,应当圆满的布施巴拉密、戒巴拉密、出离巴拉密、慧巴拉密、精进巴拉密、忍耐巴拉密、真实巴拉密、决意巴拉密、慈巴拉密、舍巴拉密这十种巴拉密,十种近巴拉密,十种究竟巴拉密,共三十种巴拉密;布施等四种摄事,真实等四种决意;舍弃肢体、舍弃眼目、舍弃财富、舍弃王国、舍弃妻子儿女这五种大舍弃;前方便、前修行、说法、利益亲族之行、利益世间之行、智慧之行等等。简要地说,这一切福德与智慧的资粮,也就是成就佛陀的诸法,从大誓愿开始,历经四大阿僧祇劫再加十万劫,它们不会变成退减的部分、杂染的部分或停滞的部分,而只会越来越殊胜。像这样恭敬地、不间断地、无遗漏地修习、积集了这些法,所以本该说“bhatavā”的地方,按照语词变化规则,把t变成g,就说成了“bhagavā”。另一种解释是:“bhatavā”就是指他按照所说的方式承载、积集、圆满了前面所说的那些成就佛陀的诸法。因此,“bhatavā”就是“bhagavā”。巴利
Kathaṃ bhatavāti bhagavā? Ye te sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannehi manussattādike aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā sammāsambodhiyā katamahābhinīhārehi mahābodhisattehi paripūritabbā dānapāramī, sīla, nekkhamma, paññā, vīriya, khanti, sacca, adhiṭṭhāna, mettā, upekkhāpāramīti dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo, dānādīni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni, saccādīni cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni, aṅgapariccāgo nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāgoti pañca mahāparicāgā, pubbayogo, pubbacariyā, dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātatthacariyā, lokatthacariyā, buddhicariyāti evamādayo, saṅkhepato vā sabbe puññañāṇasambhārā buddhakaradhammā, te mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni yathā hānabhāgiyā saṃkilesabhāgiyā ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na honti, atha kho uttaruttari visesabhāgiyāva honti, evaṃ sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ anavasesato bhatā sambhatā assa atthīti ‘‘bhatavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto niruttinayena ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā. Atha vā bhatavāti teyeva yathāvutte buddhakaradhamme vuttanayeneva bhari sambhari, paripūresīti attho. Evampi bhatavāti bhagavā.
为了正等觉,一切布施巴拉密等法;
导师修集了资粮,因此也被称为世尊。巴利
Sammāsambodhiyā sabbe, dānapāramiādike; Sambhāre bhatavā nātho, tenāpi bhagavā matoti.
为什么说世尊是“分享份额者”呢?那些每天所行的等至份额,数目达到二十四万亿十万之多,他为了利益世间、也为了自己现法乐住,恒常不断地渴求、分享、亲近、修习这些份额,毫无保留,所以世尊是“分享份额者”。或者说,在应当证知的各种法中——比如善法等、蕴法等——按照应当遍知等方式,简略地说有四种现观的份额;详细地说,像“眼应当遍知,耳……老死应当遍知”这样,有无量应当遍知的份额;像“眼的集应当断除……老死的集应当断除”这样,是应当断除的份额;像“眼的灭……老死的灭应当作证”这样,是应当作证的份额;像“眼灭之道”“四念处”这样,有种种不同应当修习的份额。对于这一切法,他按照各自适合的方式,通过所缘修习和亲近修习去亲近、分享它们。这样,世尊也是“分享份额者”。或者说,他这样想:“这些戒蕴等法蕴,是与弟子们共通的功德份额、功德部分,怎样才能把它们安立在应当调伏的众生的相续中呢?”他以大悲心渴求、期盼,而他的这种期盼如愿产生了果报。这样,世尊也是“分享份额者”。巴利
Kathaṃ bhāge vanīti bhagavā? Ye te catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattibhāgā, te anavasesato lokahitatthaṃ attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ niccakappaṃ vani bhaji sevi bahulamakāsīti bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā abhiññeyyadhammesu kusalādīsu khandhādīsu ca ye te pariññeyyādivasena saṅkhepato vā catubbidhā abhisamayabhāgā, vitthārato pana ‘‘cakkhu pariññeyyaṃ sotaṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ pariññeyya’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.21) aneke pariññeyyabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa samudayo pahātabbo…pe… jarāmaraṇassa samudayo pahātabbo’’tiādinā pahātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodho…pe… jarāmaraṇassa nirodho sacchikātabbo’’tiādinā sacchikātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’tiādinā, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā ca anekabhedā bhāvetabbabhāgā ca dhammā, te sabbe vani bhaji yathārahaṃ gocarabhāvanāsevanānaṃ vasena sevi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā ‘‘ye ime sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā sāvakehi sādhāraṇā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, kinti nu kho te vineyyasantānesu patiṭṭhapeyya’’nti mahākaruṇāya vani abhipatthayi, sā cassa abhipatthanā yathādhippetaphalāvahā ahosi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā.
世尊于所知、等至与功德诸分,无余依止;
为众生之利,修习而愿求,故如是。巴利
Yasmā ñeyyasamāpattiguṇabhāge asesato; Bhaji patthayi sattānaṃ, hitāya bhagavā tatoti.
为什么说“分享吉祥者”就是世尊呢?简单来说,那些有福报、具足修行的人,随各自能力所及而分享的世间和出世间的成就,就叫做“吉祥”。其中,就世间方面说:如来在成佛之前,还是菩萨的时候,就已经达到了最高的境地,他追求、亲近、修习这些吉祥,并依此安住,毫无遗漏地圆满了一切成佛之法,圆满了佛的功德;成佛之后,对于那些没有过失、带来安乐、不共于凡夫的出世间吉祥,他也同样追求、亲近、修习。广而言之,从一方之主、转轮王的成就、天王的成就等,到禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见、修道、证果等种种超越凡夫的殊胜法——所有这些种类繁多的吉祥,他都曾追求、亲近、修习。因此,说“分享吉祥者”就是世尊。巴利
Kathaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā? Samāsato tāva katapuññehi payogasampannehi yathāvibhavaṃ bhajīyantīti bhagā, lokiyalokuttarā sampattiyo. Tattha lokiye tāva tathāgato sambodhito pubbe bodhisattabhūto paramukkaṃsagate vani bhaji sevi, yattha patiṭṭhāya niravasesato buddhakaradhamme samannānento buddhadhamme paripācesi, buddhabhūto pana te niravajjasukhūpasaṃhite anaññasādhāraṇe lokuttarepi vani bhaji sevi, vitthārato pana padesarajjaissariyacakkavattisampatti-devarajjasampattiādivasena- jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiñāṇadassana-maggabhāvanāphalasacchi- kiriyādi-uttarimanussadhammavasena ca anekavihite anaññasādhāraṇe bhage vani bhaji sevi. Evampi bhage vanīti bhagavā.
世间所有诸成就,及出世间众妙果,
正觉悉皆已受用,是故名之为世尊。巴利
Yā tā sampattiyo loke, yā ca lokuttarā puthu; Sabbā tā bhaji sambuddho, tasmāpi bhagavā matoti.
世尊怎样才是“有恭敬者”呢?他有众多坚定恭敬的人,所以叫有恭敬者。如来具足大悲、一切知智等无量、无可比拟的威德功德,因此在一切众生中最为尊上。他先行去除一切不利,致力于给一切众生带来无余的利益与安乐,并以无上的善巧方便,对包括天人在内的众生作究竟的饶益。他具足三十二大人相、八十随形好、一寻身光等不共他人的殊胜庄严身相;功德如实成就,所以“彼世尊即是如此”这样相续流传、遍满三界、广大又极清净的赞叹之声,他都具足。他又在少欲知足等方面达到极致、善能安住,并具足十力、四无畏等无上功德。在这个以四种标准来衡量人的世间中——有人以形色为标准而信形色,有人以音声为标准而信音声,有人以简朴为标准而信简朴,有人以法为标准而信法——他在一切方面都能让人生起净信,因此是“一切善见”。他是无量众生和天人的恭敬、尊重、敬仰之处,是至上爱敬与坚定信仰的所在。凡是安住于他的教诫、具足不坏净信的人,他们的净信与恭敬,任何沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵都不能动摇;因为他们即使舍弃自己的生命,也不会舍弃对世尊的净信,对世尊的教令有坚定的恭敬。因此说——巴利
Kathaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā? Bhattā daḷhabhattikā assa bahū atthīti bhattavā. Tathāgato hi mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimitanirupamapabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgibhāvato sabbasattuttamo, sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantūpakāritāya dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇa-asītianubyañjana-byāmappabhādianaññasādhāraṇa- visesapaṭimaṇḍita-rūpakāyatāya yathābhucca-guṇādhigatena ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattena lokattayabyāpinā suvipulena suvisuddhena ca thutighosena samannāgatattā ukkaṃsapāramippattāsu appicchatāsantuṭṭhiādīsu suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato dasabalacatuvesārajjādiniratisayaguṇavisesa-samaṅgibhāvato ca rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno, ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno, lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno, dhammappamāṇo dhammappasannoti evaṃ catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse sabbathāpi pasādāvahabhāvena samantapāsādikattā aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sadevamanussānaṃ ādarabahumānagāravāyatanatāya paramapemasambhattiṭṭhānaṃ. Ye tassa ovāde patiṭṭhitā aveccappasādena samannāgatā honti, kenaci asaṃhāriyā tesaṃ pasādabhatti samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā. Tathā hi te attano jīvitapariccāgepi tattha pasādaṃ na pariccajanti, tassa vā āṇaṃ daḷhabhattibhāvato. Tenevāha –
“ 凡是真正知恩、懂得报恩的智者,
他是善友,且具足坚固的忠诚。”巴利
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro; Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
比丘们,就像大海安住于自己的本性,不会越过海岸线;同样地,比丘们,凡是我为弟子们制定的学处,我的弟子们哪怕是为了活命也不会违越。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattati, evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (a. ni. 8.20; udā. 45; cūḷava. 385) ca.
世尊这样把“bhattavā”说成“bhagavā”:按语言变形的规则,去掉一个 t 音,再把另一个 t 音变成 g 音。巴利
Evaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ekassa ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā itarassa ga-kāraṃ katvā.
因为他具足超胜的功德,致力于利益世间。
导师有众多的忠诚敬奉者,因此他被称为世尊。巴利
Guṇātisayayuttassa, yasmā lokahitesino; Sambhattā bahavo satthu, bhagavā tena vuccatīti.
为什么说“已吐出祥瑞者”就是世尊?因为如来还在菩萨位时,在过去许多生中圆满修习诸巴拉密,就把称为“祥瑞”的荣光、自在和名声都吐了出来、呕了出来,像吐掉一口痰那样毫不留恋地丢弃了;在最后一生中,即使转轮王的祥瑞已经到手——那等同于天界主宰、统御四大洲的自在,依于转轮王成就、闪耀七宝的荣耀——他也视如草芥,毫不留恋地舍弃,出家而证得正觉。因此,他吐出了这些祥瑞等,所以称为“已吐出祥瑞者”的世尊。另一种说法是,“bhā”是星宿之名,与它们一同运行的存在叫“bhaga”,也就是依止须弥山、持双山、北俱卢洲、雪山等殊胜器世间处的光辉,因住劫而存续;如来也吐出了这些“bhaga”,因为他超越了住在其中的众生界,以断除对它们的欲贪而舍弃。这样,他也是“已吐出诸光辉处者”,所以称为世尊。巴利
Kathaṃ bhage vamīti bhagavā? Yasmā tathāgato bodhisattabhūtopi purimāsu jātīsu pāramiyo pūrento bhagasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ issariyaṃ yasañca vami, uggiri, kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayi; pacchimattabhāvepi hatthāgataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasadisaṃ catudīpissariyaṃ cakkavattisampattisannissayaṃ sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasañca tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime siriādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayā sobhā kappaṭṭhiyabhāvato, tepi bhage vami tannivāsisattāvāsasamatikkamanato, tappaṭibaddhachandarāgapahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
因彼舍转轮王尊荣、名闻、权势与安乐,
及世间心,故为善逝、世尊。巴利
Cakkavattisiriṃ yasmā, yasaṃ issariyaṃ sukhaṃ; Pahāsi lokacittañca, sugato bhagavā tatoti.
世尊是怎样“吐出诸部分”的呢?“诸部分”指的是具有共同性质的法类,这些法类按蕴、处、界等方式来分,其中又按色、受等来分,按地界等、过去等来分,有种种差别。世尊断除了一切戏论、一切轭、一切结缚、一切结,在证得不死界时,把它们统统吐出、呕出,毫不留恋地丢弃,不再回头。因为他就是这样,以逐一分析诸法之方式,毫无剩余地吐出、呕出了一切法类,以无所眷恋的舍离而丢弃,即:一切处的地界、水界、火界、风界,眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意,色、声、香、味、触、法,眼识……乃至意识,眼触……乃至意触,眼触所生的受……乃至意触所生的受,眼触所生的想……乃至意触所生的想,眼触所生的思……乃至意触所生的思,对色的渴爱……乃至对法的渴爱,对色的寻……乃至对法的寻,对色的伺……乃至对法的伺。正如经中所说:“阿难,凡是已被舍弃、吐出、释放、断除、遣除的,如来绝不可能再回头,绝无此理。”这样,也可称世尊为“吐出诸部分者”。另外,“吐出诸部分”也可以指:他通过圣道智之门,把一切善与不善、有罪与无罪、低劣与殊胜、黑白相对的法,统统吐出、呕出,毫不留恋地舍掉、抛弃,并且为令他人也达到同样的境地而说法。经中也这样说:“诸比丘,连法尚且应当舍离,何况非法。”又说:“诸比丘,我为你们说筏喻之法,是为了渡过,不是为了执取。”这样,也可称世尊为“吐出诸部分者”。巴利
Kathaṃ bhāge vamīti bhagavā? Bhāgā nāma sabhāgadhammakoṭṭhāsā, te khandhāyatanadhātādivasena, tatthāpi rūpavedanādivasena, pathaviyādiatītādivasena ca anekavidhā. Te bhagavā sabbaṃ papañcaṃ sabbaṃ yogaṃ sabbaṃ ganthaṃ sabbaṃ saṃyojanaṃ samucchinditvā amataṃ dhātuṃ samadhigacchanto vami uggiri, anapekkho chaḍḍayi na paccāgami. Tathā hesa ‘‘sabbatthameva pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ, cakkhuṃ sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhaṃ kāyaṃ manaṃ, rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ, cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ saññaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ saññaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ, rūpataṇhaṃ…pe… dhammataṇhaṃ, rūpavitakkaṃ…pe… dhammavitakkaṃ, rūpavicāraṃ…pe… dhammavicāra’’ntiādinā anupadadhammavibhāgavasenapi sabbeva dhammakoṭṭhāse anavasesato vami uggiri, anapekkhapariccāgena chaḍḍayi. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ taṃ, ānanda, cattaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tathāgato puna paccāgamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.183). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāge vamīti sabbepi kusalākusale sāvajjānavajje hīnapaṇīte kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme ariyamaggañāṇamukhena vami uggiri anapekkho pariccaji pajahi, paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desesi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 1.240), kullūpamaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.240). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
蕴、处、界等诸法分中,大仙已吐弃黑白;
是故,亦被称为世尊。巴利
Khandhāyatanadhātādi-dhammabhāgāmahesinā; Kaṇhasukkā yato vantā, tatopi bhagavā matoti.
“ 世尊能分亦能享,于诸分享悉吐舍;
吐尽分享与福分,故称世尊为胜者。”巴利
‘‘Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino’’ti.
他能让法身亲自现前,所以这样说。因为经中说:“阿难,我为你们宣说、制定的法与律,在我去世后,就是你们的导师。”由此可知,法具有导师的地位。他的身体如同金刚聚合而成,别人无法破坏。因为没有人能对世尊的色身造成任何伤害。巴利
Dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karotīti ‘‘yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.216) vacanato dhammassa satthubhāvapariyāyo vijjatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo parehi abhejjasarīrattā. Na hi bhagavato rūpakāye kenaci sakkā antarāyo kātunti.
这段说明的是“开示圆满”:用“如是”这个词来指示即将宣说的整部经,所以显示出开示的圆满。说明“声闻圆满”:因为这是由我这位证得无碍解、被世尊在五种场合列为最上首的大声闻所听闻的;而且这确实是我亲自听闻,不是听别人转述,不是辗转传来的——这样显示这个意思。说明“时间圆满”:当“世尊”这个词出现时,所用的“一时”这个词,显示出那个时间具备佛陀出世所庄严的特质。因为最殊胜的时间圆满,就是佛陀出世。因此这样说——巴利
Desanāsampattiṃ niddisati vakkhamānassa sakalassa suttassa ‘‘eva’’nti nidassanato. Sāvakasampattiṃ niddisati paṭisambhidāppattena pañcasu ṭhānesu bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitena mayā mahāsāvakena sutaṃ, tañca kho mayāva sutaṃ, na anussutikaṃ, na paramparābhatanti imassa atthassa dīpanato. Kālasampattiṃ niddisati bhagavā-saddasannidhāne payuttassa samaya-saddassa kālassa buddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitabhāvadīpanato. Buddhuppādaparamā hi kālasampadā. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 在劫浊的斗诤时代,佛陀出世——啊,这真是极其稀有!
生于火中,如蜜汁盈溢的莲花。”巴利
‘‘Kappakasāye kaliyuge, buddhuppādo aho mahacchariyaṃ; Hutāvahamajjhe jātaṃ, samuditamakarandamaravinda’’nti. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.1; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1 rūpādivaggavaṇṇanā);
“世尊”这个称呼,是在说明说法者的圆满,因为这是对具足功德、最为殊胜的众生、值得尊重与敬奉者所用的尊称。巴利
Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ niddisati guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacanabhāvato.
今天是吉祥日、好时刻、好星宿:意思是今天就是吉祥日,因此就是好星宿,而在那个星宿当中,这个时刻也是好时刻。“不要让它过去”:意思是不要不知不觉地让夜晚流逝,应当这样理解其中的关联。“Ukkāsu ṭhitāsu ṭhitā”(立于诸火炬中而住立),因此称为“显著”。这是说在闪耀的诸火炬中安住、立足;应当依照波你尼句法规则(3.2.5)等来了解这个词的语源成立。或者依照词源学的方式,ukkaṭṭhā 的意思是“立于诸火炬中而住立”。另有一种说法:“因为那座城市具足了地段的成就、人的成就和资具的成就,由于具有显著功德的关系,所以获得了‘ukkaṭṭhā’这个名称。”巴利
Maṅgaladivaso sukhaṇo sunakkhattanti ajja maṅgaladivaso, tasmā sunakkhattaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ sukhaṇo. Mā atikkamīti mā rattivibhāyanaṃ anudikkhantānaṃ ratti atikkamīti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Ukkāsu ṭhitāsu ṭhitāti ukkaṭṭhā (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.36). Ukkāsu vijjotalantīsu ṭhitā patiṭṭhitāti mūlavibhūjādipakkhepena (pāṇini 3.2.5) saddasiddhi veditabbā. Niruttinayena vā ukkāsu ṭhitāsu ṭhitā āsīti ukkaṭṭhā. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘bhūmibhāgasampattiyā manussasampattiyā upakaraṇasampattiyā ca sā nagarī ukkaṭṭhaguṇayogato ‘ukkaṭṭhā’ti nāmaṃ labhī’’ti.
不是特别地区分,而是从“住”的共通意义上说的。在威仪住等四种住当中:也就是在威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住这四种住里。显示具足:就是显示具足的状态。这:指“他住”这个词。因为这个词确实出现在这些经文里:“在这里,某人与在家众交往、混在一起,同喜同忧”——这是威仪住;“诸比丘,当比丘远离欲……成就初禅而住”——这是天住;“他以与慈相应的心,遍满一方而住”——这是梵住;“阿吉韦萨那居士,我在那番谈话结束时,就在那个先前的定相上,把心向内安住、平静下来、令其专一、入定,我就这样一直安住”——这是圣住。巴利
Avisesenāti na visesena, vihārabhāvasāmaññenāti attho. Iriyāpatha…pe… vihāresūti iriyāpathavihāro dibbavihāro brahmavihāro ariyavihāroti etesu catūsu vihāresu. Samaṅgiparidīpananti samaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Etanti ‘‘viharatī’’ti etaṃ padaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘idhekacco gihīhi saṃsaṭṭho viharati sahanandī sahasokī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) iriyāpathavihāre āgataṃ; ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 160; vibha. 624) dibbavihāre; ‘‘so mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.556; 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77; 2.309; 3.230) brahmavihāre; ‘‘so kho ahaṃ aggivessana tassāyeva kathāya pariyosāne tasmiṃ eva purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi sannisādemi ekodiṃ karomi samādahāmi, yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) ariyavihāre.
在这其中,身体的运用、运转就是威仪,也就是身体的动作。因为它是威仪运转的途径,所以站立等姿势就叫威仪路。因为具有站立姿势的人可以用身体做某些事,或者具有行走等其他任何一种姿势。或者说,身体依靠这个而活动、运转,或者身体的工作依靠它来进行,所以叫威仪;对于威仪的运转来说,它作为途径,所以叫路,合起来就是威仪路,指的就是站立等姿势本身。而从究竟意义上看,它不过是以行走等形态方式转起的、由四种色法相续构成的色法组合。
住:依之而住,或者说以之而住,所以叫住;威仪路本身就是住,所以叫威仪住。
天:因为存在于天界,所以叫天。这里的意思是,由于在那里有多次运转,所以其义指在梵众天等天界中有。在那里,属于天的威神力,或者为了达成那个目的而趋向的,就叫天;或者依神通、神变的力量而有广大的趣处,所以叫天。既是天又是住,所以叫天住,指四种色界禅那。无色界禅那也被含摄在这里面。
梵住:诸梵天神的住,或者梵天神的住,指四种无量心。
圣住:诸圣者的住,或者圣者的住,指四种沙门果。
世尊虽然能以一种威仪姿势让身体持续更长时间,但为了显示“这是已执取身体的本来性质”,才那样说。或者说,因为世尊无论住在哪里,都在为应受调伏的众生说法,又以各种禅那度过时光而安住,所以为应受调伏的众生和自己带来、引生种种利益与安乐,因此说“带来种种”。这里应当这样理解其义。巴利
Tattha iriyanaṃ vattanaṃ iriyā, kāyappayogo. Tassā pavattanupāyabhāvato ṭhānādi iriyāpatho. Ṭhānasamaṅgī vā hi kāyena kiñci kareyya gamanādīsu aññatarasamaṅgī vā. Atha vā iriyati pavattati etena attabhāvo, kāyakiccaṃ vāti iriyā, tassā pavattiyā upāyabhāvato pathoti iriyāpatho, ṭhānādi eva. So ca atthato gatinivattiādiākārena pavatto catusantatirūpapabandho eva. Viharaṇaṃ, viharati etenāti vā vihāro, iriyāpatho eva vihāro iriyāpathavihāro. Divi bhavoti dibbo. Tattha bahulappavattiyā brahmapārisajjādidevaloke bhavoti attho. Tattha yo dibbānubhāvo, tadatthāya saṃvattatīti vā dibbo, abhiññābhinīhāravasena mahāgatikattā vā dibbo, dibbo ca so vihāro cāti dibbavihāro, catasso rūpāvacarasamāpattiyo. Āruppasamāpattiyopi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Brahmūnaṃ, brahmāno vā vihārā brahmavihārā, catasso appamaññāyo. Ariyānaṃ, ariyā vā vihārā ariyavihārā, cattāri sāmaññaphalāni. So hi bhagavā ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanantiādi yadipi bhagavā ekenapi iriyāpathena cirataraṃ kālaṃ attabhāvaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkoti, tathāpi ‘‘upādinnakasarīrassa nāma ayaṃ sabhāvo’’ti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā vā bhagavā yattha katthaci vasanto veneyyānaṃ dhammaṃ desento, nānāsamāpattīhi ca kālaṃ vītināmento vasatīti veneyyasattānaṃ attano ca vividhaṃ hitasukhaṃ harati upaneti uppādeti, tasmā vividhaṃ haratīti evamettha attho veditabbo.
Subhagattā(有福相)是指因为希求吉祥而显得美好。因此他说:“因为美好的吉祥,也因为美好的欲乐。”关于“节庆、集会、庆典”这里:“节庆”是指在颇求那月等月份中,以北角宿等星宿为标志的日子里,人们带着眷属一起举行的吉祥活动。“集会”是指舞者集会等。“庆典”是指星宿节。在那里,村镇的居民宣布星宿节庆持续三天或七天,然后按照各自的财力,装饰打扮、准备好,享用财物,玩星宿节的游戏。“对于他们,那件事确实如他们所愿”:对于那些人,他们的那个愿望,依靠居住在当地的天神的威力,大多数情况下确实会那样实现,也就是愿望得以成就的意思。通过“为多数众人所喜爱”这一句,他以另一种方式说明了“因为美好的欲乐”这个词的含义。这里词源解释是:因为可爱,所以被很好地亲近,因此叫“subhaga”;或者这里有美好的树木,所以叫“subhaga”;又或者因为与美好的名声相关联,所以叫“subhaga”——他们这样解释这里的含义。不过有些人读作“subhāgavane”,解释为“在美好地界的树林”。另一些人说,那是一位名叫Subhaga的夜叉的树林,因为被那位夜叉所占有,所以叫“善夜叉林”。在“vananaṃ bhattī”这个含义中,使那爱着生起,在这个意义上就是“vanayati”,应当知道这个词的构成。因此他说“在自己身上产生爱着”。在“乞求”这个含义中,“vanute”就是“vana”,应当知道“vana”这个词是通过比喻引申而使用的。巴利
Subhagattāti sirīkāmānavasena sobhanattā. Tenevāha ‘‘sundarasirikattā sundarakāmattā cā’’ti. Chaṇasamajjaussaveti ettha chaṇaṃ nāma phaggunamāsādīsu uttaraphaggunādi-abhilakkhitadivasesu saparijanānaṃ manussānaṃ maṅgalakaraṇaṃ. Samajjaṃ nāma naṭasamajjādi. Ussavo nakkhattaṃ. Yattha gāmanigamavāsino tayo satta vā divase nakkhattaghosanaṃ katvā yathāvibhavaṃ alaṅkatapaṭiyattā bhoge paribhuñjantā nakkhattakīḷanaṃ kīḷanti. Tesaṃ taṃ tatheva hotīti tesaṃ manussānaṃ taṃ patthanaṃ tannivāsidevatānubhāvena yebhuyyena tatheva hoti, patthanā samijjhatīti attho. Bahujanakantatāyāti iminā ‘‘sundarakāmattā’’ti etasseva padassa pakārantarena atthaṃ vibhāveti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – kamanīyaṭṭhena suṭṭhu bhajīyatīti subhagaṃ, subhā agā rukkhā etthāti vā subhagaṃ, sundarakittiyogato vā ‘‘subhaga’’nti evampettha atthaṃ vaṇṇenti. Keci pana ‘‘subhāgavane’’ti paṭhanti, ‘‘sundarabhūmibhāge vane’’ti cassa atthaṃ vadanti. Subhagassa nāma yakkhassa vanaṃ tena pariggahitattāti ‘‘subhagavana’’nti aññe. Vananaṃ bhattītiatthe taṃ vananaṃ kāretīti etasmiṃ atthe vanayatīti padasiddhi veditabbā. Tenevāha ‘‘attani sinehaṃ uppādetī’’ti. Yācanatthe vanute iti vananti upacārakappanāvasena vana-saddo veditabbo.
正直的枝干指树干挺直。大树指高大的树。在某棵沙罗树根处指在某一棵树的树根处。林中最胜树指作为林中首领的最胜树。那同一个最胜状态,指由林中首领这一身份而来的最上状态、主要状态。正因如此,它被称为沙罗树王。因为能让前来亲近的人感到欢喜,所以称为王;为了说明在其他类似的大树上也有王的称呼,才说了善安住等语。其中,婆罗门、如法的,是呼唤语。在毫不迂回地说明有树枝等的聚合体善安住时,根这个词以无迂回之义转起于特殊的部分上。因为随着习惯用法,它也会迂回地用在类似的事物和依止于它之处,所以在应拔出根这句里,指的是不迂回的根。为了区分,就用一个根字来说明,说于根本之根本可见,就像苦苦、色色这样的说法一样。在不共因上,就是在不共的原因上。意思是说,对于与贪俱生的心生起,在那些唯独它们特有的、以根的意义帮助它们善安住的缘法上,可以见到。巴利
Ujuvaṃsāti ujubhūtaviṭapā. Mahāsālāti mahārukkhā. Aññatarasmiṃ sālamūleti aññatarassa rukkhassa mūle. Vanappatijeṭṭhakarukkhoti vanappatibhūto jeṭṭhakarukkho. Tameva jeṭṭhakabhāvanti vanappatibhāvenāgataṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ padhānabhāvaṃ. Tena hi so ‘‘sālarājā’’ti vutto. Upagatānaṃ rañjanaṭṭhena rājā, aññasmimpi tādise rukkhe rājavohāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘supatiṭṭhitassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha brāhmaṇa dhammikāti ālapanaṃ. Nippariyāyena sākhādimato saṅghātassa suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhane avayavavisese pavattamāno mūla-saddo. Yasmā taṃsadisesu tannissaye padese ca ruḷhīvasena pariyāyato pavattati, tasmā ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyyā’’ti ettha nippariyāyamūlaṃ adhippetanti ekena mūla-saddena visesetvā āha ‘‘mūlamūle dissatī’’ti yathā ‘‘dukkhadukkhaṃ (saṃ. ni. 4.327), rūparūpa’’nti (visuddhi. 2.449) ca. Asādhāraṇahetumhīti asādhāraṇakāraṇe. Lobhasahagatacittuppādānaṃ eva āveṇike nesaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanato mūlaṭṭhena upakārake paccayadhamme dissatīti attho.
这里说的“其中”,是指“住在郁伽咤城的善梵园沙罗树王树下”这句话,也就是“有一次,世尊住在郁伽咤城的善梵园沙罗树王树下”这句话。“可能会有”的意思是:也许有人会这样想,或者会按下面要说的方式提出质疑。“那时,他住在那里”的意思是:如果世尊住在善梵园的沙罗树王树下。“不应这样说”,意思是:因为郁伽咤城和善梵园是不同地点,而且经文已经说了“有一次”。现在,质疑者用“确实不能”等话把自己的想法讲清楚。另一位解经者为了说明“这一切都是不了解没有颠倒之义的人所说的”,而说“然而不应这样看待”。其中,“这”是指“住在郁伽咤城的善梵园沙罗树王树下”这句话。“这样”是指按“如果世尊……”等话所说的、你所质疑的那一点,从意义上说,确实不应这样看待,不应在两者中都显示没有前际后际的住处,这就是意思。巴利
Tatthāti ‘‘ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ vākyaṃ, tatta. Siyāti kassaci evaṃ parivitakko siyā, vakkhamānākārena kadāci codeyya vāti attho. Atha tattha viharatīti yadi subhagavane sālarājamūle viharati. Na vattabbanti nānāṭhānabhūtattā ukkaṭṭhāsubhagavanānaṃ, ekaṃ samayanti ca vuttattāti adhippāyo. Idāni codako tameva attano adhippāyaṃ ‘‘na hi sakkā’’tiādinā vivarati. Itaro sabbametaṃ aviparītaṃ atthaṃ ajānantena vuttanti dassento ‘‘na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti āha. Tattha etanti ‘‘ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Evanti ‘‘yadi tāva bhagavā’’tiādinā yaṃ taṃ bhavatā coditaṃ, taṃ atthato evaṃ na kho pana daṭṭhabbaṃ, na ubhayattha apubbaacarimaṃ vihāradassanatthanti attho.
现在,为了说明自己所意欲、没有颠倒的含义,说明这个含义其实早就已经说过了,而对方却没能通达,所以注释者说:“我们不是说过……在沙罗树王树下吗?”注释者是心里带着“即便如此,也只应说‘住在幸运林的沙罗树王树下’,而不应说‘在伍咖达城’”这个问难,才说了“为了指示行境的村落”等话。巴利
Idāni attano yathādhippetaṃ aviparītaṃ atthaṃ, tassa ca paṭikacceva vuttabhāvaṃ, tena ca appaṭividdhattaṃ pakāsento ‘‘nanu avocumha…pe… sālarājamūle’’ti āha. Evampi ‘‘subhagavane sālarājamūle viharatī’’cceva vattabbaṃ, na ‘‘ukkaṭṭhāya’’nti codanaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘gocaragāmanidassanattha’’ntiādi.
这里必须要说明托钵行化的村落。因为就像描述善梵园等地方,有摄受出家者等多种作用一样,描述伍嘎咤镇也有摄受在家者等多种多样的作用。为了说明这一点,注释者才说了“由于描述了伍嘎咤镇”等话。其中,摄受在家者应当这样理解:通过接受资具,通过给予亲近和侍奉的机会,通过说法使他们安立于皈依和戒中,以及根据他们各自的根机,引导他们获得更高的证悟。而摄受出家者应当这样理解:在这里,通过接纳适合学习、提问和修习禅修业处的住处。以悲悯心而来,不是为了利养等目的;以智慧而离去,不是为了冲突等原因——这是为了说明来和去都没有烦恼染污。所谓如法之乐,就是没有过失的快乐。天人之所以多来饶益,是因为这里远离人群。确实,天神们认为人烟稀少的地方才值得前往。成就这个意义,就是成就世间的利益,也就是完成佛陀应做的事。以如是等——“等”字表示:通过描述伍嘎咤镇,显示了色身得到摄护;通过描述善梵园等,显示了法身得到摄护。同样,前者表示依他人而作的事业,后者表示依自己而作的事业。或者,前者表示悲悯的作用,后者表示智慧的作用。又或者,通过前者显示世尊具足至上的悲悯,通过后者显示世尊具足至上的舍。因为世尊以至上的悲悯悲悯一切众生,同时由于安住于至上的舍,不会陷入贪爱和嗔恨的随眠烦恼;而他虽然安住于舍,却因为具有大悲悯的本性,在利益他人、安乐他人的事业上从不懈怠。巴利
Avassaṃ cettha gocaragāmakittanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ yathā subhagavanādikittanaṃ pabbajitānuggahakaraṇādianekappayojanaṃ, evaṃ gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇādivividhappayojananti dassento ‘‘ukkaṭṭhākittanenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha paccayaggahaṇena upasaṅkamanapayirupāsanānaṃ okāsadānena dhammadesanāya saraṇesu sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpanena yathūpanissayaṃ uparivisesādhigamāvahanena ca gahaṭṭhānaggahakaraṇaṃ, uggahaparipucchānaṃ kammaṭṭhānānuyogassa ca anurūpavasanaṭṭhānapariggahenettha pabbajitānuggahakaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Karuṇāya upagamanaṃ, na lābhādinimittaṃ, paññāya apagamanaṃ, na virodhādinimittanti upagamanāpagamanānaṃ nirupakkilesataṃ vibhāveti. Dhammikasukhaṃ nāma anavajjasukhaṃ. Devānaṃ upakārabahulatā janavivittatāya. Pacurajanavivittaṃ hi ṭhānaṃ devā upasaṅkamitabbaṃ maññanti. Tadatthaparinipphādananti lokatthanipphādanaṃ, buddhakiccasampādananti attho. Evamādināti ādi-saddena ukkaṭṭhākittanato rūpakāyassa anuggaṇhanaṃ dasseti, subhagavanādikittanato dhammakāyassa. Tathā purimena parādhīnakiriyākaraṇaṃ, dutiyena attādhīnakiriyākaraṇaṃ. Purimena vā karuṇākiccaṃ, itarena paññākiccaṃ. Purimena cassa paramāya anukampāya samannāgamaṃ, pacchimena paramāya upekkhāya samannāgamaṃ dīpeti. Bhagavā hi sabbasatte paramāya anukampāya anukampati, na ca tattha sinehadosānupatito paramupekkhakabhāvato, upekkhako ca na ca parahitasukhakaraṇe apposukko mahākāruṇikabhāvato.
因为他的大悲,他成了世间的救护者;因为他的舍,他成了自己的依止。同样,这位在菩萨位时,心被大悲所触动,为了利益一切世间而精勤努力,从发起大精进开始,为了达成这个目标,在圆满福德与智慧资粮的过程中,经历了无量漫长的时间,承受了许许多多的苦;但因为舍,对于如理而来的苦,他毫不动摇。同样,因为大悲,他面向轮回;因为舍,他对轮回心生厌离。因为舍,他面向涅槃;因为大悲,他证得涅槃。同样,因为大悲,他令他人无所恐惧;因为舍,他自己也不畏惧他人。有大悲的人守护他人时,也守护了自己;有舍的人守护自己时,也守护了他人。因此,他作为“自利利他之行”等四种人中的第四种人,这一身份得以成立。同样,因为大悲,他的真理坚定和施舍坚定得以圆满;因为舍,他的寂静坚定和智慧坚定得以圆满。如此,这位志向和行为都极为清净的人,因为大悲,只是为了世间的利益,才去接受王位成就等种种生存状态;因为舍,他连对这些看成像草一样都不放在心上,从而远离它们。这样,这位来去都极为清净的人,因为大悲,只是为了世间的利益,才以布施的方式舍弃种种成就;因为舍,他对这些果报也不为自己有所期待。如此,从开始积累资粮起,他就具备稀有难得的功德,因为大悲,为了他人的利益和安乐,他做了极难做到的事;因为舍,即使身体承受苦痛,他也毫不修饰顾惜。巴利
Tassa mahākāruṇikatāya lokanāthatā, upekkhakatāya attanāthatā. Tathā hesa bodhisattabhūto mahākaruṇāya sañcoditamānaso sakalalokahitāya ussukkamāpanno mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya tadatthanipphādanatthaṃ puññañāṇasambhāre sampādento aparimitaṃ kālaṃ anappakaṃ dukkhamanubhosi, upekkhakatāya sammā patitehi dukkhehi na vikampi. Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya saṃsārābhimukhatā, upekkhakatāya tato nibbindanā. Tathā upekkhakatāya nibbānābhimukhatā, mahākāruṇikatāya tadadhigamo. Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya paresaṃ abhiṃsāpanaṃ, upekkhakatāya sayaṃ parehi abhāyanaṃ. Mahākāruṇikatāya paraṃ rakkhato attano rakkhaṇaṃ, upekkhakatāya attānaṃ rakkhato paresaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ. Tenassa attahitāya paṭipannādīsu catutthapuggalabhāvo siddho hoti. Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya saccādhiṭṭhānassa cāgādhiṭṭhānassa ca pāripūri, upekkhakatāya upasamādhiṭṭhānassa paññādhiṭṭhānassa ca pāripūri. Evaṃ parisuddhāsayapayogassa mahākāruṇikatāya lokahitatthameva rajjasampadādibhavasampattiyā upagamanaṃ, upekkhakatāya tiṇāyapi amaññamānassa tato apagamanaṃ. Iti suvisuddhaupagamāpagamassa mahākāruṇikatāya lokahitatthameva dānavasena sampattīnaṃ pariccajanā, upekkhakatāya cassa phalassa attano apaccāsīsanā. Evaṃ samudāgamanato paṭṭhāya acchariyabbhutaguṇasamannāgatassa mahākāruṇikatāya paresaṃ hitasukhatthaṃ atidukkarakāritā, upekkhakatāya kāyampi analaṃkāritā.
同样,因为具足大悲悯,他在最后一生中看到衰老、病痛和死亡的样子,内心生起了警醒和震动;因为具足舍,他对殊胜美妙、如同天界享乐一般的种种欲乐毫不贪著,于是作出了伟大的出家。同样,因为具足大悲悯,他以悲悯为切入点——“这世间确实陷入了困境”——这样开始修观;因为具足舍,成佛之后,他连续七个七天都安住在远离的快乐中。因为具足大悲悯,他审察了法的甚深,虽然一度对说法生起“不必做什么”的念头,但借着大梵天劝请的因缘,还是为众生开了说法的门;因为具足舍,对于五群比丘等应当教化的对象,即使他们的行为不合宜,他的心意也不改变。因为具足大悲悯,他在任何地方都没有瞋害,所以任何地方都不会生起“这是敌人”的想法;因为具足舍,他在任何地方都没有偏袒贪著,所以任何地方都没有染着和亲密纠缠。因为具足大悲悯,即使住在村落等附近的地方,也因为具足舍,他只住在森林里。因此说:“通过前者,显示他具足无上的悲悯;通过后者,显示他具足无上的舍。”巴利
Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya carimattabhāve jiṇṇāturamatadassanena sañjātasaṃvego, upekkhakatāya uḷāresu devabhogasadisesu bhogesu nirapekkho mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhami. Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya ‘‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4, 10) karuṇāmukheneva vipassanārambho , upekkhakatāya buddhabhūtassa satta sattāhāni vivekasukheneva vītināmanaṃ. Mahākāruṇikatāya dhammagambhīrataṃ paccavekkhitvā dhammadesanāya apposukkataṃ āpajjitvāpi mahābrahmuno ajjhesanāpadesena okāsakaraṇaṃ, upekkhakatāya pañcavaggiyādi veneyyānaṃ ananurūpasamudācārepi anaññathābhāvo. Mahākāruṇikatāya katthaci paṭighātābhāvenassa sabbattha amittasaññāya abhāvo, upekkhakatāya katthacipi anurodhābhāvena sabbattha sinehasanthavābhāvo. Mahākāruṇikatāya gāmādīnaṃ āsannaṭṭhāne vasantassapi upekkhakatāya araññaṭṭhāne eva viharaṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘purimena cassa paramāya annukampāya samannāgamaṃ, pacchimena paramāya upekkhāya samannāgamaṃ dīpetī’’ti.
所谓“taṃ”,是指“tatra”这个词。阐明地点和时间,是说:对这里以限定“居住”这一动作的方式所说的那些地点和时间,加以阐明。为了显示这一点,他说“某个时候……阐明”。因为“taṃ”这个词是指向已经说过的内容,所以在这里,它应该是指向时间或地点,而不是指向别的什么。以上是先就“tatra”这个词作为指代词的情况,对其含义所作的分析。然而,在这类场合中,“tatra”这个词是阐明与说法相关的地点与时间,因此说“或者,它阐明应当宣说的、合适的地点与时间”。所以,“tatra”的意思就是:世尊为了说法,在那样合适的地点或时间,呼唤比丘们并对他们说话。接着用“确实不是”等语句来论证这个意思。有人问:世尊难道不是曾在路上站着,对巴希亚说“现在不是时候”等等,拒绝为他说法,然后又正好站在那条路中间为他说法吗?这是事实,但这正是用来举例说明在不该说法的时候不说法。所以他说“现在确实不是时候”。而那里所说的“我们已经进入村落之间”等话,也是为了以间接方式显示当时不是合适的时候。因为那时他由于旅途疲劳,色身变得不灵活;由于强烈的喜悦之力,名身也如此。为了等待这两者的平息、避免冗杂,世尊以间接方式拒绝了,说“现在不是时候”。至于在不该说法的地点不说法的例子,则有“于是世尊离开道路,在某棵树下坐下”,“从精舍出来,坐在精舍阴影处所设的座位上”等等,这些在这里都被“等”这个字所涵盖。巴利
Tanti ‘‘tatrā’’ti padaṃ. Desakālaparidīpananti ye desakālā idha viharaṇakiriyāvisesanabhāvena vuttā, tesaṃ paridīpananti dassento ‘‘yaṃ samayaṃ…pe… dīpetī’’ti āha. Taṃ-saddo hi vuttassa atthassa paṭiniddeso, tasmā idha kālassa, desassa vā paṭiniddeso bhavituṃ arahati, na aññassa. Ayaṃ tāva tatra-saddassa paṭiniddesabhāve atthavibhāvanā. Yasmā pana īdisesu ṭhānesu tatra-saddo dhammadesanāvisiṭṭhaṃ desaṃ kālañca vibhāveti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle dīpetī’’ti. Tena tatrāti yattha bhagavā dhammadesanatthaṃ bhikkhū ālapi abhāsi, tādise dese, kāle vāti attho. Na hītiādinā tamevatthaṃ samattheti. Nanu ca yattha ṭhito bhagavā ‘‘akālo kho tāvā’’tiādinā bāhiyassa dhammadesanaṃ paṭikkhipi, tattheva antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhito tassa dhammaṃ desetīti? Saccametaṃ, adesetabbakāle adesanāya idaṃ udāharaṇaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘akālo kho tāvā’’ti. Yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhamhā’’ti (udā. 10), tampi tassa akālabhāvasseva pariyāyena dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa hi tadā addhānaparissamena rūpakāye akammaññatā ahosi, balavapītivegena nāmakāye, tadubhayassa vūpasamaṃ āgamento papañcaparihāratthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘akālo kho’’ti pariyāyena paṭikkhipi. Adesetabbadese adesanāya pana udāharaṇaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi (saṃ. ni. 2.154), vihārato nikkhamitvā vihārapacchāyāyaṃ paññatte āsane nisīdī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.363) ca evamādikaṃ idha ādi-saddena saṅgahitaṃ.
“诸比丘,那时,那个愚人先前在这里贪著味道,在这里造作恶业”这类句子里,kho 这个词只是用来补足音节;而“无恭敬、不顺从地住,确实是苦”这类句子里,kho 表示强调限定;在“贤友,当导师远离而住时,声闻弟子们为什么不学远离呢”这类句子里,kho 表示时间的起点,也就是句子的开头。其中,用来补足音节,只是让言辞显得庄重;表示时间起点,只是用来引出句子;而表示强调限定时,则是显示一种确定。因此,“他呼唤”这句话,就是在呼唤中显示出确定。巴利
‘‘Atha kho so, bhikkhave, bālo idha pubbe rasādo idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.251) padapūraṇamatte kho-saddo, ‘‘dukkhaṃ kho agāravo viharati appatisso’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.21) avadhāraṇe, ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.31) ādikālatthe. Vākyārambheti attho. Tattha padapūraṇena vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ kataṃ hoti, ādikālatthena vākyassa upaññāsamattaṃ, avadhāratthena pana niyamadassanaṃ, tasmā āmantesi evāti āmantane niyamo dassito hotīti.
“世尊,是显示世间之尊重”,为什么这样说呢?前面不是已经解释过“世尊”这个词的含义了吗?虽然前面已经解释过,但那是在说明住于所说之处时行为主体的殊胜,并不是针对称呼这个行为;而这里则是针对称呼行为,所以经文中再次说“世尊”。为了说明这个含义,才说“世尊,是显示世间之尊重”。所谓“适合听闻者的言说”,是指与即将开讲的《根本法门经》教法相应、适合听闻者的话。在四众弟子中,只有比丘才是这类教法特别相应的当机者。因此,为了显示他们是这殊胜教法的领受者,这里特别举出“比丘”。说明了这一点之后,现在为了显示词义,便说了“再者……”等内容。巴利
‘‘Bhagavāti lokagarudīpana’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu pubbepi bhagavā-saddassa attho vuttoti? Yadipi pubbe vutto, taṃ panassa yathāvutte ṭhāne viharaṇakiriyāya kattuvisesadassanatthaṃ kataṃ, na āmantanakiriyāya, idha pana āmantanakiriyāya, tasmā tadatthaṃ puna ‘‘bhagavā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti tassatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavāti lokagarudīpana’’nti āha. Kathāsavanayuttapuggalavacananti vakkhamānāya mūlapariyāyadesanāya savanayogyapuggalavacanaṃ. Catūsupi parisāsu bhikkhū eva edisānaṃ desanānaṃ visesena bhājanabhūtā, iti sātisayasāsanasampaṭiggāhakabhāvadassanatthaṃ idha bhikkhugahaṇanti dassetvā idāni saddatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“乞食者”称为“比丘”,意思是:因为具有乞食的本性,所以叫比丘。由于已经受持了乞食行——也就是佛陀等圣者同样受持的、以乞讨维生的方式——并且实际去做了,所以是比丘。无论什么人,舍弃了或小或大的财富,从在家出家,过没有家的生活,他就不再靠种田、牧牛等方式谋生,仅仅通过接受出家的形相,就已经受持了乞食行,所以是比丘;或者,因为他依靠他人维生,即使是在僧院中间吃别人供养的饭食,也算是受持了乞食行,所以是比丘;又或者,因为他依止团食而出家,并对此生起了精进之心,所以也算是受持了乞食行,因此是比丘——应当这样理解这里的含义。所谓“依开头的方法等”,就是依照《分别论》(Vibh. 510)中所述的方式,比如“穿着破布衣的人是比丘,能破坏恶不善法的人是比丘,因为已经破坏了恶不善法所以是比丘”等等。“ñāpana”的意思是使人了知、传达含义。巴利
Tattha bhikkhakoti bhikkhūti bhikkhanadhammatāya bhikkhūti attho. Bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti buddhādīhipi ajjhupagataṃ bhikkhācariyaṃ uñchācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā anuṭṭhitattā bhikkhū. Yo hi koci appaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito, so kasigorakkhādīhi jīvikākappanaṃ hitvā liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā bhikkhu, parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā vā vihāramajjhe kājabhattaṃ bhuñjamānopi bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu, piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāya pabbajjāya ussāhajātattā vā bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhūti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ādinā nayenāti ‘‘bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu, bhindati pāpake akusale dhammeti bhikkhu, bhinnattā pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 510) āgatanayena. Ñāpaneti avabodhane, paṭivedaneti attho.
在“乞食的戒行”等说法中,“乞食的戒行”是指以乞食为生,而不是以种田、经商等方式为生。“乞食的法性”是指像“圣者们依此而住”这样所说的、以乞食为本性的性质,而不是以虚饰和矫诈为本性。在乞食中善行,是指忆念“应当奋起,不应放逸”这句话,在乞食这件事上不放逸。或者也可以说,“戒”是指本然的性情,但在这里指的是以它为依止;“法”是指誓愿。另有一些注释师解释说:“所谓‘戒’是受持誓愿,‘法’是世代传承下来的行为规范,‘善行’是恭敬地、郑重地去做。”所谓“卑劣之人和殊胜之人所依止的”,应当这样理解:有些人虽然身为比丘,却因为出身等而心生傲慢、浮躁高举;还有些人在家时因为不曾亲近过他人,就把乞食行看成最下贱的事。对这两种人,依次通过“比丘们”这个称呼,说明他们所依止的活命方式——对那些傲慢高举的人,揭示其活命方式是卑劣、贫穷、把乞食看成最下贱的人靠到别人家里乞食来维持生活,就是在折伏他们的傲慢高举;对那些殊胜之人,也就是从高贵的王族等大户人家出家的人,像佛陀等圣者为了清净活命而依止这种行持,揭示这一点,就是在折伏他们的卑贱心态。应当这样连接理解。因为“比丘们”这个称呼,从呼唤的角度来说,是把对方叫到面前;从上下文和功能来说,则是为了引发他们想听的意愿,并让他们恭敬地听闻和作意。因此,为了说明这个意思,论师说了“比丘们,用这个……”等话。巴利
Bhikkhanasīlatātiādīsu bhikkhanasīlatā bhikkhanena ājīvanasīlatā, na kasivaṇijjādīhi ājīvanasīlatā. Bhikkhanadhammatā ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 153; mi. pa. 4.5.9) evaṃ vuttabhikkhanasabhāvatā, na sambhāvanākohaññasabhāvatā. Bhikkhane sādhukāritā ‘‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’’ti (dha. pa. 168) vacanaṃ anussaritvā tattha appamajjanā. Atha vā sīlaṃ nāma pakatisabhāvo, idha pana tadadhiṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammoti vataṃ. Apare pana ‘‘sīlaṃ nāma vatasamādānaṃ, dhammo nāma paveṇīāgataṃ cārittaṃ, sādhukāritāti sakkaccakāritā ādarakiriyā’’ti vaṇṇenti. Hīnādhikajanasevitanti ye bhikkhubhāve ṭhitāpi jātimadādivasena uddhatā unnaḷā. Ye ca gihibhāve paresu atthikabhāvampi anupagatatāya bhikkhācariyaṃ paramakāpaññataṃ maññanti, tesaṃ ubhayesampi yathākkamaṃ ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vacanena hīnajanehi daliddehi paramakāpaññataṃ pattehi parakulesu bhikkhācariyāya jīvikaṃ kappentehi sevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti, adhikajanehi uḷārabhogakhattiyakulādito pabbajitehi buddhādīhi ājīvavisodhanatthaṃ sevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento dīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karotīti yojetabbaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vacanaṃ āmantanabhāvato abhimukhīkaraṇaṃ, pakaraṇato sāmatthiyato ca sussūsājananaṃ sakkaccasavanamanasikāraniyojanañca hoti. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhavoti iminā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“善听、善作意”就是指好好地听闻和好好地作意。那么,听闻等行为怎样才算运作得好呢?要以恭敬、尊重的心态,想着“凭这正确的修行,整个教法的成就必定能掌握在手中”,并且在听法等场合不轻慢等等。经中确实说过:“比丘们,具备五种法的人听闻正法,就有可能进入正性决定,在善法中获得正确。是哪五种呢?不轻慢说法,不轻慢说法者,不轻慢自己,以不散乱的心、专一的心听法,并且如理作意。比丘们,具备这五种法的人听闻正法,就有可能进入正性决定,在善法中获得正确。”(《增支部》5.151)正因为这样,他才说:“教法的成就,确实取决于善听和善作意。”所谓教法成就,就是戒等功德的圆满达成。巴利
Tattha sādhukasavanamanasikāreti sādhukasavane sādhukamanasikāre ca. Kathaṃ pana pavattitā savanādayo sādhukaṃ pavattitā hontīti? ‘‘Addhā imāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sakalasāsanasampatti hatthagatā bhavissatī’’ti ādaragāravayogena, kathādīsu aparibhavanādinā ca. Vuttaṃ hi ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato suṇanto saddhammaṃ bhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ. Katamehi pañcahi? Na kathaṃ paribhoti, na kathikaṃ paribhoti, na attānaṃ paribhoti, avikkhittacitto dhammaṃ suṇāti ekaggacitto, yoniso ca manasi karoti. Imehi kho, bhikkhave , pañcahi dhammehi samannāgato suṇanto saddhammaṃ bhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammatta’’nti (a. ni. 5.151). Tenevāha ‘‘sādhukasavanamanasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampattī’’ti. Sāsanasampatti nāma sīlādinipphatti.
最初生起,是就证得而言。随顺师行,是依循戒等功德而修习。因为三种乘都具备随法行道,所以能总摄受持全部教法。亲近,是说处于近处。常于近处行,是说一切时中都相应。依所教诫,即如理遵从教诫,毫无遗漏地受持,意思是把教诫完整无余地接受下来。针对某些比丘而说,就是指经末所说的那些比丘对世尊的言说欢喜信受,所指的正是那五百位从婆罗门种姓出家的比丘。巴利
Paṭhamaṃ uppannattā adhigamavasena. Satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā sīlādiguṇānuṭṭhānena. Tiṇṇaṃ yānānaṃ vasena anudhammapaṭipattisabbhāvato sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā. Santikattāti samīpabhāvato. Santikāvacarattāti sabbakālaṃ sampayuttabhāvato. Yathānusiṭṭhanti anusāsanianurūpaṃ, anusāsaniṃ anavasesato paṭiggahetvāti attho. Ekacce bhikkhūyeva sandhāyāti ye suttapariyosāne ‘‘te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandu’’nti vuttā pañcasatā brāhmaṇapabbajitā, te sandhāya.
虽然世尊说法原本是对一切大众共通的,但在以“最尊、最胜”等话唯独召唤比丘时,已经显示了其中的理由;现在为了说明召唤比丘之后才说法的用意,便提出了这个问难:“那么,世尊又是为了什么目的……”在这当中,“心在别处”是指心思放在别的对象上。“散乱之心”是指心没有专注入定。“正在省察法”是指那时在心里反复回味当天、昨天或其他日子听过的法。如果召唤比丘之后再为他们说法,他们就能从一开始就留意所说的法;为了从反面说明这个道理,所以说了“不召唤他们……”等话。巴利
Pubbe sabbaparisasādhāraṇattepi bhagavato dhammadesanāya ‘‘jeṭṭhaseṭṭhā’’tiādinā bhikkhūnaṃ eva āmantane kāraṇaṃ dassetvā idāni bhikkhū āmantetvāva dhammadesanāya payojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kimatthaṃ pana bhagavā’’ti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Tattha aññaṃ cintentāti aññavihitā. Vikkhittacittāti asamāhitacittā. Dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāti tadā hiyyo tato paradivasesu vā sutadhammaṃ pati pati manasā avekkhantā. Bhikkhū āmantetvā dhamme desiyamāne ādito paṭṭhāya desanaṃ sallakkhetuṃ sakkontīti imamevatthaṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘te anāmantetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“诸比丘”这个称呼,应当理解为连声读诵时 i 音脱落,也就是“bhikkhavo iti”(诸比丘啊)。这个 iti 一词有多种含义:表示原因、总结、词义转换、方式、确定、举例说明等等。比如在“ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccati”(诸比丘,因为它被破坏,所以称为“色”)这类句子里,它是表示原因;在“tasmā tiha me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhavatha……”(因此,诸比丘,你们应当成为法的继承者……)这类句子里,它是表示总结;在“iti vā, iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato”(或者像这样,远离观看歌舞音乐等娱乐)这类句子里,它是表示“等等”的意思;在“māgaṇṭhiyoti tassa brāhmaṇassa saṅkhā samaññā paññatti……”(所谓“摩犍提”,就是那位婆罗门的称呼、名称、施设……)这类句子里,它是表示词义的转换;在“iti kho, bhikkhave, sappaṭibhayo bālo, appaṭibhayo paṇḍito……”(诸比丘,就是这样:愚人有恐惧,智者无恐惧……)这类句子里,它是表示方式;在“atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṃ……”(“因为有这个条件才有老死”——阿难,当被这样问时,应当回答“有”……)这类句子里,它是表示确定;在“sabbamatthīti kho, kaccāna, ayameko anto, sabbaṃ natthīti kho, kaccāna, ayaṃ dutiyo anto”(“一切存在”——咖佳亚那,这是一个极端;“一切不存在”——咖佳亚那,这是第二个极端)这类句子里,它是表示举例说明。在这里也应当理解为举例说明。因为“bhikkhavo”是呼唤的形态,而这个 iti 词正是用来指示它的,即“bhikkhavo”就是“呼唤”的意思。按照这个方式,在“bhaddante”(尊者)等称呼中,也应当根据具体情况理解 iti 词的含义。由于前面已经说了“世尊呼唤”,所以这里“bhagavato paccassosuṃ”(他们应答了世尊)中的“bhagavato”这个属格词,其实期待的是一个与呼唤相关的中间词,因此根据这个意图,就说成了“bhagavato āmantanaṃ paṭiassosuṃ”(他们应答了世尊的呼唤)。而“bhagavato”这个词,则是与应答相关联的为格用法,就像“devadattassa paṭissuṇoti”(他应答提婆达多)一样。巴利
Bhikkhavotīti ca sandhivasena i-kāralopo daṭṭhabbo ‘‘bhikkhavo itī’’ti. Ayaṃ hi iti-saddo hetu-parisamāpanādipadatthavipariyāya-pakārāvadhāraṇanidassanādianekatthappabhedo. Tathā hesa ‘‘ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.79) hetuatthe dissati; ‘‘tasmā tiha me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā, atthi me tumhesu anukampā ‘kinti me sāvakā dhammadāyādā bhaveyyuṃ, no āmisadāyādā’ti’’ādīsu parisamāpane; ‘‘iti vā, iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.13) ādiatthe; ‘‘māgaṇṭhiyoti tassa brāhmaṇassa saṅkhā samaññā paññatti vohāro nāmaṃ nāmakammaṃ nāmadheyyaṃ nirutti byañjanamabhilāpo’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 73) padatthavipariyāye; ‘‘iti kho, bhikkhave, sappaṭibhayo bālo, appaṭibhayo paṇḍito, saupaddavo bālo, anupaddavo paṇḍito, saupasaggo bālo, anupasaggo paṇḍito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.124) pakāre; ‘‘atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṃ, kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti ce vadeyya, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iccassa vacanīya’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.96) avadhāraṇe; ‘‘sabbamatthīti kho, kaccāna, ayameko anto, sabbaṃ natthīti kho, kaccāna, ayaṃ dutiyo anto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.15) nidassane. Idhāpi nidassaneva daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhavoti hi āmantitākāro, tamesa iti-saddo nidasseti ‘‘bhikkhavoti āmantesī’’ti. Iminā nayena ‘‘bhaddante’’tiādīsupi yathārahaṃ iti-saddassa attho veditabbo. Pubbe ‘‘bhagavā āmantesī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘bhagavato paccassosu’’nti idha ‘‘bhagavato’’ti sāmivacanaṃ āmantanameva sambandhīantaraṃ apekkhatīti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘bhagavato āmantanaṃ paṭiassosu’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavato’’ti pana idaṃ paṭissavasambandhanena sampadānavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘devadattassa paṭissuṇotī’’ti.
“所说的那因缘”是关联句。这里有人问:在结集法与律的时候,为什么还要说因缘之语呢?难道不是只应该结集世尊所说的话吗?回答说:这是为了成就教法的久住、不被遗忘以及令人信受。因为,把说法的时间、地点、说法者、因缘、当机众等背景交代清楚而安立的教法,才能长久住世、不被遗忘,并且令人信受,就像世间的裁判依时间、地点、当事人、证人、事由等而确立一样。正因如此,当大迦叶尊者问“贤友阿难,《根本法门经》是在哪里说的”等问题时,这位司掌法藏的阿难尊者在回答这些问题时,便以“如是我闻”等语,说出了此经的因缘。再者,说因缘之语也是为了彰显师的成就。因为对于如来、世尊而言,没有事先准备、推测、逻辑推理等,这就成就了他正自觉者的真实性。确实,正自觉者不需要事先准备等,因为他的智慧能在一切处无碍运行,且对于所知诸法皆以同一量智通达。同样,因为他完全没有师拳、法悭、以及对教法和弟子的牵挂顾虑,这就成就了他漏尽者的真实性。对于彻底断尽烦恼的圣者,这些烦恼是绝不会出现的,因此他能以极其清净的心去利益他人。如此,通过彰显那些能污染戒与见之成就的——即无明与渴爱的彻底断除,以及彰显其智慧成就与断德成就的“正自觉”与“清净”状态,前两种无畏便得以成立;而正因如此,又成就了对障碍法与出离法毫无迷惑,后两种无畏也得以成立。因此,世尊具足四种无畏,以及自利利他的行道,都通过因缘之语而彰显出来,这是因为他能在各处,随顺时机与众生的意乐,以应机而发的辩才开示法义。而在此处,则是为了针对地等所缘,为凡夫分别确立不同的行道而开演教法,应当如此理解。因此才说:“说因缘之语,是为了彰显师的成就”。巴利
Yaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitanti sambandho. Etthāha – kimatthaṃ pana dhammavinayasaṅgahe kariyamāne nidānavacanaṃ, nanu bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabboti? Vuccate – desanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakanimittaparisāpadesehi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti asammosadhammā saddheyyā ca, desakālakattusotunimittehi upanibaddho viya vohāravinicchayo. Teneva ca āyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘mūlapariyāyasuttaṃ āvuso, ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādinā imassa suttassa nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ. Apica satthusampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubbaracanānumānāgamatakkābhāvato sammāsambuddhabhāvasiddhi . Na hi sammāsambuddhassa pubbaracanādīhi attho atthi sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya ekappamāṇattā ca ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasāsanasāvakānurodhābhāvato khīṇāsavabhāvasiddhi. Na hi sabbaso khīṇāsavassa te sambhavantīti suvisuddhassa parānuggahappavatti. Evaṃ desakasaṃkilesabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhisīlasampadādūsakānaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ accantābhāvasaṃsūcakehi ñāṇasampadāpahānasampadābhibyañjakehi ca sambuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi, tato eva ca antarāyikaniyyānikadhammesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo attahitaparahitapaṭipatti ca nidānavacanena pakāsitā hoti tattha tattha sampattapariyāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato, idha pana pathavīādīsu vatthūsu puthujjanānaṃ paṭipattivibhāgavavatthāpakadesanādīpanatoti yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthusampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
同样地,缘起语是为了阐明教法的成就。因为世尊的一切行为都被智与悲所摄持,所以不存在无意义的修行,也不是为了自利。因此,正自觉者的一切行为都纯粹是为了利益他人而展开;他全部的身业、语业、意业,按照实际发生的样子被宣说出来时,就依现法利益、后世利益和究竟利益,随其相应而以教诫众生的意义成为教法,而不是诗歌创作。这位大师的行谊,连同时间、地点、说法者和听众等背景,在各处都通过缘起语随其相应而被彰显出来;在这里,则是“在地等事物中”等,与前面所说的完全相同。因此说“缘起语是为了阐明教法的成就”。此外,通过彰显大师是标准,从而显示教法也是标准,这也是缘起语的目的;而这个显示大师是标准的道理,应当知道已经依照前面所说的方式,通过“世尊”这个词阐明了。因为“世尊”这个词,揭示了如来断除了贪、嗔、痴等一切烦恼垢染和恶行等过失,阐明了如来具备不与他人共有的、极为清净的智与悲等功德殊胜,并由此彰显了他是一切众生中最上的存在。这个意义已经通过“世尊”一词完全开显了。以上是对这里缘起语作用的一点提示。巴利
Tathā sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthikā paṭipatti, attahitatthā vā. Tasmā paresaṃ eva atthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabyaracanā, tayidaṃ satthucaritaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesehi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanehi yathārahaṃ pakāsīyati, idha pana ‘‘pathaviyādīsu vatthūsū’’ti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti. Apica satthuno pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ, tañca desakappamāṇabhāvadassanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti ca iminā padena vibhāvitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti iminā tathāgatassa rāgadosamohādisabbakilesamaladuccaritādidosappahānadīpanena vacanena anaññasādhāraṇasuparisuddhañāṇakaruṇādiguṇavisesayogaparidīpanena tato eva sabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ayamattho sabbathā pakāsito hotīti idamettha nidānavacanappayojanassa mukhamattadassanaṃ.
经的安放方式注释巴利
Suttanikkhepavaṇṇanā
“已开示”就是“已安放”。开示之所以也称为“安放”,是因为把应当开示的戒等义理安放在应受教化者的心相续中。把经的安放方式考察清楚之后,再来说就清楚了。所以,先从总体上说明世尊教法生起的分类,指出“这里的这段教法是这样生起的”;一旦说明了教法的生起,由于正确了知这部经的因缘,注释就变得很容易理解,因此这样说了。因为这样一来,像“诸比丘,未听闻的凡夫……”这样展开的教法,像“诸比丘,那位比丘是阿拉汉、漏已尽者……”这样展开的教法,像“诸比丘,如来也是阿拉汉、正自觉者……”这样展开的教法,由于能轻松看出其中的连结,就变得很容易理解。在这里,正如虽有成百上千种分类的诸经,也不超出以杂染分等为纲的十六种类型;同样,依自意乐等的经安放方式,也有四种。所以说“因为经的安放有四种”。巴利
Nikkhittassāti desitassa. Desanāpi hi desetabbassa sīlādiatthassa vineyyasantānesu nikkhipanato ‘‘nikkhepo’’ti vuccati. Suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hotīti sāmaññato bhagavato desanāsamuṭṭhānassa vibhāgaṃ dassetvā ‘‘etthāyaṃ desanā evaṃsamuṭṭhānā’’ti desanāya samuṭṭhāne dassite suttassa sammadeva nidānaparijānanena vaṇṇanāya suviññeyyattā vuttaṃ. Evañhi ‘‘assutavā bhikkhave puthujjano’’tiādinā, ‘‘yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṃ khīṇāsavo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.8), ‘‘tathāgatopi kho, bhikkhave, arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.12) ca pavattadesanā anusandhidassanasukhatāya suviññeyyā hoti. Tattha yathā anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādipadhānanayavasena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvanti āha ‘‘cattāro hi suttanikkhepā’’ti.
在这里,自意乐和事起,与对他意乐和提问之间,可以形成这样的组合分类:自意乐与对他意乐、自意乐与问依、事起与对他意乐、事起与问依。这是因为意乐和提问之间本来就存在连结关系。同样地,虽然事起与自意乐之间也可以形成组合分类,但是当自意乐等已经摆在前面时,它们与事起之间就不再构成组合了。正因为这里不存在穷尽一切细节的广说方式,所以只说经的安放有四种。或者说,因为可能出现的其余安放方式都包含在这四种里面,所以只以根本安放方式显示为四种。在这里,应当这样理解这些组合分类。巴利
Ettha ca yathā attajjhāsayassa aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāhi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati ‘‘attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca, attajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca pucchāvasiko cā’’ti ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisabbhāvato, evaṃ yadipi aṭṭhuppattiyā attajjhāsayenapi saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati, attajjhāsayādīhi pana purato ṭhitehi aṭṭhuppattiyā saṃsaggo natthīti nayidha niravaseso vitthāranayo sambhavatīti ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti vuttaṃ, tadantogadhattā vā sambhavantānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattārova dassitā. Tathādassanañcettha ayaṃ saṃsaggabhedo gahetabboti.
这里说一下词义:被放置,所以叫“放置”;经本身就是放置,所以叫“经的放置”。或者,放置这个动作就是“放置”,对经的放置就是“经的放置”,意思就是经开示。自己的意乐叫“自意乐”,它作为这件事的成因存在,所以叫“有自意乐”。或者说,这经以自己的想法为意乐,所以叫“自意乐”。对他人的意乐也是同样的道理。以提问为依据,叫“问依”,它具有这个特点,所以叫“有问依”。作为经开示之根据的意义生起,叫“义生起”,这是“事起”,也就是“aṭṭhuppatti”,把ttha音变成ṭṭha音,所以说为“aṭṭhuppattiko”(具有事起)。或者,经以此被放置,所以叫“经的放置”,自意乐等也是如此。然而,在这个自意乐的分类中,自己的意乐叫“自意乐”,他人的意乐叫“他意乐”。被提问,所以叫“问”,所问之义。以提问为方式而发生的、对法接受者所说的话,叫“问依”,但依“放置”一词的关联,以阳性语尾说为“pucchāvasiko”。同样,事起本身就是“具有事起”,在这里应当这样理解其义。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipīyatīti nikkhepo, suttaṃ eva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Atha vā nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo. Attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vaso pucchāvaso, so etassa atthīti pucchāvasiko. Suttadesanāvatthubhūtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppatti ttha-kārassa ṭṭha-kāraṃ katvā. Sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti suttanikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana attavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho. Pucchanavasena pavattaṃ dhammapaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasikaṃ, tadeva nikkhepa-saddāpekkhāya pulliṅgavasena ‘‘pucchāvasiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā aṭṭhuppatti eva aṭṭhuppattikoti evampettha attho veditabbo.
在这里,认为“自意乐”不依赖他人根机成熟等因缘,所以单独作为一类经的安立方式是合理的,因为这类教说纯粹是随自己的意乐而展开,目的是为了安立法轨。可是,依他人意乐而说和依提问而说,是以他人的意乐和提问作为教说生起的因,它们只在那些因缘发生时才会展开,那它们怎么不会和“事起”混淆呢?或者说,那些依问而说、随他意乐而展开的“事起”类教说,怎么不会和“依他意乐”混淆呢?这一点不应该受到责难。因为“事起”被理解为:排除他人劝请、反复提问等,仅仅作为经典教说之因缘而生起的事件;所以才会把“依他意乐”和“依问者”单独区分出来。正如《梵网经》《法嗣经》等,以称赞、不称赞、染着生起等作为教说的因缘,这就称为“事起”。不靠他人提问,纯粹以他人的意乐为因缘而说的,是“依他意乐”;随问而说的,是“依问者”。这个道理很清楚。巴利
Apicettha paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ suttanikkhepabhāvo yutto kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā. Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanāpavattihetubhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathamaṭṭhuppattiyaṃ anavarodho, pucchāvasikaaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattikānaṃ kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti? Na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi brahmajāla (dī. ni. 1.1) dhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ (ma. ni. 1.29) vaṇṇāvaṇṇaāmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhuppattī’’ti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayaṃ eva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭoyamatthoti.
应当这样理解:他只是按照自己的意乐来说法,目的是为了安立法轨。所谓“《正勤经》带出者”,是指《相应部》中按次第编排的、与正勤相关的一系列经典。同样,还有“神足带出者”等等。巴利
Attanoajjhāsayeneva kathesi dhammatantiṭhapanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sammappadhānasuttantahārakoti anupubbena nikkhittānaṃ saṃyuttake sammappadhānapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ suttānaṃ āvaḷi. Tathā iddhipādahārakādayo.
能令解脱成熟的法,是信根等。ajjhāsaya 是意乐,也就是志向。khanti 是忍,指对见解的审察忍可。man 是意,也就是心。abhinihāra 是志求,也就是愿。bujjhanabhāva 是觉的状态,意思是觉的本性,或者通达的行相。巴利
Vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā saddhindriyādayo. Ajjhāsayanti adhimuttiṃ. Khantinti diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiṃ. Mananti cittaṃ. Abhinihāranti paṇidhānaṃ. Bujjhanabhāvanti bujjhanasabhāvaṃ, paṭivijjhanākāraṃ vā.
“在慢生起时,安置”说的是它们之间的关联。有阴性等三种性。有名等四种词。有第一格等七种格。“除了……之外,什么都不说”,因为它是按照自性语如实进行的,所以什么都不说。结节句:就像树的结节处难以穿透、难以砍削,同样地,如果一个句子无法从意义上加以阐明,那就叫作结节句。“不破坏”就是不取出。巴利
Uppanne māne nikkhittanti sambandho. Itthiliṅgādīni tīṇi liṅgāni. Nāmādīni cattāri padāni. Paṭhamādayo satta vibhattiyo. Muñcitvā na kiñci katheti sabhāvaniruttiyā tatheva pavattanato. Gaṇṭhibhūtaṃ padaṃ. Yathā hi rukkhassa gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ dubbinibbedhaṃ duttacchitañca hoti, evamevaṃ yaṃ padaṃ atthato vivarituṃ na sakkā, taṃ ‘‘gaṇṭhipada’’nti vuccati. Anupahaccāti anuddharitvā.
“它和什么发生关联,就显示那个东西没有剩余”,这句话是在说明:这里的“一切”这个词,只涉及一部分。因为“一切”这个词,在四种范围里都有实际用法:全分一切、部分一切、处一切、自身一切。比如在“一切法以一切行相显现于佛陀世尊的智门前”这类经文里,用的是“全分一切”。在“舍利弗,以某种方式,一切皆是善说”这类经文里,用的是“部分一切”。在“诸比丘,我将为你们开示一切……即眼与色……乃至意与法”里,用的是“处一切”。在“一切于一切处想”这类经文里,用的是“自身一切”。其中,用在“全分一切”里时,是“无余”;用在其余三种里时,是“有余”;但这里应当知道,是用在“自身一切”里。因为下面将会说:“然而,属于自身的三地诸法,应知为无余。”巴利
Yena yena sambandhaṃ gacchati, tassa tassa anavasesataṃ dīpetīti iminā imassa sabba-saddassa sappadesataṃ dasseti. Sabba-saddo hi sabbasabbaṃ padesasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbanti catūsu visayesu diṭṭhappayogo. Tathā hesa ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthamāgacchantī’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.6) sabbasabbasmiṃ āgato. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsitaṃ pariyāyenā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) padesasabbasmiṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi…pe… cakkhuñceva rūpā ca…pe… mano ceva dhammā cā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.23) ettha āyatanasabbasmiṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ sabbato sañjānātī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.5) sakkāyasabbasmiṃ. Tattha sabbasabbasmiṃ āgato nippadeso, itaresu tīsupi āgato sappadeso, idha pana sakkāyasabbasmiṃ veditabbo. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sakkāyapariyāpannā pana tebhūmakadhammāva anavasesato veditabbā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1 suttanikkhepavaṇṇanā).
“于诸谛中”就是在诸圣谛当中。现在说“这四个法”,是指接下来要说的谛等四个法。其中,“谛”是指语谛。“住”是指精进,或者读作“dhiti”,意思一样。“舍”是指无贪。“他超越所见”:凡是这些谛等法存在于某人身上,他就超越了自己所见之敌——即“见”,不会落入那个敌人的手中,反而能战胜它,就是这个意思。法安住于自性之中,因为无自性的法不可能有生起之因。确实,无自性的法不可能由任何事物产生。它们任持自己的自相:虽然并不存在离开自相的法,但那些由邪见和渴爱所构想出来的、仅仅是以自我、清净、快乐、恒常等为行相的东西,以及本性、实体、命、身等,只是依世间名言而成立,就像虚空中的花一样,在胜义中并不存在。然而这些法不是那样,它们是在胜义中真实存在的。正因为如此,为了显示它们远离众生等差别、只是具有自性的法,才说“任持自相”。虽然实际上没有差别,但为了便于理解,也可以用假立的差别来说明,就像说“石偶的身体”一样。或者,“持”是指依其自性而被确定、被了知,所以叫做法,比如坚硬、触感等。巴利
Saccesūti ariyasaccesu. Ete caturo dhammāti idāni vuccamāne saccādike cattāro dhamme sandhāya vadati. Tattha saccanti vacīsaccaṃ. Ṭhitīti vīriyaṃ, ‘‘dhitī’’ti vā pāṭho, so evattho. Cāgoti alobho. Diṭṭhaṃ so ativattatīti yasmiṃ ete saccādayo dhammā upalabbhanti, so diṭṭhaṃ attano amittaṃ atikkamati, na tassa hatthataṃ gacchati, atha kho naṃ abhibhavati evāti attho. Sabhāve vattati asabhāvadhammassa kāraṇāsambhavato. Na hi nissabhāvā dhammā kenaci nibbattīyanti. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti yadipi lakkhaṇavinimuttā dhammā nāma natthi, tathāpi yathā diṭṭhitaṇhāparikappitākāramattā attasubhasukhasassatādayo, pakatiyādayo, dabbādayo, jīvādayo, kāyādayo lokavohāramattasiddhā gagaṇakusumādayova saccikaṭṭhaparamatthato na upalabbhanti, na evamete, ete pana saccikaṭṭhaparamatthabhūtā upalabbhanti, tato eva sattādivisesavirahato dhammamattā sabhāvavantoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentī’’ti vuttaṃ . Bhavati hi bhedābhāvepi sukhāvabodhanatthaṃ upacāramattasiddhena bhedena niddeso yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti. Dhārīyanti vā yathāsabhāvato avadhārīyanti ñāyantīti dhammā, kakkhaḷaphusanādayo.
“不共因”是指在作为不共之因、在有身见诸法中作为它们各自独有的缘。那么,“那”又是指什么呢?就是渴爱、慢、邪见,或者无明等。正如在土地等被妄想的对象上生起的渴爱等,是那些妄想的根本因,无明等也是如此。因为通过随顺的方式,如“无闻凡夫……我说他未遍知彼”以及“喜是苦的根源”,又通过反证的方式,如“由于贪的灭尽……由于离痴”,就说明了它们是根本因。巴利
Asādhāraṇahetumhīti asādhāraṇakāraṇe, sakkāyadhammesu tassa tassa āveṇikapaccayeti attho. Kiṃ pana tanti? Taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo, avijjādayopi vā. Yatheva hi pathavīādīsu maññanāvatthūsu uppajjamānā taṇhādayo maññanā tesaṃ pavattiyā mūlakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ avijjādayopi. Tathā hi ‘‘assutavā puthujjano’’tiādinā ‘‘apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.2) ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’nti (ma. ni. 1.13) ca anvayato, ‘‘khayā rāgassa…pe… vītamohattā’’ti byatirekato ca tesaṃ mūlakāraṇabhāvo vibhāvito.
pariyāya 的意思是:让应当开示的意义被知道、使人觉悟,所以叫 pariyāya,也就是开示。它执取自己的果而运作,或者成为那个果的因,所以叫 pariyāya,也就是因。它一次又一次地辗转变化,所以叫 pariyāya,也就是次第。应当知道,pariyāya 这个词就是这样用在开示、因、次第这几个义项上的。不按字面直接抓取,而要经过抉择才能把握的意义,就是应导义。只有三界之法才应当毫无遗漏地被了知,因为这里指的是所有成为妄想基础的地等法。巴利
Pariyāyeti desetabbamatthaṃ avagameti bodhayatīti pariyāyo, desanā. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā vattati tassa vā kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇaṃ. Pariyāyati aparāparaṃ parivattatīti pariyāyo, vāro. Evaṃ pariyāyasaddassa desanākāraṇavāresu pavatti veditabbā. Yathārutavasena aggahetvā niddhāretvā gahetabbatthaṃ neyyatthaṃ. Tebhūmakā dhammāva anavasesato veditabbā maññanāvatthubhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ pathavīādidhammānaṃ adhippetattā.
“因的开示”是指让人明白因的开示。那个义理,是指被称为一切法根本因的义理,或者被称为因之开示的义理。因此他说“那个因,那个开示”。这两个词意义相同。其实,“sādhu”这个词加上“ka”音扩充后,就说成了“sādhuka”。正因如此,在解释“sādhu”这个词的含义时,以引出词义的方式举出了“sādhuka”这个词。“Dhammarucī”是指喜欢法的人,也就是想修功德的人。“Paññāṇavā”是指有智慧的人。“Addubbho”是指不伤害的人,意思是不恼害别人。“Idhāpi”是指在这部《根本法门经》里也。“Ayaṃ”指的是“sādhuka”这个词。“Ettheva daḷhīkamme”是指在恭敬行事上。“Āṇattiya”是指教令。因为当说“好好听,好好作意”时,通过“sādhuka”这个词,就像表达了恭敬地听闻和作意一样,同时也表达了那种教令。应当知道,这个词既有祈请的含义,也有教令的含义。巴利
Kāraṇadesananti kāraṇañāpanaṃ desanaṃ. Taṃ atthanti taṃ sabbadhammānaṃ mūlakāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ, kāraṇadesanāsaṅkhātaṃ vā atthaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘taṃ kāraṇaṃ taṃ desana’’nti. Ekatthametanti etaṃ padadvayaṃ ekatthaṃ. Sādhu-saddo eva hi ka-kārena vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘sādhuka’’nti vutto. Teneva hi sādhusaddassa atthaṃ vadantena atthuddhāravasena sādhukasaddo udāhaṭo. Dhammarucīti puññakāmo. Paññāṇavāti paññavā. Addubbhoti adūsako, anupaghātakoti attho. Idhāpīti imasmiṃ mūlapariyāyasuttepi. Ayanti sādhukasaddo. Ettheva daḷhīkammeti sakkaccakiriyāyaṃ. Āṇattiyanti āṇāpane. ‘‘Suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti hi vutte sādhukasaddena savanamanasikārānaṃ sakkaccakiriyā viya tadāṇāpanampi vuttaṃ hoti. Āyācanatthatā viya cassa āṇāpanatthatā veditabbā.
这里应当这样理解前后文的连接:防止耳根散乱,是让人专心听闻而遮止其他行为,所以意思是“倾耳而听”。防止意根散乱,是遮止其他的思虑。“前面的”指“谛听”这个词。“于此”指“谛听、作意”这两个词,或者指这个论题范围。防止执取音节颠倒,能对治耳门的散乱,因为如实听闻的人不会对声音产生颠倒执取。防止执取义理颠倒,能对治意根的散乱,因为恭敬持法的人不会对义理产生颠倒执取。令人在听法上专注,是通过“谛听”这句话来教导。在“受持与审察”中,通过加入“审察”,把衡量、简择等以及见的善通达都涵盖在内。巴利
Idānettha evaṃ yojanā veditabbāti sambandho. Sotindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ savane niyojanavasena kiriyantarapaṭisedhanabhāvato, sotaṃ odahathāti attho. Manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ aññacintāpaṭisedhanato. Purimanti ‘‘suṇāthā’’ti padaṃ. Etthāti suṇātha, manasi karothā’’ti padadvaye, etasmiṃ vā adhikāre. Byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ sotadvāre vikkhepapaṭibāhakattā. Na hi yāthāvato suṇantassa saddato vipallāsaggāho hoti. Atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ manindriyavikkhepapaṭibāhakattā. Na hi sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ upadhārentassa atthato vipallāsaggāho hoti. Dhammassavane niyojeti suṇāthāti vidahanato. Dhāraṇūpaparikkhāsūti upaparikkhaggahaṇena tulanatīraṇādike diṭṭhiyā ca suppaṭivedhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
在这里,“有文句”是指能表达出想要表达的意思,所以叫文句,也就是自性语言。与文句一起的,就是“有文句”,意思是文句具足。从应当趋近、应当亲近、应当实践的角度来说,这个“义”指的是四遍清净戒等。与义一起的,就是“有义”,意思是义理具足。在“法甚深”等说法中,“法”指的是圣典。“开示”指的是以心确定圣典之后所作的宣说。“义”指的是圣典的含义。“通达”指的是对圣典和圣典之义如实地了知。因为这四者——法、开示、义、通达——就像大海一样,对智慧低劣的人来说难以深入,也找不到立足之处,所以说是甚深。因此说:“因为此法……善听!善作意!”在这里应当知道:由于通达本身很难,对法与义作开示的智慧也很难,所以开示难以深入;又因为通达无法被产生出来,而且与它相应的智慧生起也很困难,所以通达难以深入。巴利
Sabyañjanoti ettha yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjayatīti byañjanaṃ, sabhāvanirutti. Saha byañjanenāti sabyañjano, byañjanasampannoti attho. Araṇīyato upagandhabbato anuṭṭhātabbato attho, catupārisuddhisīlādiko. Saha atthenāti sāttho, atthasampannoti attho. Dhammagambhīrotiādīsu dhammo nāma tanti. Desanā nāma tassā manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Attho nāma tantiyā attho. Paṭivedho nāma tantiyā tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Yasmā cete dhammadesanāatthapaṭivedhā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāḷhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ dhammo…pe… sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti. Ettha ca paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya dukkhogāhatā, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā tabbisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā.
所谓“开示”,就是列出所要讲的内容。对它作解说,就是“言说”;这里指的就是“我将从详细方面也来说它”,也就是说“我将详细地宣说它”。清楚明白的讲述,也叫“言说”。像鹩哥的声音一样,就像鹩哥的鸣叫,甜美、悦耳、令人喜爱。“辩才”是指声音。“宣说”,就是被发出,或者说是被说出。巴利
Desanaṃ nāma uddisanaṃ. Tassa niddisanaṃ bhāsananti idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘vitthāratopi naṃ bhāsissāmīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Paribyattaṃ kathanaṃ vā bhāsanaṃ. Sāḷikāyiva nigghosoti sāḷikāya ālāpo viya madhuro kaṇṇasukho pemanīyo. Paṭibhānanti saddo. Udīrayīti uccārīyati, vuccati vā.
听到这样说后,他们生起了踊跃:当听到“你们要好好听,好好作意,我要说了”这样的话时,他们心想:“看来导师不只是简略地开示,还会详细地宣说。”于是内心生起了踊跃,变得欢喜雀跃。“此处”这个词,是指所说这件事所涉及的那个人出现的地方,因此注释说“这个介词表示地点和指示”。“世间”指器世间。“此处如来于世间”指出生之处,在这里特指我们这个轮围世界。“沙门”指入流者。“第二沙门”指一来者。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,什么是沙门?诸比丘,在此,比丘断除三结,成为入流者。”(增支部4.241)
“诸比丘,什么是第二沙门?诸比丘,在此,比丘断除三结,贪嗔痴变薄,成为一来者。”(增支部4.241)“就在这里安住着”指的就是安住在这因陀娑罗窟中的人。巴利
Evaṃvutte ussāhajātāti evaṃ ‘‘suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karotha bhāsissāmī’’ti vutte na kira satthā saṅkhepeneva desessati, vitthārenapi bhāsissatīti sañjātussāhā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā. Idhāti iminā vuccamānaadhikaraṇaṃ tassa puggalassa uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘desāpadese nipāto’’ti. Lokanti okāsalokaṃ. Idha tathāgato loketi hi jātikhettaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ cakkavāḷo adhippeto. Samaṇoti sotāpanno. Dutiyo samaṇoti sakadāgāmī. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, samaṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.241) ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, dutiyo samaṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hotī’’ti ca (a. ni. 4.241). Idheva tiṭṭhamānassāti imissā eva indasālaguhāyaṃ tiṭṭhamānassa.
2 “未闻者”在这里是指:所谓“闻”,是依耳门领受、忆持下来的,或者就是领受本身;拥有“闻”的人,就是“有闻者”。因为“vā”这个词尾,有“存在”等多种含义。比如在“此世间是有边的、周圆的”这类句子里,“vā”表示“存在”。在“有财、有富、得到食物”这类句子里,表示“多”。在“有病、被病所制”这类句子里,表示身体有病。在“麻风者、穿麻风衣者”这类句子里,表示讥嫌;在“有嫉妒、有悭吝、诈伪、谄曲、诳惑”这类句子里,表示长期习染。在“持杖者、持伞者、持衣者”这类句子里,表示随身携带。在“或者以此而他是智者”这类句子里,表示譬喻,也就是相似的意思。在“贤者说彼为牟尼”这类句子里,表示集合。在“这些是谁的?属于谁的?”这类句子里,表示疑惑。在“这些沙门婆罗门中,此人是一切愚者、一切痴者”这类句子里,表示彰显。在“这位王子不知分寸”这类句子里,是补足音节。在“诸比丘,凡有沙门或婆罗门”这类句子里,表示选择。在“释迦子具吉祥、具戒,以戒具足而善名远播”这类句子里,表示称赞。在“具慧,具足能导向生灭、趣向如实灭苦的圣抉择慧”这类句子里,表示超胜。这里也是表示超胜,或者表示称赞。因此,凡是被人称扬,或者因超胜而有所闻的人,就是“有闻者”。用“有闻者”这个词,既说明了能摧毁烦恼垢染的教理闻法,也说明了闻后依此而行的修行。或者,听闻所应听闻的,并因此完成所应做的,所以叫“有闻”;与此相反,没有这样听闻的,就是“未闻者”。巴利
2.Assutavāti ettha (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.51) sutanti sotadvārānusārena upadhāritaṃ, upadhāraṇaṃ vā, sutaṃ assatthīti sutavā. Vā-saddassa hi attho atthitāmattādivasena anekavidho. Tathā hi ‘‘antavā ayaṃ loko parivaṭumo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.54; paṭi. ma. 1.140) atthitāmattaṃ attho. ‘‘Dhanavā bhogavā, lābhī annassā’’ti ca ādīsu bahubhāvo. ‘‘Rogavā hoti rogābhibhūto’’tiādīsu kāyābādho. ‘‘Kuṭṭhī kuṭṭhacīvarenā’’tiādīsu nindā, ‘‘issukī maccharī saṭho māyāvino keṭubhino’’tiādīsu abhiṇhayogo. ‘‘Daṇḍī chattī alambarī’’tiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.142) saṃsaggo. ‘‘Paṇḍito vāpi tena so’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 63) upamānaṃ, sadisabhāvoti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muniṃ vedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 213) samuccayo. ‘‘Ke vā ime kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsayo. ‘‘Ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.181) vibhāvano. ‘‘Na vāyaṃ kumāro mattamaññāsī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.154) padapūraṇaṃ. ‘‘Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.170) vikappo. ‘‘Sakyaputtassa sirīmato (dī. ni. 3.277), sīlavato sīlasampattiyā kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.150; 3.316; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285) ca ādīsu pasaṃsā. ‘‘Paññavā hoti udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.317, 355) atisayo. Idhāpi atisayo, pasaṃsā vā attho, tasmā yassa pasaṃsitaṃ, atisayena vā sutaṃ atthi, so sutavāti saṃkilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ pariyattidhammassavanaṃ, taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipatti ca ‘‘sutavā’’ti iminā saddena pakāsitā. Atha vā sotabbayuttaṃ sutvā kattabbanipphattivasena suṇīti sutavā, tappaṭikkhepena na sutavāti assutavā.
这个“a-”音节,在“无因的法”(《法集论》2.二法论母)、“没有比丘的住处”(《巴逸提》1046、1047)这类表述中,要否定的是与那事物共存的状态。在“非缘法”(《法集论》7.二法论母)中,要否定的是与缘有关联的状态。因为缘所生的法就是与缘有关联的,而非缘所生的法不是这样,所以这里点明了它不与缘相关联。“无见法”(《法集论》9.二法论母)中,要否定的是那事物自身的某种性质。因为“见”就是可被看见的性质。或者说,“见”就是能看,也就是眼识;这里要否定的是它可被执取的那种性质。就像在“无漏法”(《法集论》15.二法论母)、“无对碍法”(《法集论》10.二法论母)、“无所缘法”(《法集论》55.二法论母)中,否定的是它的作用;在“无色法”(《法集论》11.二法论母)、“非心所法”(《法集论》57.二法论母)中,否定的是那种存在状态。在这些地方,是以别的方式来说明的。“非人”是否定仅仅是人,即没有人性,而是别的同类存在;这里暗示的是相似性。“非沙门却自称沙门、非圣者”(《增支部》3.13),否定的是应受尊重的功德;这里体现的是呵责。“Kacci bhoto anāmayaṃ, anudarā kaññā”(《本生》2.20.129)中,否定的是它并非轻微;在“未生法”(《法集论》17.三法论母)中,否定的是与之相似的状态。因为过去法曾经生起过,已生起的法又因缘的一部分成熟而开始生起等等,而且不依赖时间的法也存在,所以它当然与已生起的法相应,更何况现在的法呢?因此这里说的是它与那些法相距甚远。“无学法”(《法集论》11.三法论母)中,否定的是它还没有终结;这里说明的是它尚未完成。这样,“a-”就是显示许多不同意义的。但在这里,应当像“无色法、非心所法”等那样,理解为否定那种存在状态,而不是别的意思。以此显示他缺乏闻所成智等智慧。因此说:“由于没有传承和证得,应知为未闻者。”巴利
Ayañhi a-kāro ‘‘ahetukā dhammā (dha. sa. 2.dukamātikā), abhikkhuko āvāso’’tiādīsu (pāci. 1046, 1047) taṃsahayoganivattiyaṃ icchito. ‘‘Apaccayā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 7.dukamātikā) taṃsambandhībhāvanivattiyaṃ. Paccayuppannañhi paccayasambandhīti appaccayuppannattā ataṃsambandhitā ettha jotitā. ‘‘Anidassanā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 9.dukamātikā) taṃsabhāvanivattiyaṃ. Nidassanañhi daṭṭhabbatā. Atha vā passatīti nidassanaṃ, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, taggahetabbabhāvanivattiyaṃ yathā ‘‘anāsavā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 15.dukamātikā), ‘‘appaṭighā dhammā (dha. sa. 10.dukamātikā), anārammaṇā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 55.dukamātikā) taṃkiccanivattiyaṃ, ‘‘arūpino dhammā (dha. sa. 11.dukamātikā) acetasikā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 57.dukamātikā) tabbhāvanivattiyaṃ. Tadaññathā hi ettha pakāsitā. ‘‘Amanusso’’ti tabbhāvamattanivattiyaṃ. Manussamattaṃ natthi, aññaṃ samānanti. Sadisatā hi ettha sūcitā. ‘‘Assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiñño, anariyo’’ti (a. ni. 3.13) ca taṃsambhāvanīyaguṇanivattiyaṃ. Garahā hi idha ñāyati. ‘‘Kacci bhoto anāmayaṃ, anudarā kaññā’’ti (jā. 2.20.129) tadanappabhāvanivattiyaṃ, ‘‘anuppannā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 17.tikamātikā) taṃsadisabhāvanivattiyaṃ. Atītānañhi uppannapubbattā uppādidhammānañca paccayekadesanipphattiyā āraddhuppādibhāvato kālavimuttassa ca vijjamānattā uppannānukūlatā pageva paccuppannānanti tabbidūratāva ettha viññāyati ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 11.tikamātikā) tadapariyosānanivattiyaṃ. Tanniṭṭhānañhi ettha pakāsitanti. Evamanekesaṃ atthānaṃ jotako. Idha pana ‘‘arūpino dhammā acetasikā dhammā’’tiādīsu viya tabbhāvanivattiyaṃ daṭṭhabbo, aññattheti attho. Etenassa sutādiñāṇavirahataṃ dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo assutavā itī’’ti.
现在要解释这句话的含义。因为仅靠对蕴、界、处等的善巧,就能具备遮止妄执的多闻。正如经中所说:“尊者,怎样才算多闻呢?比丘对蕴善巧,对界、处、缘起善巧,这样就叫多闻。”因此说“若人于蕴、界、处、谛、缘相、念处等……”其中,把法义读诵得熟练,叫“诵习”;普遍地询问义理,叫“遍问”;与善知识一起,通过提醒和回避的方式作出判断,叫“决择”;道、果、涅槃,叫“证得”。巴利
Idāni tassa atthaṃ vivaranto yasmā khandhadhātvādikosallenapi maññanāpaṭisedhanasamatthaṃ bāhusaccaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, bahussuto hoti? Yato kho bhikkhu khandhakusalo hoti dhātu, āyatana, paṭiccasamuppādakusalo hoti, ettāvatā kho bhikkhu bahussuto hotī’’ti, tasmā ‘‘yassa hi khandhadhātuāyatanasaccapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānādīsūtiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Atthaparipucchanaṃ paripucchā. Kusalehi saha codanāpariharaṇavasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ vinicchayo. Maggaphalanibbānāni adhigamo.
凡夫:因为许多各种各样的烦恼和有身见没有被破坏,所以它们产生凡夫,或者说凡夫是由它们所产生的。或者,“生”这个词本身就表示“未被破坏”。在“仰赖众多导师之面者”这个解释里,众多的“生”指那些自称导师的人,而这些人依附于他们,所以叫凡夫,这是词义的解释。在“从一切趣中未出离者”这个解释里,所谓“生”,是指有情出生或应当出生的地方,也就是种种不同的趣,这些趣对他们来说是众多的,所以叫凡夫。在“从此以后更生者”这个解释里,“生”是指以他们为因而出生这件事,也就是诸行等,这些诸行对他们来说是众多存在的,所以叫凡夫。或者,“生”这个词应当理解为有“造作”等含义。瀑流,指欲瀑流等。热恼,指贪火等带来的逼迫。那些本身就是,或者说一切烦恼都是煎熬。在“对五种欲乐功德染着众多者”这个解释里,会生起的东西叫“生”,指贪、贪求等这一类,而对他们来说这些“生”是众多的,所以叫凡夫。或者说,“在众多中生起、染着的众生”,这样看,“生”这个词应当理解为具有“贪”等意义。染着:就像布被染料染上颜色一样,心被导致变异的欲贪所染污,成为极染着的状态。贪婪:以渴望为本性的贪欲而变得贪婪,陷入了强烈的贪求。粘着:如同被捆绑住一样,因为难以解脱而系缚在那里。昏昧:如同因烦恼的力量而失去知觉,不做别的事情,陷入了昏迷和愚痴的状态。沈溺:好像把那件事当成完全占为己有,吞下去消化了以后安住下来一样。附着:就像东西钩在弯曲的杆子上一样附着,或者像陷入大泥沼直到鼻子那么深的人一样,由于无法拔出的性质而沉没其中;又有“系着”的意思:就像一只猴子被猴胶粘住后拼命挣扎,由于攀缘五根而被系着一样。障碍:就是被束缚了,或者被逼恼了。覆盖:就是被遮盖起来了;遮蔽:就是被阻挡住了。包裹:就是被缠绕起来了,或者说被完全地裹住了。盖覆:就是被关闭起来了;隐蔽:就是被隐藏起来了。覆藏:就是变成了面朝下的、被盖住的状态。或者,通过“众多的、超越计算路径的”等文字,来显示这众多的“生”就是凡夫。巴利
Bahūnaṃ (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 1007) nānappakārānaṃ kilesasakkāyadiṭṭhīnaṃ avihatattā tā janenti, tāhi vā janitāti puthujjanā. Avighātameva vā jana-saddo vadati. Puthu satthārānaṃ mukhamullokikāti ettha puthu janā satthupaṭiññā etesanti puthujjanāti vacanattho. Puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti ettha janetabbā, jāyanti vā ettha sattāti janā, nānāgatiyo, tā puthū etesanti puthujjanā. Ito pare jāyanti etehīti janā, abhisaṅkhārādayo, te etesaṃ puthū vijjantīti puthujjanā. Abhisaṅkharaṇādiattho eva vā jana-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Oghā kāmoghādayo. Rāgaggiādayo santāpā. Te eva, sabbepi vā kilesā pariḷāhā. Puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattāti ettha jāyatīti jano, rāgo gedhoti evamādiko, puthu jano etesanti puthujjanā. Puthūsu vā janā jātā rattāti evaṃ rāgādiattho eva vā janasaddo daṭṭhabbo. Rattāti vatthaṃ viya raṅgajātena cittassa vipariṇāmakarena chandarāgena rattā sārattā. Giddhāti abhikaṅkhanasabhāvena abhijjhānena giddhā gedhaṃ āpannā. Gadhitāti ganthitā viya dummocanīyabhāvena tattha paṭibaddhā. Mucchitāti kilesavasena visaññībhūtā viya anaññakiccā mucchaṃ mohamāpannā. Ajjhosannāti anaññasādhāraṇe viya katvā gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhitā. Laggāti vaṅkadaṇḍake viya āsattā mahāpalipe vā yāva nāsikaggā palipannapuriso viya uddharituṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvena nimuggā , lagitāti makkaṭālepe ālaggabhāvena paccuḍḍito viya makkaṭo pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena ālaggitā. Palibuddhāti baddhā, upaddutā vā. Āvuṭāti āvunitā, nivutāti nivāritā. Ovutāti paliguṇṭhitā, pariyonaddhā vā. Pihitāti pidahitā, paṭicchannāti paṭicchāditā. Paṭikujjitāti heṭṭhāmukhajātā. Puthūnaṃ vā gaṇanapathamatītānantiādinā puthu jano puthujjanoti dasseti.
“无闻”这个词,是用来说明被无明蒙蔽的状态,所以说“被称为盲目凡夫”。因为远离,是指通过圣道断除了烦恼。在“非趣”中,就是没有增长,意思是没有利益;或者“非趣”就是不善巧的途径。因为它不引导、不回转。“趣”是指增长、利益,或者善巧的途径。“应被亲近”,是因为应当被侍奉和亲近。前面几种义理的分别,应当通过词源学的方式来理解词句的成立。最后一种则可以依据声明学来理解。虽然“圣”这个词,在“诸圣者,他们有清净身业”等语境中,也能用于那些具有清净心志与加行的凡夫。但在这里,是正因证得圣道,并以具足一切出世间性而成就“圣”的本质,才是这里所要表达的意义,为了显示这一点,论中才说“诸佛”等。其中,“独觉佛、如来弟子是善士”这句话,是为了不混淆地说明此处“圣者”“善士”这些词的确切含义。又因为从究竟、直接义而言,圣者性与善士性是同一自性,因此才说“或者一切”等等。巴利
‘‘Assutavā’’ti etena avijjandhatā vuttāti āha ‘‘andhaputhujjano vutto hotī’’ti. Ārakattā (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.3.1) kilesehi maggena samucchinnattā. Anayeti avaḍḍhiyaṃ, anattheti attho. Anaye vā anupāye. Nairiyanato avattanato. Ayeti vaḍḍhiyaṃ, atthe, upāye vā. Araṇīyatoti payirupāsitabbato. Niruttinayena padasiddhi veditabbā purimesu atthavikappesu. Pacchime pana saddasatthavasenapi. Yadipi ariya-saddo ‘‘ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35) visuddhāsayapayogesu puthujjanesupi vattati. Idha pana ariyamaggādhigamena sabbalokuttarabhāvena ca ariyabhāvo adhippetoti dassento āha ‘‘buddhā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘paccekabuddhā tathāgatasāvakā ca sappurisā’’ti idaṃ ariyā sappurisāti idha vuttapadānaṃ atthaṃ asaṅkarato dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana nippariyāyato ariyasappurisabhāvā abhinnasabhāvā. Tasmā ‘‘sabbeva vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
到这里为止,说的就是佛弟子。对佛弟子来说,善知识是绝对必须亲近的,因为如果没有从别人那里听来的法音,第一圣道就不会生起。尤其是,对他而言,世尊本人就是善知识。经里确实这样说:“阿难,正是依靠我作为善知识,那些有生法的众生才从生中解脱出来。”等等。而他因为获得了不坏净信,所以被称为具有坚固忠诚。经里也这样说:“我为弟子们制定的学处,我的弟子们即使为了活命也不会违犯。”在“以知恩等,独觉佛、诸佛”这段里,“知恩者”是指知道别人所给的恩德。“知所作”是指把已经得到的恩德让人知道、让它显明。因为即使是在百劫、千劫那么长的时间里所做的饶益,独觉佛们也知道,并且通过让人生起信心、接受供养等方式把它显明出来;同样,对在轮回中受苦的有情,他们也认真去做自己能做的、该做的事。但正自觉者不一样,即使在不可计数的千万劫里所做的饶益,以及众生证得道果的资助条件,他都知道,也能让它显明;而且就像狮子一样,在任何情况下都认真宣说佛法,履行佛陀的职责。通过哪种修行才被称为“见”,如果不修那种修行,以及对它缺乏恭敬,还有圣者们不见法的习性,这些都应该知道。所谓“以眼不见”,这里的“眼”并不是指肉眼,而是指天眼,所以说“以天眼”。所谓“圣者的状态”,是指由于具备某些素质而被称为“圣者”的那些道法与果法,应当被看作是这样。巴利
Ettāvatāhi buddhasāvako vutto. Tassa hi ekantena kalyāṇamitto icchitabbo paratoghosamantarena paṭhamamaggassa anuppajjanato. Visesato cassa bhagavāva kalyāṇamitto adhippeto. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘mamañhi, ānanda, kalyāṇamittaṃ āgamma jātidhammā sattā jātiyā parimuccantī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.2). So eva ca aveccapasādādhigamena daḷhabhatti nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (udā. 45). Kataññutādīhi paccekabuddhā buddhāti ettha kataṃ jānātīti kataññū. Kataṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karotīti katavedī. Anekesupi hi kappasatasahassesu kataṃ upakāraṃ jānanti paccekabuddhā pākaṭañca karonti satijananaāmisapaṭiggahaṇādinā , tathā saṃsāradukkhadukkhitassa sakkaccaṃ karonti kiccaṃ, yaṃ attanā kātuṃ sakkā. Sammāsambuddho pana kappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyasahassesupi kataṃ upakāraṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayañca jānāti, pākaṭañca karoti, sīho viya ca evaṃ sabbattha sakkaccameva dhammadesanaṃ karonto buddhakiccaṃ karoti. Yāya paṭipattiyā diṭṭhā nāma honti, tassā appaṭipajjanabhāvo, tattha ca ādarābhāvo ariyānaṃ adassanasīlatā ca, na ca dassane sādhukāritā ca veditabbā. Cakkhunā adassāvīti etta cakkhu nāma na maṃsacakkhu eva, atha kho dibbacakkhupīti āha ‘‘dibbacakkhunā vā’’ti. Ariyabhāvoti yehi yogato ‘‘ariyā’’ti vuccanti. Te maggaphaladhammā daṭṭhabbā.
这里说的是:在如实知见本身的见之状态中。所谓“基地”,是指能让人明白所表达意义的根据或原因。所谓“即使这样说”,意思是即使通过别的说法,把它转成对自身的教导来宣说。所谓“法”,是指出世间法,或者四圣谛法。能成就圣者的法,是指无常随观等正在被观照的无常等法,或者指四圣谛。巴利
Tatrāti ñāṇadassanasseva dassanabhāve. Vatthūti adhippetatthañāpanakāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ vuttepīti evaṃ aññāpadesena attūpanāyikaṃ katvā vuttepi. Dhammanti lokuttaradhammaṃ, catusaccadhammaṃ vā. Ariyakaradhammā aniccānupassanādayo vipassiyamānā aniccādayo, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni.
“未调伏者”就是没有调伏,没有按增上戒学等来训练。为了说明由于缺少哪些律仪,这个人被称为未调伏者,所以先说了“律仪有两种”等话。其中,“戒律仪”应理解为巴帝摩卡防护,从实质上说,就是身体和语言上不违犯。“念律仪”就是守护诸根,也就是正确现起的正念。“智律仪”:在说了“我说,对流有防护”之后,又说“以慧,这些被关闭”,因此应理解为:智律仪是指能防护、关闭称为“流”的贪、邪见、恶行、无明以及其余烦恼的断除之智。“忍律仪”指安忍,也就是正确现起的忍蕴,或者说是无嗔。有人说忍律仪是“慧”,这与注疏的解释相违。“精进律仪”是指以排除欲贪寻等的方式而现起的精进本身。依某一功德分而断除对应的过失分,这叫“彼分断”。依镇伏而断除,叫“镇伏断”。其余词句的意义,也应以此类推。巴利
Avinītoti na vinīto, adhisīlasikkhādivasena na sikkhito. Yesaṃ saṃvaravinayādīnaṃ abhāvena ayaṃ avinītoti vuccati, te tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘duvidho vinayo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sīlasaṃvaroti pātimokkhasaṃvaro veditabbo, so ca atthato kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. Satisaṃvaroti indriyarakkhā, sā ca tathāpavattā sati eva. Ñāṇasaṃvaroti ‘‘sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmī’’ti (su. ni. 1040) vatvā ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vacanato sotasaṅkhātānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritaavijjāavasiṭṭhakilesānaṃ saṃvaro pidahanaṃ samucchedañāṇanti veditabbaṃ. Khantisaṃvaroti adhivāsanā, sā ca tathāpavattā khandhā, adoso vā. Paññāti eke, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. Vīriyasaṃvaro kāmavitakkādīnaṃ vinodanavasena pavattaṃ vīriyameva. Tena tena guṇaṅgena tassa tassa aguṇaṅgassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgapahānaṃ. Vikkhambhanena pahānaṃ vikkhambhanapahānaṃ. Sesapadatthayepi eseva nayo.
“以这个巴帝摩卡防护”等语,是对戒律仪等内容的展开说明。其中,“具足”这个词里的“iti”是“等等”的意思。借此,指出了《分别论》中“同行、同趣”等关于防护的分别。其余几种防护也应当按同样的方式理解。至于这里还需要说明的内容,在紧接着的下一段经文中就会清楚显现。巴利
Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarenātiādi sīlasaṃvarādīnaṃ vivaraṇaṃ. Tattha samupetoti ettha iti-saddo ādisattho. Tena ‘‘sahagato samupagato’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 511) āgataṃ saṃvaravibhaṅgaṃ dasseti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ anantarasutte āvi bhavissati.
所谓“身恶行等”,指的是被称为恶戒的身恶行、语恶行等,被称为失念的放逸,或者贪欲等,以及不忍、无知、懈怠。
“防护”:就是关闭、遮盖。
“调伏”:就是从身、语、意的不正当活动中调伏、去除;或者从身恶行等中调伏;或者截断身等歪曲的活动,使之趋向正直。这就是它的含义。
应当知道:对于依靠各种条件聚合而可能生起的身恶行等,以各种方式令其不生起,这就是防护和调伏。巴利
Kāyaduccaritādīnanti dussīlyasaṅkhātānaṃ kāyavacīduccaritādīnaṃ muṭṭhassaccasaṅkhātassa pamādassa abhijjhādīnaṃ vā akkhantiaññāṇakosajjānañca. Saṃvaraṇatoti pidahanato thakanato. Vinayanatoti kāyavācācittānaṃ virūpappavattiyā vinayanato apanayanato, kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ vā vinayanato, kāyādīnaṃ vā jimhappavattiṃ vicchinditvā ujukaṃ nayanatoti attho. Paccayasamavāye uppajjanārahānaṃ kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ tathā tathā anuppādanameva saṃvaraṇaṃ vinayanañca veditabbaṃ.
“所断的”这一说法,是与前面内容相关联的。为什么说“在名色分别等观智中”呢?难道名色分别、把握缘、度疑这些不是观智吗?因为它们不是以遍察的方式生起的。确实如此。不过,因为它们是观智的依止处,所以才这样说。“名色确定”是指生起这样的智:“这只是名色,其中没有我,也没有我所。”“有身见”是指对那个身体生起的见:当由五蕴组成的身体存在时,或者自己念住于那个身体时,对那个身体便生起这种见。“观色是我”等这样生起的,就是邪见。“对于那色与非色,以业、无明等缘而把握的智”是“把握缘”。“无因见”是指:“无因无缘,众生被污染”等这样生起的见。“由自在天、人、生主、自然、极微、时间等,世界生起与息灭”这样生起的,是“邪因见”。“对于那”即对于把握缘本身。“以度疑”即如同现在名色从业等缘而生起,过去、未来也是如此,以在三时中去除疑的智。“疑惑”即以“我于过去存在否?”等开端的疑之转起。“以遍察”即通过“任何色,无论过去、未来、现在……”等方式,将五蕴置于十一种处中,以遍察的方式转起的观智。“我执”即对“我”与“我所”的执取。“以道非道智”即以道非道智清净。“于非道生道想”即对于光明等非道,生起“是道”想。巴利
Yaṃ pahānanti sambandho. ‘‘Nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu vipassanāñāṇesū’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu nāmarūpaparicchedapaccayapariggahakaṅkhāvitaraṇāni na vipassanāñāṇāni sammasanākārena appavattanato? Saccametaṃ. Vipassanāñāṇassa pana adhiṭṭhānabhāvato evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nāmarūpamattamidaṃ, natthi ettha attā vā attaniyaṃ vā’’ti evaṃ pavattañāṇaṃ nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ. Sati vijjamāne khandhapañcakasaṅkhāte kāye, sayaṃ vā satī tasmiṃ kāye diṭṭhīti sakkāyadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.81; 4.345) evaṃ pavattā micchādiṭṭhi. Tasseva rūpārūpassa kammāvijjādipaccayapariggaṇhanañāṇaṃ paccayapariggaho. ‘‘Natthi hetu natthi paccayo sattānaṃ saṃkilesāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168) ādinayappavattā ahetukadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Issarapurisapajāpatipakatiaṇukālādīhi loko pavattati nivattati cā’’ti pavattā visamahetudiṭṭhi. Tassevāti paccayapariggahasseva. Kaṅkhāvitaraṇenāti yathā etarahi nāmarūpassa kammādipaccayato uppatti, evaṃ atītānāgatesupīti tīsupi kālesu vicikicchāpanayanañāṇena. Kathaṃkathībhāvassāti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) ādinayappavattāya saṃsayappavattiyā. Kalāpasammasanenāti ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.361; 2.113; 3.86, 89) khandhapañcakaṃ ekādasasu okāsesu pakkhipitvā sammasanavasena pavattena nayavipassanāñāṇena . Ahaṃ mamāti gāhassāti attattaniyagahaṇassa. Maggāmaggavavatthānenāti maggāmaggañāṇavisuddhiyā. Amagge maggasaññāyāti obhāsādike amagge ‘‘maggo’’ti uppannasaññāya.
因为如实看见诸行的生起时,他会认定“诸行正是依靠相应的因缘才生起,并不是断灭不存在的”,所以说“以见生起而断除断见”。又因为看见诸行的坏灭时,他观察到“即使这些行不间断地持续运作,但每一生起的行都随即灭去,没有延续到下一生的连接”,这样观察的人,怎么会执取常见呢?所以说“以见坏灭而断除常见”。以见怖畏,就是依怖畏现起的智。有怖畏处,指五蕴,因为它是一切怖畏的来源,又是与被称为完全止息苦的至上安稳相对立的。无怖畏想,就是生起“无怖畏、安稳”的想法。味想,是指在五取蕴中依着滋味而转起的想,这也叫做“执著阿赖耶”。悦意想,是指在同样的地方依着悦意而转起的想,这也叫做“欢喜”。不想脱离的欲望就是执取。不观察,就是对诸行不厌离,也就是住著的意思。在法住、缘起中,违逆就是执取常见或断见,或者是遮蔽缘的行相的无明;在涅槃中,违逆就是对诸行的欢喜,或者是遮蔽涅槃的无明。执取行相,是指由于某种烦恼还没有断除,观智因此不能舍弃行相,那个烦恼就叫做执取行相,也叫做“结著”。或者,超越执取行相本身就是断除。巴利
Yasmā sammadeva saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ passanto ‘‘evameva saṅkhārā anurūpakāraṇato uppajjanti, na pana ucchijjantī’’ti gaṇhāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā’’ti. Yasmā pana saṅkhārānaṃ vayaṃ passanto ‘‘yadipime saṅkhārā avicchinnā vattanti, uppannuppannā pana appaṭisandhikā nirujjhante vā’’ti passati, tassevaṃ passato kuto sassataggāho, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā’’ti. Bhayadassanenāti bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇena. Sabhayeti sabbabhayānaṃ ākarabhāvato sakaladukkhavūpasamasaṅkhātassa paramassāsassa paṭipakkhabhāvato ca sabhaye khandhapañcake. Abhayasaññāyāti ‘‘abhayaṃ khema’’nti uppannasaññāya. Assādasaññā nāma pañcupādānakkhandhesu assādavasena pavattasaññā, yā ‘‘ālayābhiniveso’’tipi vuccati. Abhiratisaññā tattheva abhirativasena pavattasaññā, yā ‘‘nandī’’tipi vuccati. Amuccitukamyatā ādānaṃ. Anupekkhā saṅkhārehi anibbindanaṃ, sālayatāti attho. Dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ paṭiccasamuppāde paṭilomabhāvo sassatucchedaggāho, paccayākārapaṭicchādakamoho vā, nibbāne paṭilomabhāvo saṅkhāresu rati, nibbānapaṭicchādakamoho vā. Saṅkhāranimittaggāhoti yādisassa kilesassa appahīnattā vipassanā saṅkhāranimittaṃ na muñcati, so kileso, yo ‘‘saṃyogābhiniveso’’tipi vuccati. Saṅkhāranimittaggahaṇassa atikkamanameva vā pahānaṃ.
转起本身就是转起的状态,意思是缠缚。说到“盖等法”时,这里的“等”字涵盖了属于盖一类的烦恼,以及寻、伺等。巴利
Pavatti eva pavattibhāvo, pariyuṭṭhānanti attho. Nīvaraṇādidhammānanti ettha ādi-saddena nīvaraṇapakkhiyā kilesā vitakkavicārādayo ca gayhanti.
四圣道已经修习完成,因为彻底不再生起,所以成为所断——它们之间是这样关联的。那么,是以什么来断呢?正是以圣道本身。这个意思从“因为四圣道已修习”而说“不再生起”就可以明白。关于“属于集谛方面的”:在这里,四道也是四圣谛的现观,因此,应当由它们所断的各别集谛,就和它们一起被断除了;因为与集同类,而且在《谛分别》中也说到一切烦恼都属于集谛,所以把邪见等称为“属于集谛方面的”。“止息性”就是已经寂静。“出离有为”就是没有有为之自性。“已舍断一切有为”就是远离一切有为,意思是“已出离有为”。“断及彼律仪”即“断除律仪”:依前一种含义(断),依第二种含义则是“被断除故为断”,应作“彼之律仪”这样连接。巴利
Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā accantaṃ appavattibhāvena yaṃ pahānanti sambandho. Kena pahānanti? Ariyamaggehevāti viññāyamānoyamattho tesaṃ bhāvitattā appavattivacanato. Samudayapakkhikassāti ettha cattāropi maggā catusaccābhisamayāti katvā tehi pahātabbena tena tena samudayena saha pahātabbattā samudayasabhāgattā, saccavibhaṅge ca sabbakilesānaṃ samudayabhāvassa vuttattā ‘‘samudayapakkhikā’’ti diṭṭhiādayo vuccanti. Paṭippassaddhattaṃ vupasantatā. Saṅkhatanissaṭatā saṅkhārasabhāvābhāvo. Pahīnasabbasaṅkhatanti virahitasabbasaṅkhataṃ, visaṅkhāranti attho. Pahānañca taṃ vinayo cāti pahānavinayo purimena atthena, dutiyena pana pahīyatīti pahānaṃ, tassa vinayoti yojetabbaṃ.
“已坏失律仪”是指律仪已经丧失,也就是没有律仪的意思。这样一来,没有受持律仪的人也被包括在内了。因为律仪必须通过受持才能达成,如果没有受持,就不会有律仪。世间人确实会这样说:“我们的大财富啊,就这样没了,因为没去造作。”
“圣洁者”就是ariyo,这是指同一个人的说法。“就是那个”意思是:就是那个,本质上没有别的。“具有该自性”意思是:本质上具有那种自性——善士具有圣洁者的自性,圣洁者具有善士的自性。巴利
Bhinnasaṃvarattāti naṭṭhasaṃvarattā, saṃvarābhāvatoti attho. Tena asamādinnasaṃvaropi saṅgahito hoti. Samādānena hi sampādetabbo saṃvaro tadabhāve na hotīti. Evañhi loke vattāro honti ‘‘mahā vata no bhogo, so naṭṭho tathā akatattā’’ti. Ariyeti ariyo. Paccattavacanañhetaṃ. Eseseti eso so eva, atthato anaññoti attho. Tajjāteti atthato taṃsabhāvo, sappuriso ariyasabhāvo, ariyo ca sappurisasabhāvoti attho.
这个“义”指的就是“一切法的根本范畴”所说的那个意思。那么,为什么这里要用“人”作为立足点来开示呢?这里应当说的内容,它自己会在“因为凡夫没有彻底了知所依的基础”等文句里说明。法是它的立足点,所以叫“法立足点”,也就是依靠自性法而展开的开示。第一部经完全按法的方式展开,第三部经从人出发、又按人的方式结束,其余的经则是法和人混合的方式。那么,世尊为什么用这样的区分方式来说法呢?这是根据所教化者的意乐和说法时的善巧自在。有些所教化者能通过以法为立足点的开示,轻松地通达其中的意义,世尊就那样为他们说法。这个道理适用于一切情况。又因为世尊对法界善巧通达,所以获得了说法的自在;这个法界他已经善巧通达,因此,获得说法自在的法主、法王,想怎样就怎样说法。应当这样理解:正是由于所教化者的意乐和说法的善巧自在,世尊才用这些区分方式来说法。巴利
Taṃ atthanti ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti evaṃ vuttamatthaṃ. Kasmā panettha puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katāti? Yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘yasmā puthujjano apariññātavatthuko’’tiādinā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2) sayameva vakkhati. Dhammo adhiṭṭhānaṃ etissāti dhammādhiṭṭhānā, sabhāvadhamme nissāya pavattitadesanā. Dhammavaseneva pavattā paṭhamā, puggalavasena uṭṭhahitvā puggalavaseneva gatā tatiyā, itarā dhammapuggalānaṃ vomissakavasena. Kasmā pana bhagavā evaṃ vibhāgena dhammaṃ desetīti? Veneyyajjhāsayena desanāvilāsena ca. Ye hi veneyyā dhammādhiṭṭhānāya dhammadesanāya sukhena atthaṃ paṭivijjhanti, tesaṃ tathā dhammaṃ deseti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yassā ca dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā desanāvilāsappatto hoti, sāyaṃ suppaṭividdhā, tasmā desanāvilāsappatto dhammissaro dhammarājā yathā yathā icchati, tathā tathā dhammaṃ desetīti evaṃ iminā veneyyajjhāsayena desanāvilāsena ca evaṃ vibhāgena dhammaṃ desetīti veditabbo.
六界:就是依地界、水界、火界、风界、空界、识界这六界,所以叫六界。十八意行:就是依照“以眼见色之后,游走于能生喜悦之色”等经文所说的六种喜近行、六种忧近行、六种舍近行,合起来就是十八意行。四依止:依照谛依止等,就有四种依止。盲:因为用慧眼看不见现世的利益和来世的利益,所以叫盲。一眼:因为只看见现世的利益,所以叫一眼。双眼:因为两种利益都能看见,所以叫双眼。应当这样理解。巴利
Chadhāturoti pathavidhātu āpo-tejo-vāyo-ākāsadhātu viññāṇadhātūti imesaṃ channaṃ dhātūnaṃ vasena chadhāturo. ‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā somanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicaratī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.324) vuttānaṃ channaṃ somanassūpavicārānaṃ, channaṃ domanassaupekkhūpavicārānañca vasena aṭṭhārasamanopavicāro. Saccādhiṭṭhānādivasena caturādhiṭṭhāno. Paññācakkhunā diṭṭhadhammikassa samparāyikassa ca atthassa adassanato andho, diṭṭhadhammikasseva dassanato ekacakkhu, dvinnampi dassanato dvicakkhu, veditabbo.
“他如此说明”是连接语。这里的“他如此”就是指“那位”,意思是:前面所说的那位善于分别教法的世尊。“未遍知根基者”是指由三种遍知尚未了知的蕴,因为蕴正是遍知的根基。“以未遍知为根源”是指以遍知缺失为因,因为这种状态存在时,是依于遍知缺失而有的。因为无明等烦恼与遍知对立,而这一切妄想都以它们为根源。在“不见圣者”这一句里,“iti”这个词表示“等等”。因此,它以凡夫特征的方式,涵盖了“对圣法不熟练”等其余经文中的说法,因为这里正是在说明凡夫。所以说“如此说明了凡夫”。巴利
Svāyaṃ niddisīti sambandho. Svāyanti ca so ayaṃ, yathāvuttadesanāvibhāgakusalo bhagavāti attho. Apariññātavatthukoti tīhi pariññāhi apariññātakkhandho. Khandhā hi pariññātavatthu. Apariññāmūlikāti parijānanābhāvanimittā tasmiṃ sati bhāvato. Pariññānañhi avijjādayo kilesā paṭipakkhā tammūlikā ca sabbamaññanāti. Ariyānaṃ adassāvīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena ‘‘ariyadhammassa akovido’’tiādikaṃ puthujanassa visesanabhāvena pavattaṃ pāḷisesaṃ gaṇhāti puthujjananiddesabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ puthujjanaṃ niddisī’’ti.
地品的注释巴利
Pathavīvāravaṇṇanā
“Tassāti”中的“他的”,指的是凡夫。“Vasati ettha ārammaṇakaraṇavasenāti”——因为以所缘的方式而成为心识生起之处,所以所缘本身也被称为“依处”,也就是生起的立足处。因此说“在地等依处中”。对于有身法,虽然也能以所缘等方式成为妄想的因,但正因为它们本身就是妄想生起的因,所以说“由一切有身法所产生的妄想”。在这里,地界与其他界相比,虽然有带不带附属成分的差别,但在分量上彼此相等,而就作用力来说,则应当知道有强弱的差别。“Sambhārantīti sambhārā”——“聚集”就是附属,也就是眷属。在各自色聚中,以特相为地的法与其余诸法,按各自的情况,以缘和眷属的方式一起生起。因此说:“它和颜色等附属成分一起,被称为地,也就是有附属成分的地。”
“Pathavitoti”这里,以“广博”之义称为“普地”,“普地”就是地。地虽然在有限范围内活动,但因为作为一切色聚生起的依持而生起,所以可以说它是广大、扩展、宽阔的;而水等则是通过渗入其中而转起者,不配称广大。至于有附属成分的地,其广大性就更不必说了。在所缘地中,“广大”应从“增长”和“遍满”的意义来理解;在另一种情况下,则只是沿用惯用语来看待。“所缘地”是指成为禅那所缘的、被称为地的似相。因此说“也称为相地”。“Āgamanavasenāti”——是以地遍修习之来至的方式。正如这样说:“水与天神、地,火、风,那时到来。”巴利
Tassāti puthujjanassa. Vasati ettha ārammaṇakaraṇavasenāti ārammaṇampi vatthūti vuccati pavattiṭṭhānabhāvatoti āha ‘‘pathavīādīsu vatthūsū’’ti. Sakkāyadhammānampi ārammaṇādinā satipi maññanāhetubhāve maññanāhetukatteneva tesaṃ nibbattitoti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasakkāyadhammajanitaṃ maññana’’nti. Ettha ca pathavīdhātu sesadhātūnaṃ sasambhārāsambhārabhāvā satipi pamāṇato samabhāve sāmatthiyato adhikānadhikabhāvena veditabbā. Sambhārantīti sambhārā, parivārā. Taṃtaṃkalāpehi lakkhaṇapathaviyā sesadhammā yathārahaṃ paccayabhāvena parivārabhāvena ca pavattanti. Tenāha ‘‘sā hi vaṇṇādīhi sambhārehi saddhiṃ pathavīti sasambhārapathavī’’ti. Pathavitoti ettha puthulaṭṭhena puthuvī, puthuvī eva pathavī. Sā hi satipi paricchinnavuttiyaṃ sabbesaṃ sakalāpabhāvānaṃ ādhārabhāvena pavattamānā puthulā patthaṭā vitthiṇṇāti vattabbataṃ arahati, na pana taṃ anupavisitvā pavattamānā āpādayo. Sasambhārapathaviyā pana puthulabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Ārammaṇapathaviyaṃ vaḍḍhanapharaṇaṭṭhehi puthulaṭṭho, itarasmiṃ ruḷhiyāva daṭṭhabbo. Ārammaṇapathavīti jhānassa ārammaṇabhūtaṃ pathavīsaṅkhātaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nimittapathavītipi vuccatī’’ti. Āgamanavasenāti pathavīkasiṇabhāvanāgamanavasena. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘āpo ca devā pathavī, tejo vāyo tadāgamu’’nti (dī. ni. 2.340).
“一切”也包括四种地。仅仅通过传闻等方式得到的认定,确实会成为它生起的所依。比如,经中通过“坚硬”“粗糙”等说法,也把特相意义上的地提了出来。然而有些人说:“如果已经看到特相,就不会有认定;所谓‘认知’的想,是执取之见的基础,是一种整体执取,这在特相上说不通,所以特相意义上的地不应该被取用。”此话不成立,因为这里并不是要通达特相。所以论中说“取用世间通行的说法”。而且并非所有的想都是整体执取,也不是只有执取之见才是它的基础。因此,当特相意义上的地通过身门等途径、或者以其他方式呈现时,认定仍然会生起。正因为这样,论中才说“仅仅通过传闻等方式得到”。为了说明“pathavitoti”是离开格,论中说“认知为地”。因为无论认知四种地中的哪一种为“地”,他都只是以地的部分来认知,而不是以水等的部分来认知,所以说“以地的部分来认知”。“取用世间通行的说法”是指不抛开世间的共同名称。这就表明,即使是特相意义上的地,它的活动也是通过世间名称这个门径而发生的。巴利
Sabbāpīti catubbidhā pathavīpi. Anussavādimattaladdhā maññanā vatthu hotiyeva. Tathā hi ‘‘kakkhaḷaṃ kharigata’’ntiādinā (vibha. 173) lakkhaṇapathavīpi uddharīyati. Yaṃ paneke vadanti ‘‘lakkhaṇe diṭṭhe maññanā natthi, sañjānātīti vuttasaññā ca diṭṭhiggāhassa mūlabhūtā piṇḍaggāhitā, sā lakkhaṇe nakkhamati, tasmā lakkhaṇapathavī na gahetabbā’’ti, tadayuttaṃ lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa idha anadhippetattā. Tenāha ‘‘lokavohāraṃ gahetvā’’ti. Na ca sabbasaññā piṇḍaggāhikā , nāpi diṭṭhiggāhasseva mūlabhūtā, tasmā lakkhaṇapathaviyāpi kāyadvārānusārena aññathā ca upaṭṭhitāya maññanā pavattateva. Teneva ca ‘‘anussavādimattaladdhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pathavitoti paccate nissakkavacananti dassento ‘‘pathavīti sañjānātī’’ti āha. Yasmā catubbidhampi pathaviṃ ‘‘pathavī’ti sañjānanto tena tena nayena pathavīkoṭṭhāseneva sañjānātīti vuccati, na āpādikoṭṭhāsena, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavibhāgena sañjānātī’’ti. Lokavohāraṃ gahetvāti lokasamaññaṃ avijahitvā. Etena lakkhaṇapathaviyampi vohāramukhenevassā pavattīti dasseti.
如果只是按照世间的说法来活动,那这里有什么过错呢?圣者们不也是按照世间的说法来活动的吗?比如他们会说“尊者,这大地”等等。但这里并不是说仅仅停留在说法上,而是要通过说法这个入口,指出错误的执著。为了说明这一点,所以论中说“以想颠倒而认知”。它的意思是:由不如理作意所产生的、以“净”等种种方式生起的颠倒想而认知。由此应当看出,这里展示的是微弱的渴爱、慢、见的妄想。如果是这样,那为什么这里只取了“想”呢?因为想很显著。就好比钻木取火时,当烟出现的时候,虽然那时火也确实存在,因为两者不相分离,但因为烟更显著,所以说“烟产生了”,而不说“火产生了”;这个道理应当这样理解。虽然在那里也有妄想的作用,但它并不明显,因为不显著;只有想的作用是显著的,而这个想的作用是随顺妄想、与妄想相伴的。所以论中说“以想颠倒而认知”。这样一来,就和“不放弃地的成分而认知”的意思衔接起来了。也就是说,如果有人完全不放弃、不离开前面所说的那种地的成分,就像对铅块生起黄金想的人一样,把那个本来是无我等自性的东西,以我等的行相来认知,那么依他的情况,就说“地”等等。为了说明“不应当说凡夫的执取是正理的障碍”,所以论中说“像狂人一样……执取”。世尊说圣者们有“不见”等差别,这是说,对于前面所说的那种认知,其原因正是由世尊在此说出的圣者不见等差别,应当这样连接理解。巴利
Yadi lokavohārena tattha pavatti, ko ettha doso, nanu ariyāpi ‘‘ayañhi bhante mahāpathavī’’tiādinā lokavohārena pavattantīti? Na ettha vohāramatte avaṭṭhānaṃ adhippetaṃ, atha kho vohāramukhena micchābhinivesoti dassento ‘‘saññāvipallāsena sañjānātī’’ti āha. Tassattho – ayonisomanasikārasambhūtāya ‘‘subha’’ntiādinayappavattāya viparītasaññāya sañjānātīti. Etena dubbalā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhimaññanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā saññā gahitāti? Pākaṭabhāvato. Yathā nāma aggimhi mathiyamāne yadā dhūmo upalabbhati, kiñcāpi tadā vijjateva pāvako avinābhāvato, pākaṭabhāvato pana dhūmo jātoti vuccati, na aggi jātoti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadipi tattha maññanākiccaṃ atthi, na pana vibhūtaṃ apākaṭabhāvato saññākiccameva vibhūtaṃ, taṃ pana maññanānukūlaṃ maññanāsahitaṃ cāti āha ‘‘saññāvipallāsena sañjānātī’’ti. Evaṃ pathavībhāgaṃ amuñcantoyeva vā sañjānātīti sambandho. Yo hi vuttappabhedāya pathaviyā pathavibhāgaṃ amuñcantoyeva avijahantoyeva sīsapiṇḍe suvaṇṇasaññī viya anattādisabhāvaṃyeva taṃ attādivasena sañjānāti, tassa vasena vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavī’’tiādi. Na vattabbaṃ puthujjanaggāhassa yuttimaggananivāraṇatoti dassento āha ‘‘ummattako viya…pe… gaṇhātī’’ti . Ariyānaṃ adassāvitādibhedanti ariyānaṃ adassāvitādivisesaṃ vadantena bhagavatāva ettha yathāvuttasañjānane kāraṇaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
“如此”是指按照“他以地的部分来认知”等所说的那种方式。“认知之后”是对先前动作的说明,所以注释者说“后来……他执取”。“戏论的组成部分”就是戏论的分支。所谓“戏论”,是因为众生靠这些在轮回中长久流转,所以叫戏论;所谓“认为”,是因为众生靠这些以“这是我的”等方式来构想,所以叫认为。这两种说法其实都是在说贪等烦恼本身,所以说“以贪、慢、见这些戏论,在此处以‘认为’这个名称说出来”。就像把不是骏马的当成骏马、把不是殊胜的当成殊胜来执取一样,见所产生的认为是一种颠倒的执取,贪和慢所产生的认为同样也是颠倒的执取,所以说“颠倒地执取”。应当理解,“认为”是指:贪、慢、见虽然各有紧抓不放、高傲自举、执取对象等不同特性,但它们都以构想所缘的方式运作,这是它们共同的特点——就好比寻、伺等虽然在安立所缘等方面各有不同特性,却共同具有审察的特点一样。因此注释者说“以三种认为而认为”等。“他的”,指凡夫的;就像在随观生灭等中,即使以微细的方式也有认为的生起,为了让这一点容易阐明,所以先说粗显的方式,因此说“以粗显的方式”。其关联是:粗显的分别说明之后,微细的部分就容易阐明了,所以作这样的义理连接。“内在的”,是指与根相连、属于有情相续、称为自己内在的,这在《分别论》和《无碍解道》中已经说过。巴利
Evanti ‘‘pathavibhāgena sañjānātī’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Sañjānitvāti pubbakālakiriyāniddesoti āha ‘‘aparabhāge…pe… gaṇhātī’’ti. Papañcasaṅkhāti papañcakoṭṭhāsā. Papañcanti sattā saṃsāre cirāyanti etehīti papañcā, maññanti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā parikappenti etāhīti maññanāti dvīhipi pariyāyehi taṇhādayova vuttāti āha ‘‘taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcehi idha maññanānāmena vuttehī’’ti. Ajaññassa jaññato, aseyyādikassa seyyādito gahaṇato diṭṭhimaññanā viya taṇhāmānamaññanāpi aññathā gāho evāti āha ‘‘aññathā gaṇhātī’’ti. Ārammaṇābhiniropanādinā bhinnasabhāvānampi vitakkādīnaṃ sādhāraṇo upanijjhāyanasabhāvo viya anugijjhanuṇṇatiparāmasanasabhāvānampi taṇhādīnaṃ sādhāraṇena ārammaṇaparikappanākārena pavatti maññanāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tīhi maññanāhi maññatī’’tiādi. Assāti puthujjanassa, udayabbayānupassanādīsu viya sukhumanayenapi maññanāpavatti atthīti vibhāvanasukhatāya thūlaṃyeva taṃ dassetukāmo ‘‘oḷārikanayenā’’tiāha. Oḷārike hi vibhāge dassite sukhumavibhāvanā sukarāti dassetuṃ ayamatthayojanā vuccatīti sambandho. Ajjhattikāti indriyabaddhā sattasantānapariyāpannā niyakajjhattā vuttā vibhaṅge paṭisambhidāmagge ca.
在《分别》中,指《界分别》(《分别》173)。“外在的”,指不与根相连、属于行相续的。“硬”,就是坚硬的。“粗”,就是粗糙的。“硬性”,就是硬的状态。“硬性”,就是硬的本质。“在外”,指相对于与根相连者而成为外在的。“未执取”,就是未执取的。“铁”,指黑铁。“金属”有四种:天然金属、异种金属、人造金属、鬼类金属。其中,铁、银、金、锡、铅、铜、钻石金属,这七种叫天然金属。龙鼻金属,叫异种金属。青铜、圆金属、黄铜,这三种叫人造金属。孔雀颈金属、薄金属、污金属、易动金属、碎片金属、赤色金属、食物金属、劣金属,这八种叫鬼类金属。在这些当中,所谓的钻石金属,是一种能切断一切金属的金属种类。正因为它能切割、能斩断,所以叫“能切割者”。“能切割者”就是钻石金属。龙鼻金属,看起来像金属,其实是金属的异种,就像姜黄等是异种一样。正因为它以金属的形态、像金属杂质那样坚固地凝聚而存在,但一旦加热锤打,就碎裂散开,既不柔软、不光滑,也不堪使用。把锡和铜混合制成的,叫青铜。把铅和铜混合制成的,叫圆金属。把锌和铜混合制成的,叫黄铜。正因为是由这种制作方式产生的,所以叫人造金属。至于纯粹从矿渣中流出的,有人也叫它“黄铜”。那在这里并不是所指的;这里说的“人造”,是指把上面所说的混合金属配合起来而说的。孔雀颈金属等,就是如此得名的。在这些当中,因为五种天然金属已经在经文中单独列出,所以除了这五种之外,其余一切包括钻石金属在内,在这里都应理解为“金属”。巴利
Vibhaṅgeti dhātuvibhaṅge (vibha. 173). Bāhirāti anindriyabaddhā saṅkhārasantānapariyāpannā. Kakkhaḷanti thaddhaṃ. Kharigatanti pharusaṃ. Kakkhaḷabhāvo kakkhaḷattaṃ. Kakkhaḷabhāvoti kakkhaḷasabhāvo. Bahiddhāti indriyabaddhato bahiddhābhūtaṃ. Anupādinnanti na upādinnaṃ. Ayoti kāḷalohaṃ. Lohanti jātilohaṃ vijātilohaṃ kittimalohaṃ pisācalohanti catubbidhaṃ. Tattha ayo sajjhu suvaṇṇaṃ tipu sīsaṃ tambalohaṃ vekantakalohanti imāni satta jātilohāni nāma. Nāganāsikālohaṃ vijātilohaṃ nāma. Kaṃsalohaṃ vaṭṭalohaṃ ārakuṭanti tīṇi kittimalohāni nāma. Morakkhakaṃ puthukaṃ malinakaṃ capalakaṃ salakaṃ āṭalaṃ bhattakaṃ dusilohanti aṭṭha pisācalohāni nāma. Tesu vekantakalohaṃ nāma sabbalohacchedanasamatthā ekā lohajāti. Tathā hi taṃ vikantati chindatīti vikantakanti vuccati. Vikantakameva vekantakaṃ. Nāganāsikālohaṃ lohasadisaṃ lohavijāti haliddādivijāti viya. Tathā hi taṃ lohākāraṃ lohamalaṃ viya ghanasaṃhataṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati, tāpetvā tāḷitaṃ pana bhinnaṃ bhinnaṃ hutvā visarati mudu maṭṭhaṃ kammaniyaṃ vā na hoti. Tiputambe missetvā kataṃ kaṃsalohaṃ. Sīsatambe missetvā kataṃ vaṭṭalohaṃ. Jasatambe missetvā kataṃ ārakuṭaṃ. Teneva taṃ karaṇena nibbattattā kittimalohanti vuccati. Yaṃ pana kevalaṃ rasakadhātu viniggataṃ, taṃ ‘‘pittala’’ntipi vadanti. Taṃ idha nādhippetaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ missakameva katvā yojitaṃ kittimanti vuttaṃ. Morakkhakādīni evaṃnāmānevetāni. Tesu yasmā pañca jātilohāni pāḷiyaṃ visuṃ vuttāneva, tasmā vekantakalohena saddhiṃ vuttāvasesaṃ sabbaṃ idha lohanti veditabbaṃ.
“锡”就是白锡。“铅”就是黑锡。“银”就是白银。“珍珠”有八种,包括象额所生等。也就是:象额、猪牙、蛇头、雨云之顶、竹、鱼头、螺、贝,这是珍珠的八种来源。其中,象额所生的是黄色,没有光泽。猪牙所生的,颜色就像猪牙一样。蛇头所生的是蓝等颜色,非常纯净,而且圆。雨云所生的是明亮耀眼的,难以看清它的形状,在夜间能破除黑暗,只属于天人所享用。竹所生的是像冰粒一样的颜色,没有光泽,而且那种竹只生长在非人出没的地方。鱼头所生的是像叉尾鲇鱼背一样的颜色,圆而轻,没有光泽,而且那种鱼只生活在大海中央。螺所生的是像螺腹内皮一样的颜色,有的只有枣核那么大,也同样没有光泽。贝所生的则带有种种特殊的光彩,形状也各不相同。这样,从来源上说,这八种珍珠中,鱼、螺、贝所生的是海产;蛇所生的也有一些是海产;其余的就不是海产。因为世间常见的珍珠大多是海产,其中又以贝所生的为主,其余只是偶尔出现,所以《破除迷惑》注疏(《分别》注 173)中说:“珍珠,就是海产的珍珠。”巴利
Tipūti setatipu. Sīsanti kāḷatipu. Sajjhanti rajataṃ. Muttāti hatthikumbhajādikā aṭṭhavidhāpi muttā. Tathā hi hatthikumbhaṃ varāhadāṭhā bhūjaṅgasīsaṃ valāhakūṭaṃ veḷū macchasīro saṅkho sippīti aṭṭha muttāyoniyo. Tattha hatthikumbhajā pītavaṇṇā pabhāhīnā. Varāhadāṭhā varāhadāṭhavaṇṇāva. Bhujaṅgasīsajā nīlādivaṇṇā suvisuddhā vaṭṭalā ca. Valāhakajā bhāsurā dubbibhāgarūpā rattibhāge andhakāraṃ vidhamantiyo tiṭṭhanti, devūpabhogā eva ca honti. Veḷujā karakupalasamānavaṇṇā na bhāsurā, te ca veḷū amanussagocare eva padese jāyanti. Macchasīrajā pāṭhīnapiṭṭhisamānavaṇṇā vaṭṭalā laghavo ca honti pabhāvihīnā, te ca macchā samuddamajjhe eva jāyanti. Saṅkhajā saṅkhodaracchavivaṇṇā kolappamāṇāpi honti pabhāvihīnāva. Sippijā pabhāvisesayuttā honti nānāsaṇṭhānā. Evaṃ jātito aṭṭhavidhāsupi muttāsu yā macchasaṅkhasippijā, tā sāmuddikā honti, bhujaṅgajāpi kāci sāmuddikā honti, itarā asāmuddikā. Yasmā bahulaṃ sāmuddikāva muttā loke dissanti, tatthāpi sippijāva, itarā kādācikā. Tasmā sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 173) ‘‘muttāti sāmuddikā muttā’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓“宝”,是指除了巴利经典中已经提到的琉璃等之外,其余像发光宝石之类的各种类别,全都是宝。琉璃,就是颜色像竹子那样的宝。螺,就是海螺。石,有黑石、黄石、白石等不同,一共八种石。银,就是钱币之类以及其余被公认为银的东西。金,就是黄金。红宝石,就是红色的宝。猫眼石,就是有斑纹的杂色宝。棕榈、椰子等,凡是像草一样从外面承载东西的,也都叫作草。金合欢木等内部坚实的,哪怕只是一块木料,也都叫作木。从绿豆那么大到一把那么大的石子,叫作砂砾。从绿豆那么大以下,叫作沙。陶片,就是陶器的碎片。地,就是带着一切组成物的土地。石头,从大到不能握在手里开始,一直到像大象那么大的,叫作石头;从像大象那么大再往上,就叫作山。以上就是对铁等类别的详细区分。相之地,就是作为观想标记的地遍。那个也被称为“外在地”,因为经中说:“与色界第四禅相应的善、异熟、唯作,以及第四禅的异熟,这些法是外所缘。”因此说“取那在内所缘三法中的相之地”。在这里,取相也应该理解为属于那一类;而在相生起之前,只是通过取地就已经取到了。巴利
Maṇīti ṭhapetvā pāḷiāgate veḷuriyādike seso jotirasādibhedo sabbopi maṇi. Veḷuriyanti vaṃsavaṇṇamaṇi. Saṅkhoti sāmuddikasaṅkho. Silāti kāḷasilā paṇḍusilā setasilādibhedā aṭṭhapi silā. Rajatanti kahāpaṇādikaṃ vuttāvasesaṃ rajatasammataṃ. Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Lohitaṅgoti rattamaṇi. Masāragallanti kabaramaṇi tiṇādīsu bahibhārā tālanāḷikerādayopi tiṇaṃ nāma. Antosāraṃ khadirādi antamaso dārukhaṇḍampi kaṭṭhaṃ nāma. Muggamattato yāva muṭṭhippamāṇā marumbā sakkharā nāma. Muggamattato paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā vālikā nāma. Kaṭhalanti kapālakhaṇḍaṃ. Bhūmīti sasambhārapathavī. Pāsāṇoti antomuṭṭhiyaṃ asaṇṭhahanato paṭṭhāya yāva hatthippamāṇaṃ pāsāṇaṃ, hatthippamāṇato pana paṭṭhāya upari pabbatoti. Ayaṃ ayoādīsu vibhāganiddeso. Nimittapathavīti paṭibhāganimittabhūtaṃ pathavikasiṇaṃ. Tampi hi ‘‘rūpāvacaratikacatukkajjhānaṃ kusalato ca vipākato ca kiriyato ca catutthassa jhānassa vipāko ime dhammā bahiddhārammaṇā’’ti vacanato ‘‘bāhirā pathavī’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yā ca ajjhattārammaṇattike nimittapathavī, taṃ gahetvā’’ti. Uggahanimittañcettha taṃgatikameva daṭṭhabbaṃ, nimittuppattito pana pubbe bhūmiggahaṇeneva gahitanti.
对于“以三种认为”这句话,为了简要说明这三种认为在自他相续中的对应方式,就说了“我是地”等话。其中,“我是地”等说法,是针对内在所缘,显示“见的认为”和“慢的认为”,因为它们表明了执取自我和生起我慢。“地是我的”这句话,则显示“贪的认为”,或者也包含“慢的认为”,因为对于所执取的地,也能从“殊胜”等角度生起慢心。剩下两句也应按这个道理来了知其中认为的分别。在这里,一个证得地遍禅那的人,用禅那之眼执取禅相,坚执它为“我”,又从殊胜等方面加以认定,从意义上就叫做“我是地”的认为。如果执取为“这就是我的我”,那就叫做“地是我的”的认为。同样,如果把这所缘说成“他人”或“天人”,或者依某种理论执取为“这就是他人的我”,那就叫做“地是他人”“地是他人所有”的认为。按这个方式,对其余的地等也应相应地确定这四种。巴利
Tīhi maññanāhīti vuttaṃ maññanāttayaṃ saparasantānesu saṅkhepato yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ahaṃ pathavī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ahaṃ pathavītiādīnā ajjhattavisayaṃ diṭṭhimaññanaṃ mānamaññanañca dasseti attābhinivesāhaṃkāradīpanato. Mama pathavīti iminā taṇhāmaññanaṃ mānamaññanampi vā pariggahabhūtāyapi pathaviyā seyyādito mānajappanato. Sesapadadvayepi iminānayena maññanāvibhāgo veditabbo. Tattha pathavikasiṇajjhānalābhī jhānacakkhunā gahitajhānārammaṇaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti abhinivisanto tañca seyyādito dahanto atthato ‘‘ahaṃ pathavī’’ti maññati nāma, tameva ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ attā’’ti gahaṇe pana ‘‘mama pathavī’’ti maññati nāma. Tathā taṃ ‘‘parapuriso’’ti vā ‘‘devo’’ti vā vādavasena ‘‘ayameva paresaṃ attā’’ti vā abhinivisanto ‘‘paro pathavī, parassa pathavī’’ti maññati nāma. Iminā nayena sesapathavīsupi yathārahaṃ catukkaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ.
像这样,先用四种方式说明了“认为地”当中的“认为”,现在为了分析认为的所依和认为本身,并展示它种种不同的认为方式,就说了“或者”等话。其中,“此”指的是前面所说的凡夫。“欲贪”就是强烈的贪染。“爱乐”就是贪求、享受,比如心里想“这些头发柔软、光滑、卷曲、乌黑亮丽”,从而品味其中的滋味。“欢喜”就是带着喜悦的渴爱,正面地欢喜、雀跃。“赞叹”就是心中生起渴爱和欢喜的冲动,控制不住,脱口说出“啊,我的头真好!”之类的话。“执取而住”就是以强力的渴爱执取,犹如吞没,确定之后便安住其中。“或者其他贪染处”就是从头发等开始的其他任何一种,即手、脚等种种差别,属于自身之内、作为贪生起之因的事物。“如此”就是以此等柔软等行相,执取所希求之相。“他引来喜”就是于那些未来的头发等之中,视为已成就,而引来喜与贪。“他立志”就是安立愿望。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti ettha catukkavasena maññanaṃ dassetvā idāni maññanāvatthuṃ maññanāyo ca vibhajitvā anekavihitaṃ tassa maññanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ayanti yathāvutto puthujjano. Chandarāganti bahalarāgaṃ. Assādetīti nikāmeti, ‘‘ime kesā mudusiniddhakuñcitanīlobhāsā’’tiādinā tattha rasaṃ vindati. Abhinandatīti sappītikāya taṇhāya abhimukho nandati pamodati. Abhivadatīti uppannaṃ taṇhābhinandanāvegaṃ hadayena sandhāretuṃ asakkonto ‘‘aho me kesā’’ti vācaṃ nicchāreti. Ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti balavataṇhābhinivesena gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvā tiṭṭhati. Aññataraṃ vā pana rajjanīyavatthunti kesādito aññataraṃ vā karacaraṇādippabhedaṃ niyakajjhattapariyāpannaṃ rāguppattihetubhūtaṃ vatthuṃ. Itīti iminā siniddhādippakārenāti patthayitabbākāraṃ parāmasati. Tattha nandiṃ samannānetīti tesu bhāvīsu kesādīsu siddhaṃ viya katvā nandiṃ taṇhaṃ samannāharati samupacāreti. Paṇidahatīti patthanaṃ ṭhapeti.
依靠成就,就生起“我比别人优胜”的慢;依靠失败,就生起“我比别人低劣”的慢——这就是这里的关联。头发等是地界的组成部分,依这些部分的成就与失败而生起的慢的分别,就是对地的认为。因此说:“像这样,对于内在的地,以慢的认为而认为。”因为离开了部分就没有整体,所以对整体“命”的执著也会落到部分上。为了说明这一点,就说:“然而,按照‘那命就是那身’这个经句的套路,有人执著头发是‘命’。”再者,像“这些头发是主宰者所造、依附于生主、是微尘的积聚、是本性的转变”等等说法,应当知道在这里就是见的认为。巴利
Sampattiṃ nissāya ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’ti, vipattiṃ nissāya ‘‘hīnohamasmī’’ti mānaṃ janetīti yojanā. Pathavīkoṭṭhāsabhūtānaṃ kesādīnaṃ sampattivipattīhi mānajappanā pathaviyā maññanā hotīti āha ‘‘evaṃ ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ mānamaññanāya maññatī’’ti. Avayavabyatirekena samudāyassa abhāvato samudāyo jīvābhiniveso avayavepi hotīti dassento ‘‘taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti āgatanayena pana kesaṃ ‘jīvo’ti abhinivisatī’’ti āha. ‘‘Kesā nāmete issaravihitā pajāpatinissitā aṇusañcayo pakatipariṇāmo’’tiādinā nayenapettha diṭṭhimaññanā veditabbā.
对于这转起,是指对爱、慢、见的彻底耗尽与连根拔除的转起。虽然通过“这是我的”等说法也显示了三种认为都可能产生,但由于渴爱、慢的认为在前面已经讲过,所以这里应当知道,是特别把见的认为拿出来说。因此说:“同样地,对于内在地界,以见的认为而认为。”巴利
Imissā pavattiyāti nikantimānadiṭṭhīnaṃ pariyādānasamugghāṭappavattiyā. ‘‘Etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā yadipi tissannampi maññanānaṃ sambhavo dassito. Taṇhāmānamaññanānaṃ pana heṭṭhā dassitattā diṭṭhimaññanā evettha visesato uddhaṭāti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evampi ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatī’’ti.
对于外界的地界,也是以三种认为而认为——这是句义的连接方式。为了说明那种认为的方式,所以说了“如何”。它的含义应当依照前面所说的方法来理解。巴利
Bāhirampi pathaviṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññatīti yojanā. Taṃ pana maññanāvidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’nti āha. Tassattho heṭṭhā vuttanayena veditabbo.
有人把这块黑铁死死执著为“命就是我”,就像某些尼干陀一样。这样,对于外部的地界,他以见解、臆想的方式来臆想。这里也应当按“凡是内部的地界,以及外部的地界”这样的方式引出来说明。巴利
Ayaṃjīvoti ayaṃ kāḷalohaṃ ‘‘jīvo attā’’ti abhinivisati ekacce nigaṇṭhā viya. Evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti etthāpi ‘‘yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu, yā ca bāhirā pathavīdhātū’’tiādinā nayena ānetvā vattabbo.
在“把地遍看作我”等地方,该说明的内容前面已经讲过了。这个解释方式也应该理解为已经包含在“把色看作我”这句话里,因为遍也属于假名为色的范畴。在“认为地”这里,前面已经说过关于所认为的对象与认为本身的详细解释方式,接下来也会按照同样的方式来说明,所以说“接下来我只简略地讲”,意思是:若非如此,则也将详细地讲。巴利
Pathavīkasiṇaṃ attato samanupassatītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Ayampi ca nayo ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti ettheva antogadhoti daṭṭhabbo kasiṇānampi rūpasamaññāsambhāvato. Pathaviṃ maññatīti ettha yādiso maññanāvatthumaññanānaṃ vitthāranayo vutto, tādiso ito paraṃ vuttanayovāti āha ‘‘ito paraṃ saṅkhepeneva kathayissāmā’’ti, atādiso pana vitthāratopi kathayissatīti attho.
因此,所谓“因此”,是因为“于地”这个词是依处格;所以,他是以自身、他人及两者的资具的所依性,来安立那个执取的立足处,这就是它的意思。因此论中说“我于地”等。有人问:被根系缚的和不被根系缚的诸法相续,其带着附属物的地不就是依止处吗?而另一种地则是所缘依止,是取它为所缘的心的所缘依止,这两者之间难道有矛盾吗?回答说:没有矛盾,因为他是以“依止”的方式在构想那个执取的立足处。也就是说,这个人把由“我”的见执取和慢执取所构成的自身,以地作为亲近的依止,从而执取“我于地”;又把由渴爱执取所构成的资具,以地作为亲近的依止,从而执取“我的所有物、我的障碍是在地上”。对于“他人”等处,也应当按这个方式来理解其含义。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā ‘‘pathaviyā’’ti idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, tasmā, so attaparattadupakaraṇānaṃ ādhārabhāvena taṃ maññanāvatthuṃ kappetīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ahaṃ pathaviyā’’tiādi. Nanu ca indriyabaddhānindriyabaddhapabhedassa dhammappabandhassa sasambhārapathavī ca ādhāranissayo, itarā ārammaṇanissayo tadārammaṇassāti ettha nibbirodhoti? Na, maññanāvatthuṃ nissayabhāvena parikappanato. Ayañhi ‘‘aha’’nti diṭṭhimaññanāya mānamaññanāya ca vatthubhūtassa attano pathavisannissayaṃ katvā ‘‘ahaṃ pathaviyā’’ti maññati, taṇhāmaññanāya vatthubhūtassa upakaraṇassa pathaviṃ sannissayaṃ katvā ‘‘mayhaṃ kiñcanaṃ palibodho pathaviyā’’ti maññati. Parotiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
“这是义理脉络”说的是关联。《无碍解道》里已经讲过。所谓“正是依照这个脉络”,意思是:像“而那个我,在这个色当中”这样,显示整体作为依托等等的义理脉络,就是依照这个脉络来讲的。因为离开了各个部分,整体是找不到的,所以在整体上讲过的规则,在部分上也能成立——这就是要表达的意思。因此说“而那个我,在这地当中,他这样认为”。在“就在那同一个我当中”这里,“在他当中”指的是凡夫。“就在那同一个我当中”,是指对内在和外在的地所依止的那个我。这是对“认为地”这一句的注释。这样,在“认为地”这里,先就自我方面显示了见、慢、渴爱三种认为,现在为了就他人方面来显示,所以说了“然而当……”等等。其中“在他当中”指他人。“那时”指依他人而起的认为。在那里只有“见认为”才说得通,因为常执等等倾向在那里会出现。通过这个限定词,排除了慢认为和渴爱认为。因为以“我更好”等等方式生起的慢,以及以“我的”为生起特征的渴爱,并不是在他人被执为他人所有物时才会生起——这就是要表达的意思。“其余的也是”,是说慢认为和渴爱认为也是(被排除的)。注疏师们是这样主张的。因为他人也会依止于地,把成就、自在等等安立并希求为“我更好”等,心朝向那种状态,所以慢认为和渴爱认为也能生起——这是注疏师们的意思。在“他人之地是他人之地”这里,这两种情况也应当根据意图来确定。巴利
Yvāyaṃ atthanayoti sambandho. Vutto paṭisambhidāmagge. Eteneva nayenāti yvāyaṃ ‘‘so kho pana me attā imasmiṃ rūpe’’ti samudāyassa ādhārabhāvadīpano atthanayo vutto, eteneva nayena. Na hi avayavabyatirekena samudāyo labbhati, tasmā samudāye vuttavidhi avayavepi labbhatīti adhippāyo. Tenāha so kho pana me ayaṃ attā imissā pathaviyāti maññantoti. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attanīti ettha assāti puthujjanassa. Tasmiṃyeva attanīti ajjhattikabāhirapathavīsannissaye attani. ‘‘Pathaviyā maññatī’’ti padassāyaṃ vaṇṇanā. Evaṃ ‘‘pathaviyā maññatī’’ti ettha attavasena diṭṭhimānataṇhāmaññanaṃ dassetvā idāni paravasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yadā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha assāti parassa. Tadāti paravasena maññanāyaṃ. Diṭṭhimaññanā eva yujjati tattha niccābhinivesādayo sambhavantīti katvā. Avadhāraṇena mānataṇhāmaññanā nivatteti. Na hi ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā, ‘‘mayha’’nti ca pavattalakkhaṇā mānataṇhā parasmiṃ parassa santakabhāvena gahite ca pavattantīti adhippāyo. Itarāyopīti mānataṇhāmaññanāyopi. Icchanti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Parassapi hi pathavīsannissayena sampattiissariyādikassa vasena attani seyyādibhāvaṃ dahato paṇidahato ca cittaṃ tathābhāvāya mānataṇhāmaññanā sambhavantīti ācariyānaṃ adhippāyo. ‘‘Paro pathavī parassa pathavī’’ti etthāpi ime dve pakārā sādhippāyā niddhāretabbā.
对于“从地而知”和“从最初”等说法,即使不是表示离开的格,“to”这个音节也被认为是离格,所以说“pathavīto是离格语”。“具有资具的”,是指属于金银的,以及有奴仆等资具伴随的,或者是自己或他人的那些资具,这就是它的意思。“如所说的分类”,是指按照相、内等已经说过的类别来区分。“生起或者流出”:就是依据“那个卵是金所成,梵天神从中自己生起”这样的梵世说,或者依据“两个微尘合成双微尘”这样转起的微尘说,认为是从地生起;又或者依据“一切世间都从自在天流出”的自在天说,认为是从自在天的创造中流出了地,应该这样搭配理解;或者认为从地而有其他能作的我,这就是其意图。在这里,前一种义解中离格具有作者的特征,后一种义解中则应看作具有从句的特征。对于从自己所拥有的地中获得快乐,并由此把自己安立为胜于他人的人,应当知道这是渴爱和慢的认为。“其他”,是指那些根本略说的论师们。“执取其他无量的我”,就是依照先前修习而生起的无量遍的方式,或者依照迦毗罗等见地,执取一个无量、周遍的我。“从地”,是指后来未加修习、未得增长的地遍所谓的地。“于外也有我”,就是由此地之外也有我,这就是其意图。巴利
‘‘Pathavito sañjānātī’’ti, ‘‘ādito’’ti ca ādīsu anissakkavacanepi to-saddo diṭṭhoti āha ‘‘pathavitoti nissakkavacana’’nti. Saupakaraṇassāti hiraññasuvaṇṇagatassa dāsaporisādinā vittupakaraṇena saupakaraṇassa, attano vā parassa vā tesaṃ upakaraṇassa vāti attho. Yathāvuttappabhedatoti lakkhaṇādiajjhattikādivuttappakāravibhāgato. Uppattiṃ vā niggamanaṃ vāti ‘‘taṃ aṇḍaṃ ahosi hemamayaṃ, tasmiṃ sayaṃ brahmā uppanno’’ti brahmaṇḍavādavasena vā ‘‘dvīhi aṇūhi dviaṇuka’’nti evaṃ pavattaaṇukavādavasena vā pathavito uppattiṃ vā ‘‘sabboyaṃ loko issarato viniggato’’ti issaravādavasena issarakuttato pathavito niggamanaṃ vā maññamānoti yojanā. Pathavito vā añño āpādiko attāti adhippāyo. Ettha ca purimasmiṃ atthavikappe kārakalakkhaṇaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ, dutiyasmiṃ upapadalakkhaṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Attano pariggahabhūtapathavito sukhappattiṃ tato eva ca parehi seyyādibhāvaṃ kappentassa vasenapettha taṇhāmānamaññanā veditabbā. Apareti sārasamāsācariyā. Tato aññaṃ appamāṇaṃ attānaṃ gahetvāti pubbe bhāvitaāpādiappamāṇakasiṇavasena vā kāpilakāṇādadiṭṭhivasena vā appamāṇaṃ byāpinaṃ attānaṃ gahetvā. Pathavitoti pacchā abhāvitaavaḍḍhitapathavīkasiṇasaṅkhātapathavito. Bahiddhāpi me attāti ito pathavito bahipi me attāti adhippāyo.
“完全”就是一点不剩。他以渴爱把大地执为己有;这个道理也适用于住在四大洲的转轮王,同样适用于地方小王、大臣、长者等人,因为他们也会按照各自执取的范围,毫无遗漏地生起这种认为。对于“这是我的”这种执取,由于它远离了“这是我、这是我的自我”那种执取,所以说“只有一种渴爱的认为存在”。为了说明前面所说的道理,接着说了“而此……”等话。其中“而此”是指这种渴爱的认为也应当结合起来理解。就像人在见的认为所认为的对象上生起贪爱和傲慢,因而产生渴爱与我慢之认为;同样,当人由渴爱的认为所认为的对象把自己安立为更殊胜等,并把它执为我所、执为恒常,还把自己设想为它的拥有者时,其他的认为也会产生,这就可以理解了。因为通过“我的”这一执取方式,就已经显示了我所的关联。巴利
Kevalanti anavasesaṃ. Mahāpathaviṃ taṇhāvasena mamāyati, ayañca nayo catudīpissariye ṭhitassa dīpacakkavattino ca labbheyya, maṇḍalikarājamahāmattakuṭumbikānampi vasena labbhateva tesampi yathāpariggahaṃ anavasesetvā maññanāya sambhavato. ‘‘Evaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa ‘‘esohamasmiṃ, eso me attā’’ti gāhavidhūratāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ekā taṇhāmaññanā eva labbhatī’’ti . Iminā nayenāti vuttamatidesaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘sā cāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sā cāyanti sā ca ayaṃ taṇhāmaññanā yojetabbāti sambandho. Yathā pana diṭṭhimaññanāmaññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanā sambhavanti, evaṃ taṇhāmaññanāmaññitena vatthunā attānaṃ seyyādito dahato tañca attaniyaṃ niccaṃ tathā taṃsāmibhūtaṃ attānañca parikappentassa itaramaññanāpi sambhavantīti sakkā viññātuṃ. ‘‘Me’’ti hi iminā atthaggahaṇamukheneva attaniyasambandho pakāsīyatīti.
“欢喜”这个词,因为在这里统摄了渴爱、邪见和执著这三种,为了显示它们,所以接着说“且喜贪、执取”。应当知道,这两者(渴爱与邪见)的现行,从与邪见不相应的心生起的角度来说,是不混杂的;或者,即使在同一个心生起时,也像增上法那样,依靠过去加行的力量,以各自强盛的方式现行。“于此义”:就是依渴爱与邪见而欢喜的意义。“此”:就是“欢喜地”这一句。对那些应受调伏的众生,如果通过某些分类差别来阐明诸法,能使他们获得殊胜的证悟,就为他们用这些分类差别来阐明法。然而,对那些只要用一种分类阐明法就能获得殊胜证悟的人,也为他们说了那种分类之后,由于法自在的缘故,进一步阐明其余一切无余的分类,这是说法的善巧。因此说:“先依认为显示烦恼的生起,现在依欢喜来显示。”“法界”:指正等觉。因为它如实持受、审察一切所知法,又持受一切名为应调伏众生的法相续,使其不堕入恶趣苦和轮回苦,自身又以不错乱的现行相为界,所以这里所说的“法界”就是指正等觉。因为一切智智以道智为所依,道智以一切智智为所依,这就是正等觉。“由于善通达”:即善通达的状态,意思是正确证得。依欲求、执取、执著的作用,于所缘上生起计度分别,这就是认为。其中,“我的”“我”这样的执取计度,就是执著。由此产生联结,这就是欢喜——这是它们之间的区别。只有不与经等相违的自己的主张才应被接受,其他的则不应接受。为了通过经来显示这种统摄,说了“经中亦说”等语。而说法善巧的阐明,则应从有因、有因相应、有结等分类的说法中来确定。巴利
Abhinandatīti iminā taṇhādiṭṭhābhinivesānaṃ saṅgahitattā te dassento ‘‘assādeti parāmasati cā’’ti āha. Diṭṭhivippayuttacittuppādavasena cetassa dvayassa asaṅkarato pavatti veditabbā, ekacittuppādepi vā adhipatidhammānaṃ viya pubbābhisaṅkhāravasena tassa tassa balavabhāvena pavatti. Etasmiṃ attheti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinandanatthe. Etanti ‘‘pathaviṃ abhinandatī’’ti etaṃ padaṃ. Yesaṃ vineyyānaṃ yehi pakāravisesehi dhammānaṃ vibhāvane kate visesādhigamo hoti, tesaṃ tehi pakāravisesehi dhammavibhāvanaṃ. Yesaṃ pana yena ekeneva pakārena dhammavibhāvane kate visesādhigamo hoti, tesampi taṃ vatvā dhammissaratāya tadaññaniravasesappakāravibhāvanañca desanāvilāso. Tenāha ‘‘pubbe maññanāvasena kilesuppattiṃ dassetvā idāni abhinandanāvasena dassento’’ti. Dhammadhātuyāti sammāsambodhiyā. Sā hi sabbañeyyadhammaṃ yathāsabhāvato dhāreti upadhāreti, sakalañca vineyyasattasaṅkhātadhammappabandhaṃ apāyadukkhasaṃsāradukkhapatanato dhāreti, sayañca aviparītapavattiākārā dhātūti dhammadhātūti idhādhippetā. Sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ sammāsambodhīti. Suppaṭividdhattāti suṭṭhu paṭividdhabhāvato, sammā adhigatattāti attho. Abhikaṅkhanasampaggahaparāmasanānaṃ vasena ārammaṇe parikappanāpavatti maññanā. Tattha ‘‘mamaṃ, aha’’nti ca abhinivesanaṃ parikappanaṃ. Yena ajjhosānaṃ hoti, ayaṃ abhinandanāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Suttādiaviruddhāyeva attanomati icchitabbā, na itarāti suttena tassā saṅgahaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Desanāvilāsavibhāvanassa pana sahetukahetusampayuttadukādidesanāya nibaddhatā niddhāretabbā.
“Tassā”的意思是“由彼”。因为和已知的词有语法关联,这里的“Tassā”是表示行为者的属格形式。“因此”的意思是“由于未遍知”。以否定的方式说出的“未遍知”,实际上指的是遍知,从意义上说遍知有三种。为了从它自身的特相和生起的方式两方面来说明这一点,所以说了“若……”等话。巴利
Tassāti tena. Ñātasaddasambandhena hetaṃ kattari sāmivacanaṃ. Tasmāti apariññātattā. ‘‘Apariññāta’’nti paṭikkhepamukhena yaṃ parijānanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ atthato tividhā pariññā hotīti taṃ sarūpato pavattiākārato ca vibhāvento ‘‘yo hī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,通过那种智慧来遍知、界定观的领域,那就是知遍知。因为它把三界所生的法,以“这是观的领域”而知道、明了、显现出来,同时依相、味等以及内在等的区分来界定、了知。但在这里,应当依地界来理解,所以说“遍知地界”等等。度遍知:就是通过审度来遍知的智慧。因为它以无常等行相,对具有无常等自性的五取蕴,通过审度和思惟来界定、了知。以最上道:就是以阿拉汉道。因为那能无余地舍断欲贪。或者,以最上道就是最殊胜的道,也就是出世间道的意思。无论哪种说法,都是在显示:以断除方式舍断的智慧,就是无余的断遍知。巴利
Tattha yāya paññāya vipassanābhūmiṃ parijānāti paricchindati, sā parijānanapaññā ñātapariññā. Sā hi tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ vipassanābhūmī’’ti ñātaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karontīyeva lakkhaṇarasādito ajjhattikādivibhāgato ca paricchijja jānāti. Idha pana pathavīdhātuvasena veditabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavīdhātuṃ parijānātī’’tiādi. Tīraṇapariññāti kīraṇavasena parijānanakapaññā. Sā hi parivārehi aniccatādiākārehi aniccatādisabhāvassa upādānakkhandhapañcakassa tīraṇavasena sammasanavasena taṃ paricchijja jānāti. Aggamaggenāti arahattamaggena. So hi anavasesato chandarāgaṃ pajahati. Aggamaggenāti vā aggabhūtena maggena, lokuttaramaggenāti attho. Ubhayathāpi hi samucchedapahānakārī eva paññā nippariyāyena pahānapariññāti dasseti.
名色的确定:通过这句话,缘的把握也被包含在内,应当这样理解,因为它确定了名色的因。那也确实是通过因缘的方式来确定名色。以观察聚等方式进行的审察遍知,因为是以无常等方式来观察。因此:因为没有那些遍知,所以。或者,因为未遍知,即因为大地未被遍知,所以由于未遍知大地,便想着那块大地并欢喜它。巴利
Nāmarūpavavatthānanti etena paccayapariggahopi saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo nāmarūpassa hetuvavatthānabhāvato. Sopi hi hetupaccayamukhena nāmarūpassa vavatthānamevāti. Kalāpasammasanādivasena tīraṇapariññā aniccādivasena sammasanabhāvato. Tasmāti yasmā tā pariññāyo natthi, tasmā. Atha vā tasmā apariññātattāti yasmā apariññātā pathavī, tasmā apariññātattā pathaviyā taṃ pathaviṃ maññati ca abhinandati cāti.
在这里,“水”这个词,意思是“到达”,或者“使增长”;在某个聚集物中,水自身存在,以黏结的方式遍满而安住,或者有“滋养”的意思。“内”是指对自身;“各别”是指各各对自我。这两者都只是指属于有情相续中的水。在“水、水所成”等表述中,黏结作用本身就是水;因为它达到了水的自性,所以叫“水所成”,意思是达到了水的自性状态。以润滑的方式称为“润”,因为它达到了润滑的自性,所以叫“润所成”。“色的结缚性”是指不可分离的色的结缚状态,意思是以不散开的方式聚合在一起。“取相者”是指:在有边界的水曼陀罗中,随着取相出现,他就这样取着于相。“已说的”是指在“于水”等句中说的水;那是具有积聚物的水,不是“水遍处”里说的水。“其余的”是指阐明所缘假立水的自相,以及解说“于水知水”等经文的含义,和在各处显示对种种想法的分别,都和在地大中说的相同。在那里,是通过“有人认知地遍处”等说法来讲的,这里则应当通过“有人认知水遍处”等说法来讲。在那里说的是“认知为地”,这里则应当说“认知为水”等等,差别就在这里。其余都相同。因此说“和在地大中说的相同”。为了显示这里有什么差别,才说了“唯”等话。其中,“根味”是指依根而产生的味。“干味”等也是同样的道理。“乳”等则是显而易见的。然而,不像药学处那样,这里没有那样的限定。无论什么乳,就是乳。其余的也是同样的道理。“地上的”是指留在坑洼等处的水。“虚空的”是指还没落到地上的雨水,已经落到地上的则就是地上的。像这样说的,以及用“及”字,把前面没有说到的雪水、劫灭水、地上内部的水、保持地界的水等也都包括进来了。巴利
Āpaṃāpatoti ettha appoti, appāyatīti vā āpo, yasmiṃ saṅghāte sayaṃ atthi, taṃ ābandhanavasena byāpetvā tiṭṭhati, paribrūhetīti vā attho. Atthānaṃ adhi ajjhattaṃ. Pati pati attānanti paccattaṃ. Ubhayenapi sattasantānapariyāpannameva vadati. Āpo āpogatantiādīsu ābandhanameva āpo, tadeva āposabhāvaṃ gatattā āpogataṃ, sabhāveneva āpabhāvaṃ pattanti attho. Sinehanavasena sineho, soyeva sinehanasabhāvaṃ gatattā sinehagataṃ. Bandhanattaṃ rūpassāti avinibbhogarūpassa bandhanabhāvo, avippakiraṇavasena sampiṇḍananti attho. Uggaṇhantoti yathāparicchinne āpomaṇḍale yathā uggahanimittaṃ upalabbhati, tathā nimittaṃ gaṇhanto. Vuttoti ‘‘āpasmi’’nti ettha vuttaāpo. So hi sasambhāraāpo, na ‘‘āpokasiṇa’’nti ettha vuttaāpo. Sesanti ārammaṇasammutiāpānaṃ sarūpavibhāvanaṃ. ‘‘Āpaṃ āpato pajānātī’’tiādipāḷiyā atthavibhāvanañceva tattha tattha maññanāvibhāgadassanañca pathaviyaṃ vuttasadisamevāti. Tattha ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānātī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.360; a. ni. 10.25) vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘āpokasiṇameko sañjānātī’’tiādinā vattabbaṃ. Tattha ca ‘‘pathavīti sañjānātī’’ti vuttaṃ, idha pana ‘‘āpoti sañjānātī’’tiādinā vattabbanti evamādi eva viseso. Sesaṃ tādisameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pathaviyaṃ vuttasadisamevā’’ti. Yo panettha viseso, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kevala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mūlarasoti mūlaṃ paṭicca nibbattaraso. Khandharasādīsupi eseva nayo. Khīrādīni pākaṭāneva. Yathā pana bhesajjasikkhāpade (pārā. 618-625), na evamidha niyamo atthi. Yaṃ kiñci khīraṃ khīrameva. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Bhummānīti āvāṭādīsu ṭhitaudakāni. Antalikkhānīti pathaviṃ appattāni vassodakāni, pattāni pana bhummāneva. Evaṃ vuttā cāti ca-saddena himodakakappavināsakaudakapathaviyāantoudakapathavīsandhārakaudakādiṃ pubbe avuttampi samuccinoti.
“以火而知火”:在这里,从燃烧的意义上说,称为火界。所谓燃烧,就是具有焚烧、烹煮等能力的锐利作用,也就是所说的暖热。“由彼”:指由那被扰动起来的火界。“而变热”:这个身体全面发热,因日疟等而变成有热的状态。“由彼而衰老”:依靠那火界,这个身体衰老,达到诸根残缺、体力耗尽、皱纹出现等状态。“由彼而遍烧”:由那被扰动的火界,这个身体到处被烧灼,那人便想着“我被烧灼了”,于是渴望百次炼制的酥油、牛乳、清凉的檀香等涂敷之物,以及棕榈扇的风。“由彼而使所食、所饮、所嚼、所尝得以完全消化”:依靠那火界,所吃的饭等、所喝的饮料等、所嚼的糕饼等、所尝的芒果熟果与蜂蜜糖浆等,真正得到消化,也就是以味道等状态而分离,这是意思。在这里,身体本来正常的热度被超过而变成热,就是热恼;以身体被焚烧的方式而现起的大烧灼,就是遍烧;百次加热后投入水中再取出的酥油,就是百炼酥油;味道、血、肉、脂肪、骨、骨髓、精液等,就是味道等。其中,前三种火界由四因所生,最后一种只由业所生。巴利
Tejaṃ tejatoti ettha tejanaṭṭhena tejo, tejanaṃ nāma dahanapacanādisamatthaṃ nisānaṃ, yaṃ uṇhattanti vuccati. Yena cāti yena tejogatena kupitena. Santappatīti ayaṃ kāyo samantato tappati ekāhikajarādibhāvena usumajāto hoti. Yena ca jīrīyatīti yena ayaṃ kāyo jīrīyati, indriyavekallataṃ balaparikkhayaṃ valitādibhāvañca pāpuṇāti. Yena ca pariḍayhatīti yena kupitena ayaṃ kāyo parito ḍayhati, so ca puggalo ḍayhāmīti satadhotasappigosītacandanādilepañceva tālavaṇṭavātañca paccāsīsati. Yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā pariṇāmaṃ gacchatīti yena asitaṃ vā odanādi, pītaṃ vā pānakādi, khāyitaṃ vā piṭhakhajjakādi, sāyitaṃ vā ambapakkamadhuphāṇitādi sammadeva paripākaṃ gacchati, rasādibhāvena vivekaṃ gacchatīti attho. Ettha ca sarīrassa pakatiusumaṃ atikkamitvā uṇhabhāvo santāpo, sarīradahanavasena pavatto mahādāho paridāho, satavāraṃ tāpetvā udake pakkhipitvā uddhaṭasappi satadhotasappi, rasarudhiramaṃsamedaaṭṭhiaṭṭhimiñjasukkā rasādayo. Tattha purimā tayo tejā catusamuṭṭhānā, pacchimo kammasamuṭṭhānova.
因为已经达到火的状态,所以叫“火所成”。usmā 就是温热的相。因为已经达到温热的状态,所以叫“暖所成”。usuma 就是猛烈的热。那本身就是“usumagata”,意思是依其本性就已经达到了猛热的状态。kaṭṭhaggi 就是以木柴为燃料的火。木片火等等也是同样的道理。saṅkāraggi 就是依靠垃圾而生的火。indaggi 就是闪电火。santāpo 就是火焰的热,或者无焰炽炭的热。sūriyasantāpo 就是阳光的热。kaṭṭhasannicayasantāpo 就是依靠柴堆而生的热。其余的也是同样的道理。所谓“如是所说”,其中的 ca 字,是把没有提到的鬼火、劫坏火、地狱火等等也一并收摄进来。巴利
Tejobhāvaṃ gatattā tejogataṃ. Usmāti uṇhākāro. Usmāva usmābhāvaṃ gatattā usmāgataṃ. Usumanti caṇḍausumaṃ. Tadeva usumagataṃ, sabhāveneva usumabhāvaṃ pattanti attho. Kaṭṭhaggīti kaṭṭhupādāno aggi. Sakalikaggīādīsupi eseva nayo. Saṅkāraggīti kacavaraṃ paṭicca uppannaaggi. Indaggīti asaniaggi. Santāpoti jālāya vā vītaccitaṅgārānaṃ vā santāpo . Sūriyasantāpoti ātapo. Kaṭṭhasannicayasantāpoti kaṭṭharāsiṃ paṭicca uppannasantāpo. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ vuttā cāti. Ca-saddena petaggikappavināsakagginirayaggiādike avuttepi samuccinoti.
在“风与风”这一条里,依推动的意思称为风。这个推动到底是什么?是支撑,或者鼓动;也有人说推动就是移动。上行风:就是引起打嗝、呕吐等向上运行的风。下行风:就是排出大小便等向下运行的风。腹外风:就是肠外的风。腹内风:就是肠内的风。遍行肢节风:就是沿着脉络网遍布全身、引发屈伸等动作的风。刀风:就是像用刀切开关节连接那样运作的风。剃刀风:就是像用剃刀削开、劈开心脏肌肉那样运作的风。拔莲风:就是能把心脏肌肉拔起来的风。入息:就是进入体内的鼻风。出息:就是排出体外的鼻风。在这里,前面所有的风都是四因所生,而入息和出息只是心所生。巴利
Vāyaṃ vāyatoti ettha vāyanaṭṭhena vāyo. Kimidaṃ vāyanaṃ nāma? Vitthambhanaṃ, samudīraṇaṃ vā, vāyanaṃ gamananti eke. Uddhaṅgamā vātāti uggārahikkādipavattakā uddhaṃ ārohanavātā. Adhogamā vātāti uccārapassāvādinīharaṇatā adho orohanavātā. Kucchisayā vātāti antānaṃ bahivātā. Koṭṭhāsayā vātāti antānaṃ antovātā. Aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātāti dhamanījālānusārena sakalasarīre aṅgamaṅgāni anusaṭā samiñjanapasāraṇādinibbattakā vātā . Satthakavātāti sandhibandhanāni kattariyā chindantā viya pavattavātā. Khurakavātāti khurena viya hadayamaṃsachedanaphālanakavātā. Uppalakavātāti hadayamaṃsassa samuppāṭanakavātā. Assāsoti antopavisanakanāsikāvāto. Passāsoti bahinikkhamananāsikāvāto. Ettha ca purimā sabbe catusamuṭṭhānā, assāsapassāsā cittasamuṭṭhānāva.
风所成,就是风本身;依其自性而达到风的状态,这就是它的意思。色的坚硬性,就是不可分离之色的坚硬状态。东方风,就是从东方吹来的风。西方风等也是同样的道理。在有尘等当中,夹杂着灰尘的,叫有尘风;脱离灰尘、清净的,叫无尘风。由寒冷时节所生,或者在冷云之间产生的,是冷风。由炎热时节所生,或者在热云之间产生的,是热风。微小的,是微弱、细薄的风。强烈的,是强劲有力的风。黑色的,是从黑云之间产生的风。也有人说,那种被云或风暴击打之后使肤色变黑的风,就用这个名称。毗蓝风,是在一由旬以上吹动的风。翅风,是连苍蝇等振翅鼓动的风也算在内。金翅鸟风,是金翅鸟鼓动的风。这些虽然也属于翅风,但因为力量特别强盛,所以另外列出。扇子风,是用棕叶或其他材料制成的圆形扇子煽起的风。摇扇风,是用扇叶煽起的风。这些扇子和摇扇,能让还没生起的风产生,也能让已经生起的风转变方向。这里的“ca”字,还把没有提到的持水风、劫坏风、助火蔓延风等也都包括进来了。在这里,“认为水”等说法中,因为可以通过三种认为的方式——“认为我是水”“认为水是我的”等,按照地界部分所说的方式,能够说明认为的分类,所以说“其余如同前述”。因此,应该按照那里所说的方法,在这三个部分中,随其相应之处说明认为的分类。巴利
Vāyogatanti vāyova vāyogataṃ, sabhāveneva vāyobhāvaṃ pattanti attho. Thambhitattaṃ rūpassāti avinibbhogarūpassa thambhitabhāvo. Puratthimā vātāti puratthimadisato āgatā vātā. Pacchimādīsupi eseva nayo. Sarajādīsu saha rajena sarajā, rajavirahitā suddhā arajā. Sītautusamuṭṭhānā, sītavalāhakantare vā jātā sītā. Uṇhautusamuṭṭhānā, uṇhavalāhakantare vā jātā uṇhā. Parittāti mandā tanukavātā. Adhimattāti balavavātā. Kāḷāti kāḷavalāhakantare samuṭṭhitā. Yehi abbhāhato chavivaṇṇo kāḷako hoti, tesaṃ etaṃ adhivacanantipi eke. Verambhavātāti yojanato upari vāyanavātā. Pakkhavātāti antamaso makkhikāyapi pakkhāyūhanavātā. Supaṇṇavātāti garuḷavātā. Kāmaṃ cetepi pakkhavātāva, ussadavasena pana visuṃ gahitā. Tālavaṇṭavātāti tālavaṇṇehi katena, aññehi vā katena kenaci maṇḍalasaṇṭhānena samuṭṭhāpitavātā. Vidhūpanavātāti bījanapattakena samuṭṭhāpitavātā. Imāni ca tālavaṇṭavidhūpanāni anuppannampi vātaṃ uppādenti, uppannampi parivattenti. Idhāpi ca-saddo udakasandhārakavātakappavināsakavātajālāpellanakavātādike avuttepi samuccinoti. Ettha ca ‘‘āpaṃ maññatī’’tiādīsu yasmā tīhi maññanāhi – ‘‘ahaṃ āpoti maññati, mama āpoti maññatī’’tiādinā pathavīvāre vuttanayena sakkā maññanāvibhāgo vibhāvetunti vuttaṃ ‘‘sesaṃ vuttanayamevā’’ti. Tasmā tattha vuttanayānusārena imesu tīsu vāresu yathārahaṃ maññanāvibhāgo vibhāvetabbo.
至此是指以这个量、以这四章为限的教示差别。“ca”这个字表示转折,用它来点明接下来要说的差别。“那个名为特相理趣髁的”——意思是,所谓名为“特相理趣髁”的那个东西。为了说明这个特相理趣髁在经中是怎么说的,就说了“vuttamhi”等话。其中,“在经中,于所说的一法”——就是在善法等或蕴等当中,不管哪一法在经里以同性简别的方式被说到时,那些与所说的法具有相同相的一切法——也就是以善性、色蕴性等而与所说的法具有相同相的一切法——不管在经中有没有明确说出来,都算已经被说到了。意思是,即使经里没有明确提到的那些法,因为具有相同的相,也应该引过来加以解释。巴利
Ettāvatāti ettakena iminā catuvāraparimāṇena desanāvisesena. Ca-saddo byatireko. Tena vakkhamānaṃyeva visesaṃ joteti. Yvāyanti yo ayaṃ lakkhaṇo nāma hāro vuttoti sambandho. So pana lakkhaṇahāro yaṃlakkhaṇo tattha vutto, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttamhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vuttamhi ekadhammeti kusalādīsu khandhādīsu vā yasmiṃ kasmiñci ekadhamme sutte sarūpato niddhāraṇavasena vā kathite. Ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā tenāti ye keci dhammā kusalādibhāvena, rūpakkhandhādibhāvena vā tena vuttadhammena samānalakkhaṇā. Vuttā bhavanti sabbeti sabbepi kusalādisabhāvā, khandhādisabhāvā vā dhammā sutte avuttāpi tāya samānalakkhaṇatāya vuttā bhavanti, ānetvā saṃvaṇṇanavasenāti adhippāyo.
在这里,“同一相”指的是相同的相。因此,即使有些法没有被直接说到,也可以借着它们与已说到的法共同存在、作用相同、因相同、果相同、所缘相同等,像已说到的法那样被识别出来。“如是”就是“以这种方式”。所以他说“在《导论》中,名为特相理趣的如是说”。不过《导论》原文中出现了“凡是同一相的法,那一种诃罗就叫作相”这样的文句。依它来说,就是依这种特相理趣来说。色的相未超越,因为它的自性就是变坏,与变坏的自性相同。这是世尊在说的时候说的。“这些”就是“以色为我而随观”等所说的邪见。在这里应当看到,仅仅通过显示有身见的执取,就已经显示了以一切色为所依的渴爱、慢的执取。正如所说:“然而,就在那以见之执取而执取的事物上,由于生起贪爱和慢,渴爱之执取和慢之执取也应当被了知。”或者,当说“认为地、水、火、风是我的”并且欢喜它时,以所说的同样方式,以一切色为所依的渴爱之执取就已经说了,随顺它的慢之执取也就说了。因此在这里,其他的执取也应当被识别出来。巴利
Ettha ca ekalakkhaṇāti samānalakkhaṇā vuttā. Tena sahacaritā samānakiccatā samānahetutā samānaphalatā samānārammaṇatāti evamādīhipi avuttānaṃ vuttānaṃ viya niddhāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Itīti iminā pakārena. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ nettiyaṃ lakkhaṇo nāma hāro vutto’’ti, nettipāḷiyaṃ (netti. 23) pana ‘‘ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā keci so hāro lakkhaṇo nāmā’’ti pāṭho āgato. Tassa vasenāti tassa lakkhaṇahārassa vasena. Rūpalakkhaṇaṃ anatītattāti ruppanasabhāvena samānasabhāvattā. Vadantena bhagavatā. Etāti ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti evaṃ vuttadiṭṭhī. Ettha ca sakkāyadiṭṭhimaññanādassaneneva sakalarūpavatthukā taṇhāmānamaññanāpi dassitā evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiṃyeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā’’ti. Atha vā pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ meti maññati abhinandatīti ca vadantena vuttanayeneva sakalarūpavatthukā taṇhāmaññanā tadanusārena mānamaññanāpi vuttāva hotīti evampettha itaramaññanāpi niddhāretabbā.
大种分等注释巴利
Bhūtavārādivaṇṇanā
3 通过“认为地、从地认为”等语句,因为已经确定了“以色为我而观察,在色中观察自我”等有身见,所以说道“如此透过色的角度,说了以行为依托的执取”。在那些行中以及在众生中,就是指在那些被执取的众生中。在界中,就是指在地等四界中。“已生、已成、有为”等语句中,bhūta这个词显示的是“生起”的意思;但带上前缀时,在“pabhūtamariyo pakaroti puñña”等语句中是“广大”的意思,在“yebhuyyena bhikkhūnaṃ paribhūtarūpo”等语句中是“伤害”的意思,在“sambhūto sāṇavāsī”等语句中是“施设”的意思,在“abhibhūto māro vijito saṅgāmo”等语句中是“摧伏”的意思,在“parābhūtarūpo kho ayaṃ acelo pāthikaputto”等语句中是“败北”的意思,在“anubhūtaṃ sukhadukkha”等语句中是“感受”的意思,在“vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ paññāyā”等语句中是“使明显”的意思。这些全都见于树木等事物中。应当知道,它们都被“等”这个字所涵盖。“Kālo ghasati bhūtāni”“bhūtā loke samussaya”等语句中,bhūta这个词也泛指众生;但由于后面用“天”等词已经涵盖了各类特定的众生,所以这里用bhūta一词来指代剩余的那些众生,因此说“但不是泛指的”。正因如此,才说“四大王天以下的众生,在这里被称为bhūta”。因为凡是众生类中,胎生圆满、能够以四种生起方式受生的,在这里都用bhūta这个名称,因为他们是依卵生等方式而存在的。巴利
3. ‘‘Pathaviṃ maññati, pathaviyā maññatī’’tiādīhi padehi ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ samanupassatī’’tiādīnaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhīnaṃ niddhāritattā vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ rūpamukhena saṅkhāravatthukaṃ maññanaṃ vatvā’’ti . Tesu saṅkhāresu sattesupīti tadupādānesupi sattesu . Dhātūsūti pathavīādīsu catūsu dhātūsu. ‘‘Jātaṃ bhūtaṃ saṅkhata’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.207; saṃ. ni. 5.379) bhūta-saddo uppāde dissati, saupasaggo pana ‘‘pabhūtamariyo pakaroti puñña’’ntiādīsu vipule, ‘‘yebhuyyena bhikkhūnaṃ paribhūtarūpo’’tiādīsu hiṃsane, ‘‘sambhūto sāṇavāsī’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 450) paññattiyaṃ, ‘‘abhibhūto māro vijito saṅgāmo’’tiādīsu vimathane, ‘‘parābhūtarūpo kho ayaṃ acelo pāthikaputto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.23, 25, 31, 32) parājaye, ‘‘anubhūtaṃ sukhadukkha’’ntiādīsu vediyane, ‘‘vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ paññāyā’’tiādīsu pākaṭīkaraṇe dissati. Te sabbe rukkhādīsūti. Ādi-saddena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Kālo ghasati bhūtānīti (jā. 1.2.190), bhūtā loke samussaya’’nti (dī. ni. 2.220; saṃ. ni. 1.186) ca ādīsu avisesena sattavācakopi bhūtasaddo, upari devādipadehi sattavisesānaṃ gahitattā idha tadavasiṭṭhā bhūtasaddena gayhantīti āha ‘‘no ca kho avisesenā’’ti. Tenevāha – ‘‘cātumahārājikānañhi heṭṭhā sattā idha bhūtāti adhippetā’’ti. Yo hi sattanikāyo paripuṇṇayoniko catūhipi yonīhi nibbattanāraho, tatthāyaṃ bhūtasamaññā aṇḍajādivasena bhavanato.
“bhūta”就是指前面已经说明过的那些bhūta。而“从bhūta而认知”这一句,是取世间通行的“bhūta”这个说法,用来说明:就像在那里会生起渴爱等妄想那样,这里是以颠倒想的方式去认知。这个意思按照前面“从地而认知”那里所说的方式就可以了解,所以说“即如前所说之理”。就像净居天因为永远不存在而不被这个教说所摄,地狱众生也一样,因为他们不是一切妄想的所依。由此也可以知道,有一部分饿鬼等也不被摄在这里面。不过另有一些论师说:“因为以见妄想为所依,所以他们也应该被摄在内。”这是依照经中“具足而受用”等说法来讲的。
“染著”:因为以“这是清净、这是快乐”的颠倒执取,而对那里生起贪爱。这里不只是以眼见的方式染著,也以耳闻等方式染著,所以经文说“见已……乃至……觉已”。其中,以嗅等方式的染著,应当理解为:通过回忆那些曾经体验过的香、花鬘等,以及通过受用那些不合意的事物,随着自己的体验而忆念。
如此,对bhūta以渴爱妄想而“认为”,也就是按照前面所说的方式,对bhūta缘起欲贪,享受它们的实践,欢喜、赞叹、执取而安住,或者以“这样的状态愿我未来也有”等方式在那里随喜,这就是“对bhūta以渴爱妄想而认为”的意思。
“未获得的刹帝利大富长者等状态”,以及“圆满与衰败”,是指按出身而分的高下。“Dahati”就是安立的意思。“Yo evarūpo māno”就是指这种生起的慢:“这个人过去和我一样,现在这个人更胜,这个人更低。”这叫作“慢过慢”。意思是说,这就像重担上的重担一样,依于先前与自己相等的人而起的这种慢,就叫作慢过慢。巴利
Bhūteti vuttadesaādesite bhūte. Bhūtato sañjānātīti iminā ‘‘bhūtā’’ti lokavohāraṃ gahetvā yathā tattha taṇhādimaññanā sambhavanti, evaṃ viparītasaññāya sañjānanaṃ pakāsīyati. Svāyamattho heṭṭhā ‘‘pathavito sañjānātī’’ti ettha vuttanayānusārena sakkā jānitunti āha ‘‘vuttanayamevā’’ti. Yathā suddhāvāsā sabbadā abhāvato imaṃ desanaṃ nāruḷhā, evaṃ nerayikāpi sabbamaññanānadhiṭṭhānato. Eteneva ekaccapetānampettha asaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Apare pana ‘‘diṭṭhimaññanādhiṭṭhānato tesampettha saṅgaho icchitoyevā’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Samaṅgibhūtaṃ paricārenta’’ntiādinā sutte vuttanayena. Rajjatīti ‘‘subhā sukhitā’’ti vipallāsaggāhena tattha rāgaṃ janeti. Evamettha rajjanto ca na kevalaṃ dassanavaseneva, savanādivasenapi rajjatevāti dassento ‘‘disvāpi…pe… utvāpī’’ti āha. Tattha ghāyanādivasena rajjanaṃ tehi anubhūtagandhamālādivasena ceva visabhāgavatthubhūtānaṃ tesaṃ paribhogavasena ca yathānubhavaṃ anussaraṇavasena ca veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ bhūte taṇhāmaññanāya maññatīti vuttanayena bhūte paṭicca chandarāgaṃ janento tesaṃ paṭipattiṃ assādento abhinandanto abhivadanto ajjhosāya tiṭṭhanto ‘‘īdisī avatthā mama anāgatamaddhānaṃ siyā’’tiādinā vā pana nayena tattha nandiṃ samannānento bhūte taṇhāmaññanāya maññatīti attho. Appaṭiladdhassa khattiyamahāsālādibhāvassa, sampattiṃ vipattinti jātivasena ukkaṭṭanihīnataṃ. Dahatīti ṭhapeti. Yoevarūpo mānoti yo eso ‘‘ayaṃ pubbe mayā sadiso, idāni ayaṃ seṭṭho ayaṃ hīnataro’’ti uppanno māno. Ayaṃ vuccati mānātimānoti ayaṃ bhārātibhāro viya purimaṃ sadisamānaṃ upādāya mānātimāno nāmāti attho.
在“常”等说法里:因为根本没有生起,所以叫“常”;因为没有死亡,所以叫“恒久”;因为一切时候都存在,所以叫“永续”。或者,从与无常相反的角度认为是常,从坚固的状态认为是恒久,从等同于永续的意义上认为是永续,因为没有衰老等变化,就认为它们是“不变易法”。
“一切有情”:骆驼、牛、驴等等,一个不漏,因为具有有情识这一点,所以叫有情。
“一切有息者”:就是所说的“一根有息者、二根有息者”等等,一个不漏,因为具有呼吸这一点,所以叫有息者。
“一切已生者”:无一例外,从卵壳等中已生、已产生者,故称已生者。
“一切命者”:米、大麦、小麦等等,一个不漏,因为具有活命这一点,所以叫命者。在他们那里,那人以生长的状态而认为有命。
“无自在、无力、无精进”:表示他们没有属于自己的自在、力或精进。
“决定性、会合、自性、转变”:这里,“决定性”即决定性,如被不可断的线贯穿、不可破的摩尼珠,不舍本然之态。“会合”即六种姓在此处的会合。“自性”即本质,如芒刺的尖锐、迦毗咤果等的圆状、兽与鸟等的斑驳色彩等。如此,由决定性和会合以及自性而转变,即达到了种种不同状态。因为凡应如何存在,它就那样存在;凡不应存在,它就不存在,以此显示。“六种姓中”:即立于黑种姓等六种姓中,感受乐与苦,此外没有乐苦之地,以此显示。以“或”字,收摄边见等种种执著。巴利
Niccātiādīsu uppādābhāvato niccā, maraṇābhāvato dhuvā, sabbadā bhāvato sassatā. Aniccapaṭipakkhato vā niccā, thirabhāvato dhuvā, sassatisamatāya sassatā, jarādivasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammāti maññati. Sabbe sattāti oṭṭhagoṇagadrabhādayo anavasesā sañjanaṭṭhena sattā. Sabbe pāṇāti ‘‘ekindriyo pāṇo dvindriyo pāṇo’’tiādivasena vuttā anavasesā pāṇanaṭṭhena pāṇā. Sabbe bhūtāti anavasesā aṇḍakosādīsu bhūtā sañjātāti bhūtā. Sabbe jīvāti sāliyavagodhūmādayo anavasesā jīvanaṭṭhena jīvā. Tesu hi so virūhabhāvena jīvasaññī. Avasā abalā avīriyāti tesaṃ attano vaso vā balaṃ vā vīriyaṃ vā natthīti dasseti. Niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatāti ettha niyatīti. Niyatatā, acchejjasuttāvutaabhejjamaṇi viya avijahitapakatitā. Saṅgatīti channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ tattha saṅgamo. Bhāvoti sabhāvoyeva, kaṇḍakānaṃ tikhiṇatā, kapiṭṭhaphalādīnaṃ parimaṇḍalāditā, migapakkhīnaṃ vicittavaṇṇāditāti evamādiko. Evaṃ niyatiyā ca saṅgatiyā ca bhāve ca pariṇatā nānappakārataṃ pattā. Yena hi yathā bhavitabbaṃ, so tatheva bhavati. Yena na bhavitabbaṃ, so na bhavatīti dasseti. Chasvevābhijātīsūti kaṇhābhijātiādīsu chasu eva abhijātīsu ṭhatvā sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedenti, aññā sukhadukkhabhūmi natthīti dasseti. Vā-saddena antādibhede diṭṭhābhinivese saṅgaṇhāti.
“再生”这个词,是用来说明:他想要和各个有情群体中已出生的众生同住。“乐再生”这个词,则是用来说明:在那里、那里再生之后,能获得快乐。通过“有些已生者是常的”等说法,显示了“一分恒常”的邪见。而通过“我也是那些已生者当中的一种”,则显示了第四种一分恒常论。巴利
Upapattinti iminā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattanikāye bhūtānaṃ sahabyataṃ ākaṅkhatīti dasseti. Sukhuppattinti iminā pana tattha tattha uppannassa sukhuppattiṃ. Ekacce bhūte niccātiādinā ekaccasassatikadiṭṭhiṃ dasseti. Ahampi bhūtesu aññatarosmīti iminā pana catutthaṃ ekaccasassatikavādaṃ dasseti.
“从何处”是指从自在天、人等各种类别中的任何一种。“只有一种渴爱妄执可得”——这里也要按照前面所说的方式,确定其他妄执同样可能存在。因为对于所说的那类“已生者”,应当用“以渴爱、邪见而欢喜”等说法来表述,所以说“即如前文所说之理”。应当这样连接:“谁遍知那些作为‘已生者’这一施设之执取对象的诸蕴,他就以三种遍知而遍知”等等,应这样连接。不过,另有一些论师认为“已生者”一词也涵盖了草木之类,于是也按树木等来连接并展示妄执的分类;同样也按四大种来连接,但这在义注中并没有记载。巴利
Yato kutocīti issarapurisādibhedato yato kutoci. Ekā taṇhāmaññanāva labbhatīti idhāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayena itaramaññanānampi sambhavo niddhāretabbo. Vuttappakāreyeva bhūte taṇhādiṭṭhīhi abhinandatītiādinā vattabbattā āha ‘‘vuttanayamevā’’ti. Yojanā kātabbāti ‘‘yo bhūtapaññattiyā upādānabhūte khandhe parijānāti, so tīhi pariññāhi parijānātī’’tiādinā yojanā kātabbā. Apare panettha bhūtagāmopi bhūta-saddena saṅgahitoti rukkhādivasenapi maññanāvibhāgaṃ yojetvā dassenti, tathā mahābhūtavasenapi, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ natthi.
“按地的差别等来区分”,是指依照地的差别、投生处的差别等来划分。“以神通”,是指由殊胜福业所生的威力。虽然“天”这个词,在“晴朗无云的天”等语句中指的是晴空,在“天又微微下雨”等语句中指的是云,在“这位是天王子”等语句中指的是刹帝利,在“具足五种欲乐功德,像天人一样享乐”等语句中指的是投生到天界的天人,但为了从所有可以用“天”来指称的众生中,毫无遗漏地指出这里所指的,所以说了“天有三种”等。其余六种欲界天在这里才被认定为“天”,因为其他词句已经把别的排除掉了——这就是这里的用意。“已生者天”:对于所包含的众生,从渴爱等妄执生起的方式来看也有三种相,所以说“应依照已生者一节所说的方式来理解”。巴利
Bhūmivisesādinā bhedenāti bhūmivisesaupapattivisesādivibhāgena. Iddhiyāti puññavisesanibbattena ānubhāvena. Kiñcāpi deva-saddo ‘‘viddhe vigatavalāhake deve’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.110; 3.102; 5.146-148; ma. ni. 1.486; a. ni. 10.15; itivu. 27) ajaṭākāse āgato, ‘‘devo ca thokaṃ thokaṃ phusāyatī’’tiādīsu meghe, ‘‘ayañhi deva kumāro’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.34, 35, 36) khattiye āgato, ‘‘pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgibhūto paricāreti devo maññe’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.183; ma. ni. 2.211) viya idha upapattidevesu āgato, deva-saddena pana vattabbasatte anavasesato uddharitvā tato idhādhippete dassetuṃ ‘‘te tividhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesā cha kāmāvacarā idha devāti adhippetā itaresaṃ padantarehi nivattitattāti adhippāyo. Bhūtā devāti gahitesu sattesu taṇhādimaññanānaṃ pavattākārenapi tividhalakkhaṇanti āha ‘‘bhūtavāre vuttanayena veditabbā’’ti.
在某位男居士的妻子容貌端正等经文中,pajāpati 这个词用来指家里的女主人;在“生主啊,赐予欲望者,愿我的子孙是金色的”等语句中,它是持邪见的人所构想出来的;在“你们应当仰望生主天王的旗顶”等语句中,它指天众中的长者;但在这里,论师们说它指主宰,这只是他们自己的看法,因为下文要取梵天神。
“诸天神”指四大天王天等天。
“大王等”中的“等”字,包含了帝释天神、夜摩天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天。
“他们”指大王等天。
“在被称为有情的欲界地中”:在欲界地的有情之中。
“生主身份”:指生主的状态。因为他以生主身份而宣扬慢,所以说他以慢的妄想而认为自己是生主。巴利
‘‘Aññatarassa upāsakassa pajāpati abhirūpā hotī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 168) pajāpati-saddo gharaṇiyaṃ āgato, ‘‘pajāpati kāmadāyī suvaṇṇavaṇṇā me pajā hotū’’tiādīsu diṭṭhigatikaparikappite, ‘‘pajāpatissa devarājassa dhajaggaṃ ullokeyyāthā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.249) devajeṭṭhake, idha pana adhipatīti vadanti, taṃ upari brahmuno gayhamānattā tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Devānanti cātumahārājikādidevānaṃ. Mahārājādīnanti ādi-saddena sakkasuyāmasantussitasunimmitavasavattino gahitā. Tesanti mahārājādīnaṃ. Sattasaṅkhātāyāti kāmabhūmiyaṃ sattasaṅkhātāya. Pajāpatinti pajāpatibhāvaṃ. Pajāpatibhāvena hi mānaṃ jappento pajāpatiṃ mānamaññanāya maññatīti vutto.
虽说“只有一种见妄想能相应”,但对于渴望投生到生主身边或与生主同处一界的人,对于把心倾向那种状态的人,对于认为自己能获得那种成就而生起“我比他胜”之类想法的人,也可以知道,渴爱、慢、妄想同样会生起。“那些法”指的是寿命、容貌等。“生主”在这里,也应当按前面所说的方式,知道其他妄想同样可能产生。巴利
Ekā diṭṭhimaññanāva yujjatīti vuttaṃ, pajāpatino pana samipataṃ salokataṃ vā ākaṅkhato, tathābhāvāya cittaṃ paṇidahato, tathāladdhabbāya sampattiyā attano seyyādibhāvaṃ dahato ca taṇhāmānamaññanāpi sambhavantīti sakkā viññātuṃ. Ye ca dhammāti āyuvaṇṇādike vadati. Pajāpatinti etthāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayena itaramaññanānampi sambhavo veditabbo.
“已增大”就是已圆满。以殊胜功德,是指以禅那等殊胜功德而成就上人法。梵天神这个词虽然也以无差别的方式指称殊胜者;为了说明它在哪些情况下以具有殊胜功德等形态出现,所以说了“再者”等话。“千”是指主宰一千个世界。“最初化生”是指由殊胜的初禅化生,或者在初禅地中最早化生。“已摄”应当理解为:由于取了主要的,次要的也因此以某种关联而被包含在内。这里所说的梵天神,指的是大梵天王。因为他容貌端严、寿命长久,比起梵众天等更为广大殊胜,所以叫大梵天王;处在他的国师位置上的,是梵辅天;在他的集会中作为侍从的,是梵众天,应当这样理解。由于这是殊胜个体的状态,所以对梵天神生起妄想,就像对生主那样,因此说“应按照生主那一节所说的方法来理解”。同样,由于那是众多众生共有的状态,所以发光天等节就说是与“已成”节相似。巴利
Brūhitoti parivuddho. Guṇavisesehīti jhānādīhi visiṭṭhehi guṇehi uttarimanussadhammatāya. Brahma-saddassa satipi avisesato visiṭṭhavācakatte yattha yattha panassa guṇavisesayuttādirūpā pavatti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sahassoti sahassiyā lokadhātuyā adhipatibhūto. Paṭhamābhinibbattoti paṇītena paṭhamajhānena nibbatto, paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ vā paṭhamaṃ abhinibbatto. Gahitāti veditabbā padhānaggahaṇena appadhānānampi kenaci sambandhena gahitabhāvasiddhito. Ettha ca brahmāti mahābrahmā adhippeto. So hi vaṇṇavantatāya ceva dīghāyukatāya ca brahmapārisajjādīhi mahanto brahmāti mahābrahmā, tassa pana purohitaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti brahmapurohitā, parisāyaṃ bhavā paricārakāti brahmapārisajjāti veditabbā. Ukkaṭṭhekapuggalabhāvato pajāpatismiṃ viya brahmani maññanā vattatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pajāpativāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā’’ti. Tathā hi bahupuggalabhāvasāmaññato ābhassaravārādīnaṃ bhūtavārasadisatā vuttā.
按前面所说的光辉,习惯放光的就是光音天。“同层而住”这个说法,是如同各禅那地那样,因为不存在上下层次差别,所以才这么说;不过他们的处所还是各自有别的。跟光音天相比,他们的光较少,所以叫少光天。他们的光无量,所以叫无量光天。巴利
Yathāvuttapabhāya ābhāsanasīlā vā ābhassarā. Ekatalavāsinoti idaṃ jhānantarabhūmīnaṃ viya heṭṭhuparibhāvābhāvato vuttaṃ, ṭhānāni pana nesaṃ paricchinnāneva. Ābhassarehi parittā ābhā etesanti parittābhā. Appamāṇā ābhā etesanti appamāṇābhā.
“净”是指美丽的光辉。像金块一样有光彩,所以叫“金块光彩”。在这里,本来应该说“以美丽的光辉遍满,所以叫遍净”,但把“bhā”的音缩短,又把末尾的“ṇa”音变成“ha”音,就说成了“遍净”。而“净”是指单一、坚固、不动的光辉。他们的光辉有限,所以叫少净天;他们的光辉无量,所以叫无量净天。巴利
Subhāti sobhanā pabhā. Kañcanapiṇḍo viya sassirikā kañcanapiṇḍasassirikā. Tattha sobhanāya pabhāya kiṇṇā subhākiṇṇāti vattabbe bhā-saddassa rassattaṃ, antima-ṇa-kārassa ha-kārañca katvā ‘‘subhakiṇhā’’ti vuttā. Subhāti ca ekagghanā niccalā pabhā vuccati, parittā subhā etesanti parittasubhā. Appamāṇā subhā etesanti appamāṇasubhā.
广大果,就是指广大、宁静、安乐、长寿、美貌等果报。巴利
Vipulaphalāti vipulasantasukhāyuvaṇṇādiphalā.
虽然诸天神、梵天神等也能靠福德果报和禅那果报压伏对立者,但对于无想有情中的凡夫来说,“胜者”这个称呼既明显又已经固定通用了,所以是依着他们而宣说这个教法。为了说明这一点,就说“这是无想有的同义语”。就像在生主品里,通过“在此,有一类人对生主……”等说法,展示了种种计执的生起方式;在这里也同样可以这样展示,所以说“其余部分和生主品里所说的一样”。巴利
Satipi devabrahmādīnaṃ puññaphalena jhānaphalena ca paṭipakkhābhibhave yesaṃ pana puthujjanaasaññasattesu abhibhūvohāro pākaṭo niruḷho ca, tesaṃ vasenāyaṃ desanā pavattāti dassento āha ‘‘asaññabhavassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Yathā pajāpativāre ‘‘idhekacco pajāpatismiṃyevā’’tiādinā maññanāpavatti dassitā, tathā idhāpi taṃ dassetuṃ sakkāti āha ‘‘sesaṃ pajāpativāre vuttanayamevā’’ti.
空无边处边际等的注释巴利
Ākāsānañcāyatanavārādivaṇṇanā
4 世尊这样按众生类别说明地的层次时,为了确定不取净居天的理由,说了“如此,世尊”等话。其中,“不来者与诸漏尽者”指不来者和漏尽者。净居天虽然确实有寿命长达许多千劫的,但就最高限度来说,只有一万六千劫的寿命,不会超过这个,所以说“只有几千劫的寿命”。空无边处等法虽然也出现在欲有和色有中,但因为它们属于无色界,所以得不到该地的名称,因此特别强调说“只有投生到那里的人”。这里的意思是:应当依照“胜者品”中所说的方式来了知。因为这里并不存在容貌殊胜等情况。在“依照生主品中所说的方式”这一句中,应当理解为以“我是无色者,已断除色想、有对想”等方式生起慢和计执。巴利
4. Evaṃ sattavasena bhūmikkamadassane suddhāvāsānaṃ aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ niddhārento ‘‘evaṃ bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Tattha anāgāmikhīṇāsavāti anāgāmino ca khīṇāsavā ca. Kiñcāpi suddhāvāsā attheva anekakappasahassāyukā, ukkaṃsaparicchedato pana soḷasakappasahassāyukāva, na tato paranti āha ‘‘katipayakappasahassāyukā’’ti. Kāmarūpabhavesu pavattamānāpi ākāsānañcāyatanādidhammā arūpāvacarabhāvato taṃbhūmikavohāraṃ na labhantīti ‘‘tatrūpapannāyevā’’ti avadhāretvā vuttaṃ. Abhibhūvāre vuttanayena veditabbā yathārahanti adhippāyo. Na hettha vaṇṇavantatādi sambhavatīti. Pajāpativārevuttanayenāti ettha ‘‘ahamasmi arūpo pahīnarūpapaṭighasañño’’tiādinā mānamaññanā veditabbā.
见闻等品的注释巴利
Diṭṭhasutavārādivaṇṇanā
5 以“色”为门来显示执取的对象,这是就简略的方式来说的,所以注释里说“就广说而言也是如此”。因为那也像“在那里没有大地、没有水、没有火、没有风、没有空无边处……”这样的表述一样,是以简略的方式显示五蕴有的存在。巴利
5. Rūpamukhena maññanāvatthudassanaṃ saṅkhepoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘vitthāratopī’’ti. Tampi hi ‘‘yattha neva pathavī, na āpo, na tejo, na vāyo, na ākāsānañcāyatana’’ntiādiggahaṇaṃ viya saṅkhepato pañcavokārabhavadassanaṃ hotīti.
所谓“所见”,是指通过眼门完成看的动作所达成的情形,以及眼睛已经看到、将会看到、如果条件具备就可能看到的一切。因为这里并没有要区分特定时间的意图,所以一概说成“所见”,就像“已挤之乳”的说法一样。因此注释说:“这是色处的同义语。”这个道理也应该套用到“所闻”等说法上。所谓“众生”,就是在色等对象中执取、黏着的人,所以叫众生。这个“众生”一词虽然是通称,但因为这里以“于女色”等说法限定了对象差别,所以应当理解为在此处是指男子。“染著”:就像布被染料染透一样,被那种能使心变质的欲贪所染,就是深深染著。“贪求”:以渴仰为本性,因极度贪求而陷入贪的状态。“被缚”:就像被绳结绑住一样,因贪而难以解脱,被系缚在对象上。“迷醉”:由于烦恼的作用,仿佛失去知觉,无法再做别的事,陷入迷醉和愚痴。“耽著”:在对象上,仿佛把它当成与他人共通的东西一样,吞下去、彻底占有之后而安住。以这些——金色等形相——而说“这样的所见是吉祥,那样的所见是不吉祥”。依“在色中随观有我”的道理:这是就执取受等非色法,或执取离开色处的一切法为我,然后由此把内在的或外在的色处假想为它的处所,心里想“那个我、这个我,就在这个色处中”,于是在所见中思量。这是针对这个道理而说的。在“从地而思量”等说法中,已经显示了如“对有资具的自己或他人”等思量的生起;同样,在“从所见而思量”等说法中也可以显示这一点,所以说“这些应当依照地品中所说的方式来了知”。巴利
Diṭṭhanti yaṃ cakkhudvārena katadassanakiriyāsamāpanaṃ, yañca cakkhu dvayaṃ passati passissati sati sambhave passeyya, taṃ sabbakālanti visesavacanicchāya abhāvato diṭṭhanteva vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘duddha’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘rūpāyatanassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Ayañca nayo sutādīsupi yojetabbo. Sattāti rūpādīsu sattā visattāti sattā. Sañjanaṭṭhena sāmaññasaddopi cesa satta-saddo ‘‘itthirūpe’’ti visayavisesitattā idha purisavācako daṭṭhabbo. Rattāti vatthaṃ viya raṅgajātena cittassa vipariṇāmakārakena chandarāgena rattā sārattā. Giddhāti abhikaṅkhanasabhāvena abhigijjhanena giddhā gedhaṃ āpannā. Gadhitāti ganthitā viya lobhena dummocanīyabhāvena ārammaṇe paṭibaddhā. Mucchitāti kilesavasena visaññībhūtā viya anaññakiccā mucchaṃ mohaṃ āpannā. Ajjhosannāti visaye aññasādhāraṇe viya katvā gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvā viya ṭhitā. Imināti suvaṇṇavaṇṇādiākārena. Maṅgalaṃ amaṅgalanti īdisaṃ diṭṭhaṃ maṅgalaṃ, īdisaṃ amaṅgalanti . Rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ samanupassananayenāti idaṃ vedanādiarūpadhamme, rūpāyatanavinimuttasabbadhamme vā attato gahetvā tato ajjhattikaṃ, bāhiraṃ vā rūpāyatanaṃ tassokāsabhāvena parikappetvā ‘‘so kho pana me ayaṃ attā imasmiṃ rūpāyatane’’ti maññanto diṭṭhasmiṃ maññatīti imaṃ nayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pathavito maññatī’’tiādīsu yathā ‘‘saupakaraṇassa attano vā parassa vā’’tiādimaññanāpavatti dassitā, evaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhato maññatī’’tiādīsu sakkā taṃ dassetunti āha ‘‘tesaṃ pathavīvāre vuttanayeneva veditabba’’nti.
“切近地”(āhacca)的意思是随顺外境、到达(patvā)。所以注释用“靠近后”(upagantvā)来解释。所谓“相互黏着”(aññamaññasaṃsilesa),就是像眼与色、耳与声那样——不是隔着很远,而是彼此贴附在一起。巴利
Āhaccāti visayaṃ anvāya, patvāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘upagantvā’’ti. Aññamaññasaṃsileseti cakkhurūpasotasaddā viya dure ahutvā aññamaññaṃ alliyane.
以心所了知的,就是“唯”的意思。因为其余那些也是由心了知的。由于它们未被其余七处的施设所涵盖,为了把它们也一并纳入并显示,而说“或法所缘的”。在这两种分类中,也包含了出世间法,因此说“但在这里,只能得到属于有身范围内的”。详细展开,是指那些计度生起方式的详细说明。在这里,是指在所闻等章节中。巴利
Manasā viññātaṃ kevalanti attho. Itarānipi hi manasā viññāyantīti. Sesehi sattahi āyatanehi paññattiyā asaṅgahitattā tampi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammārammaṇassa vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dvīsupi vikappesu lokuttarānampi saṅgaho āpannoti āha ‘‘idha pana sakkāyapariyāpannameva labbhatī’’ti. Vitthāroti maññanānaṃ pavattanākāravitthāro. Etthāti etesu sutavārādīsu.
单一章节的注释巴利
Ekattavārādivaṇṇanā
6 所谓“等至者节”,是指入等至者的心相续,也就是色界与无色界禅那的现起。因为那种心只在同一所缘上、以单一方式生起,所以称为“单一性”;也正因如此,应当知道,果报禅那的现起在这里也已经由“等至者节”这个说法一并涵盖了。所谓“非等至者节”,是指欲界诸法的心相续。因为即使近行禅那生起,心也还没有真正达到那种“单一性”,所以才这样说。巴利
6.Samāpannakavārenāti samāpannakappavattiyā, rūpāvacarārūpāvacarajhānappavattiyāti attho. Sā hi ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe ekākārena pavattatīti katvā ‘‘ekatta’’nti vuccati, evañca katvā vipākajjhānappavattipi idha samāpannakavāraggahaṇeneva gahitāti daṭṭhabbā. Asamāpannakavārenāti kāmāvacaradhammappavattiyā. Upacārajjhānenapi hi cittaṃ na sammā ekattaṃ gatanti vuccatīti.
所谓“连结”,就是通过妄想来连结。“分解”就是分别剖析。所谓“依教说的方式”,就是依巴利圣典的理路。其中,在“认为单一”等句里,应当依照“把受视为我”这类经文的理路来理解;而在“认为种种”等句里,则应当依照“把色视为我”这类经文的理路,顺着这个规则去理解妄想。巴利
Yojanāti maññanāyojanā. Bhinditvāti vibhajitvā. Sāsananayenāti pāḷinayena. Tattha ‘‘ekattaṃ maññatī’’tiādīsu ‘‘vedanaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā nayena, ‘‘nānattaṃ maññatī’’tiādīsu pana ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā nayena vuttavidhiṃ anugantvā maññanā veditabbā.
依“地界品”等前面所说的注释方式,意思是:像“认为我是受”“认为受是我的”这一类,以及“认为我是色”“认为色是我的”这一类。因此经文说“随应审察”,意思是:对于单一和种种这两种情况,看哪一种组合方式能够成立,就按照它去分别观察。这里说的“有些人”,是指无畏山寺的住众;“另一些人”,是指《精要略义》的老师们。他们说的是“对见的固执执取”,这是上下文之间的关联。因为凡夫的妄想,是在拆解了“有身”之后,仅仅按照当时呈现的对象而生起的,所以在那里并不是以“这是单一的方式、这是种种的方式”这样区分开来运作的。而在“认为我是单一的”等经文中,说的是对自己生起“单一”或“种种”想,并不是说“这个是单一、那个是种种”。对于这样运作的见的固执执取,应知它在这里并不被认定为具有单一性或种种性。巴利
Pathavīvārādīsu vuttena ca aṭṭhakathānayenāti ‘‘ahaṃ vedanāti maññati, mama vedanāti maññatī’’tiādinā, ‘‘ahaṃ rūpanti maññati, mama rūpanti maññatī’’tiādinā cāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yathānurūpaṃvīmaṃsitvā’’ti, ekattanānattabhāvesu yo yojanānayo sambhavati, tadanurūpaṃ vicāretvāti attho. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Apareti sārasamāsācariyā. Diṭṭhābhinivesaṃ vadantīti sambandho. Puthujjanassa maññanā nāma sakkāyaṃ bhinditvāva yathāupaṭṭhitavisayavaseneva pavattatīti na tattha ayamekattanayo ayaṃ nānattanayoti vibhāgavaseneva, ekattasaññī attā hotītiādīsu ca attano ekattanānattasaññitā vuttā, na pana ekattaṃ nānattanti evaṃ pavattassa diṭṭhābhinivesassa ekattanānattabhāvoti evamettha tadubhayassa idha anadhippetabhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
凡夫能够彻底执取前面所说的那个东西,就因为它应当被彻底执取,所以被称为“一切”。为了说明这一点,注释说“就只是那个”,意思就是“有身”这个一切。如果对一切三界诸法看不到过患,就不会有厌离;因为以乐味来观察,渴爱只会增长,所以说“对一切尝乐味的人,以渴爱的妄想而认为一切”。世尊也这样说过:“比丘们,对可结缚的法以乐味随观而住的人,渴爱增长。”(《相应部》2.53, 57)认为“这一切是我所化作”的人,以“这是我所化作”的妄想,把自己安立在“更胜”等状态,由于这种慢而认为所化作;如果没有“这是我所化作”的妄想,那样的慢就不可能生起,所以说“认为一切是自己所化作者的人,以慢的妄想而认为一切”。以“一切无”等理趣为例,“等”字包含了宿命论等。“我的大我”这一句,显示的是主张自我在一切方面威力转起的说法。为了显示在“一切于一切处”等见的基础上,这里也可能生起“我在一切中,我的任何事物在一切中是障碍;其他人在一切中,其他人的任何事物在一切中是障碍”等理趣的妄想,所以注释说“其余的可依地节中所说的方法了知”。此外,持有“一切世间是‘人’所成”这种见的人,从称为“人”的一切处,如果认为自己的生起或出离,就以见的妄想而认为一切;然而,正是在那被见的妄想所认为的事物上,生起贪爱与慢,所以应当知道渴爱的妄想与慢的妄想。又,如果认为“那一切是我的自我、作者、主宰”,就认为“一切是我的”;这样,以见与渴爱的欢喜而欢喜一切,这里诸妄想的生起也应当这样了知。巴利
Yaṃ yathāvuttaputhujjano anavasesato gaṇhanto gahetuṃ sakkoti, taṃ tassa anavasesato gahetabbataṃ upādāya ‘‘sabba’’nti vuccatīti dassento ‘‘tamevā’’ti āha, sakkāyasabbanti attho. Sabbasmimpi tebhūmakadhamme ādīnavadassane asati nibbidābhāvato assādānupassanāya taṇhā vaḍḍhatevāti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ assādento sabbaṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññatī’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino viharato taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.53, 57). ‘‘Sabbamidaṃ mayā nimmita’’nti tena nimmitamaññanāya attānaṃ seyyādito dahanto tena mānena nimmitaṃ maññatiyeva nāma nimmitamaññanāya vinā tathāmānuppattiyā abhāvatoti āha ‘‘attanā nimmitaṃ maññanto sabbaṃ mānamaññanāya maññatī’’ti. Sabbaṃ natthītiādinā nayenāti ādi-saddena niyativādādike saṅgaṇhāti. Mahā me attāti iminā sabbato attano vibhūtipavattivādaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sabbaṃ sabbatthaka’’nti diṭṭhivasena – ‘‘ahaṃ sabbasmiṃ mayhaṃ kiñcanaṃ palibodho sabbasmiṃ, paro sabbasmiṃ parassa kiñcanaṃ palibodho sabbasmi’’ntiādinā nayenapettha maññanā sambhavatīti dassento āha ‘‘sesaṃ pathavīvāre vuttanayena veditabba’’nti. Apica ‘‘sabboyaṃ loko purisamayo’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhiko purisasaṅkhātato sabbato, attano uppattiṃ vā niggamanaṃ vā maññanto diṭṭhimaññanāya sabbato maññati, tasmiṃyeva pana diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmaññanā mānamaññanā ca veditabbā. Taṃyeva pana sabbaṃ mayhaṃ attā kattā sāmīti vā maññanto ‘‘sabbaṃ me’’ti maññati, tathāyaṃ diṭṭhitaṇhābhinandanāhi abhinandanto sabbaṃ abhinandatīti evampettha maññanānaṃ pavatti veditabbā.
这(五取蕴)就是有身。持“现法涅槃论”的人,把伴随最殊胜快乐的五蕴执为涅槃,但从实质上说,那只不过是有身罢了。“以一种方式”是说:虽然这五种蕴各不相同,但把它们当作涅槃这一点上,合在一起说。“因为”是说:由于这个缘故。“以五种欲乐”是说:以可爱可意的色等五种欲的部分,或者以这些束缚。“被赋予”是说:很好地投入、黏着,安住其中。“成为具足者”是说:具足。“享受”是说:在这些欲乐、这些欲的部分中,随自己的快乐让诸根游走、流转,从这里到那里去执取。或者也可以说:嬉戏、娱乐、游玩。在这里,欲乐有两种:人类的和天界的。人类的欲乐,像顶生王的欲乐那样;天界的欲乐,像他化自在天王的欲乐那样。对于那些追求这类欲乐的人,他们就安立所谓的“现法涅槃成就”。因此说“到此为止……就成为”。“现法”是指现前可见的法,这是处处所得之状态的异名。在现法中涅槃,即在此有身中苦的止息,就是现法涅槃。最上的、无上的现法涅槃,就是最上现法涅槃,意思是已经到达了它。“以五种方式出现”是说:依据上面所说的欲乐之乐,以及四种色界禅那之乐,在圣典中以五种方式出现。“尝味涅槃”是说:以“这是最上之乐、是出离”的想法而尝味。巴利
Tanti sakkāyaṃ. Ukkaṃsagatasukhasahitañhi khandhapañcakaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādī nibbānanti maññati, taṃ panatthato sakkāyoyevāti. Ekadhāti pañcavidhampi nibbānabhāvena ekajjhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Yatoti yasmā. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti manāpiyarūpādīhi pañcahi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi, bandhanehi vā. Samappito suṭṭhu appito allīno hutvā ṭhito. Samaṅgibhūtoti samannāgato. Paricāretīti tesu kāmaguṇesu kāmakoṭṭhāsesu yathāsukhaṃ indriyāni cāreti sañcāreti ito cito ca upaneti. Atha vā laḷati ramati kīḷati. Ettha dvidhā kāmaguṇā mānusakā ceva dibbā ca. Mānusakā ca mandhātukāmaguṇasadisā, dibbā paranimmitavasavattidevarājassa kāmaguṇasadisā. Evarūpe kāme upagatānañhi te diṭṭhadhammanibbānasampattiṃ paññapenti. Tenāha ‘‘ettāvatā kho…pe… hotī’’ti. Diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkhadhammo vuccati, tattha tattha paṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, diṭṭhadhamme nibbānaṃ imasmiṃyeva attabhāve dukkhavūpasamanaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ. Paramaṃ uttamaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānanti paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ, taṃ patto hotīti attho. Pañcadhā āgatanti yathāvuttakāmaguṇasukhassa ceva catubbidharūpāvacarajjhānasukhassa ca vasena pāḷiyaṃ pañcappakārena āgataṃ. Nibbānaṃ assādentoti paramaṃ sukhaṃ nissaraṇanti maññanāya assādento.
如果认为“证得这个涅槃之后,不再出生,不再衰老,不再死亡”,这也是在对涅槃产生执取。如果抓住“除此之外,再也没有别的更殊胜的安稳依靠了”这个想法,那就是从涅槃方面产生执取。如果认为“这个涅槃是我证得的”,因此觉得“涅槃是我的”,那就是在执取“涅槃是我的”。正是因为这个缘故,他以对见解的欢喜而欢喜那个涅槃。以上这些,在这里就是“见解层面的执取”。不过,对于那个被见解层面的执取所执取的对象,由于他会对它生起贪爱和慢心,所以在这里也应该辨识出“渴爱层面的执取”和“慢心层面的执取”。巴利
‘‘Imasmiṃ nibbāne patte na jāyati, na jīrati, na mīyatī’’ti evampi nibbānasmiṃ maññati. ‘‘Ito paraṃ paramassāsabhūtaṃ natthī’’ti gaṇhanto nibbānato maññati. Tayidaṃ nibbānaṃ mayā adhigataṃ, tasmā ‘‘nibbānaṃ me’’ti maññati. Tatoyeva taṃ nibbānaṃ diṭṭhābhinandanāya abhinandati. Ayaṃ tāvettha diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva pana diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi niddhāretabbā.
所谓“像什么样”,就是具有怎样的性质;意思是应当通过那些可厌之类的性质来观察。“这个”指的就是它。由此,他说明了对自已和听法的人来说,这一点都是现前可证的。与不净等性质共同存在的色等诸法,其集合就是“身”,即“有身”,也就是取蕴。“如是”,是指以它实际存在的可厌等状态。“一切妄想”,是指在以地等各自特性加以确定等种种差别的不同对象上生起的各种各样、所有的渴爱妄想。巴利
Yādisoti yathārūpo, yehi jegucchādisabhāvehi passitabboti attho. Esāti ayaṃ. Tenassa attano suṇantānañca paccakkhasiddhatamāha. Asubhādisabhāvena saha vijjamānānaṃ rūpādidhammānaṃ kāyo samūhoti sakkāyo, upādānakkhandhā. Tathāti tassa bhāvabhūtena paṭikūlatādippakārena. Sabbamaññanāti pathavīādike sarūpāvadhāraṇādivibhāgabhinne visaye pavattiyā anekavihitā sabbā taṇhāmaññanā.
可厌,就是应当被厌弃的。这个词说明它有不净、令人厌恶、恶臭、违逆的性质。易破,就是每一刹那都在坏灭。这个词说明它有无常、不稳固、灭尽、衰败、脆弱的性质。这个,指的是有身。苦,就是不是乐。这个词说明它困苦、艰难、被疾病逼迫、以苦为本质的存在状态。无导师,就是没有引导者。这个词说明它无我、没有实质的存在状态。那个,指的是有身。从对立面来看,是从自性相反的角度来说,也就是与净、常、乐、我等见解相对立的意思。执取,指正在执取的人,他们以执持净等特相的方式,深深耽溺于其中。巴利
Jegucchoti jigucchanīyo. Tenassa asubhājaññaduggandhapaṭikūlabhāvaṃ dasseti. Siduroti khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanasabhāvo. Tenassa aniccaaddhuvakhayavayapabhaṅgurasabhāvaṃ dasseti. Ayanti sakkāyo. Dukkhoti na sukho. Tenassa kicchakasirābādhadukkhavuttitaṃ dasseti. Apariṇāyakoti pariṇāyakarahito. Tenassa attasuññaasāravuttitaṃ dasseti. Tanti sakkāyaṃ. Paccanīkatoti sabhāvapaṭipakkhato, subhaniccasukhaattāditoti attho. Gaṇhanti gaṇhanto, tattha subhādigāhavasena abhinivisantoti attho.
现在,为了用譬喻把三种妄想都讲清楚,所以说了“以净想……”等这一段。其中,就像飞蛾以净乐之想,扑向具有巨大灼热、带来广大祸患的火焰;同样地,飞蛾般的渴爱妄想也是这样扑向这样的有身。这句话“以净想……乃至……渴爱的妄想”就是为了显示这个意思。巴利
Idāni tissopi maññanā upamāhi vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘subhato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā mahāpariḷāhe vipulānatthāvahe ca aggimhi salabhassa patanaṃ subhasukhasaññāya, evaṃ tādise sakkāye salabhassa taṇhāmaññanāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘subhato…pe… taṇhāya maññanā’’ti iminā.
就像食粪虫得到一堆粪便,即使那粪堆并不圆满,它也会摆出一副圆满的样子,抬高自己;同样,对于充满种种过患、注定坏灭的有身,愚人生起“常”想之后,就因为自己的成就而骄傲,在那里生起慢心——这就是“常想……慢与思量”这句话所要说明的意思。巴利
Gūthādī kīṭako gūtharāsiṃ laddhā asampannepi tasmiṃ sampannākāraṃ pavattayamāno attānaṃ ukkaṃseti, evamanekādīnave ekantabhedini sakkāye niccasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā sampattimadena tattha bālo mānaṃ jappetīti imamatthamāha ‘‘niccasaññaṃ…pe… mānena maññanā’’ti.
就像有个愚笨糊涂、天性昏昧的愚人,在镜子里看到自己的影像,心想:“我猜这大概是镜子的主人吧,要是我抓住他,他可能会害我。”于是丢下镜子就逃,把那里根本不存在的东西当成真实存在的东西抓取。这个愚人就跟这种情况一样,在有身之上执取我和我所有——这段话就是在说明这个意思:“我……乃至……是见的认为。”巴利
Yathā bālo muddhadhātuko sammūḷho koci ādāse attano paṭibimbaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ maññe ādāsasāmiko, yadi ahamimaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭheyyaṃ, anatthampi me kareyyā’’ti chaḍḍetvā palāyanto tattha avijjamānameva kiñci vijjamānaṃ katvā gaṇhi, tathūpamo ayaṃ bālo sakkāye attattaniyagāhaṃ gaṇhantoti imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘attā…pe… diṭṭhiyā hoti maññanā’’ti iminā.
魔缚比韦帕西蒂的束缚更微细。所以世尊说:“比丘们,魔缚实在是更加微细啊!”巴利
Sukhumaṃ mārabandhanaṃ vepacittibandhanatopi sukhumatarattā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘aho sukhumataraṃ kho, bhikkhave, mārabandhana’’nti.
很多,非常多,或者很多次。即使挣扎,也无法超越有身,因为无法超越轮回。正如世尊所说:“比丘们,那些主张有情断灭、消亡、非有的沙门,他们只是围着有身打转,就像那条被项圈拴住的狗”等等。因为正如在七种断灭论中,舍弃作为轮回导引的渴爱和邪见是可能的,在常见论中也是如此;可是见行者怎么可能从存在中解脱呢?因此说“无法超越有身”。巴利
Bahunti ativiya, anekakkhattuṃ vā. Vipphandamānopi sakkāyaṃ nātivattati saṃsāraṃ nātivattanato. Yathāha ‘‘ye te, bhikkhave, samaṇā sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapenti, te, sakkāyaṃyeva anuparidhāvanti seyyathāpi sā gaddulabandhano’’tiādi. Yathā hi sattasupi ucchedavikappesu saṃsāranāyikānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ pahānaṃ sambhavati, evaṃ sassatavikappesupīti kathañci pana diṭṭhigatikassa bhavavippamokkho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkāyaṃ nātivattatī’’ti.
Saso,即那个、这个凡夫。常,就是一切时候。巴利
Sasoti so eso puthujjano. Niccanti sabbakālaṃ.
所谓“那”是指:因为有身染污的人无法超越生等。从不乐的角度说,就是从苦的角度说。巴利
Tanti tasmā sakkāyamalīnassa jātiyādīnamanativattanato. Asātatoti dukkhato.
这样观见它,是指以之前所说的方式,用与如实观智相应的道智,去观见那个具有不净、无常、苦、无我自性的有身。断除,是指以彻底断尽的方式舍弃一切妄想。从一切苦解脱,是指从整个轮回之苦中解脱出来。巴利
Passaṃ evamimanti asubhāniccadukkhānattasabhāvaṃ taṃ sakkāyaṃ vuttappakārena yathābhūtavipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya passanto. Pahāyāti samucchedavasena sabbā maññanāyo pajahitvā. Sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti sakalasmāpi vaṭṭadukkhato pamuccatīti.
有学章节第二种方法的注释巴利
Sekkhavāradutiyanayavaṇṇanā
7 不先限定所要说之义而说的话,就是总说;先加以限定而说的话,就是详说。因此说:“‘yo’是总说之词,‘so’是详说之词。”“总括之义”就是合集之义。而总括是依同类性而成立的,所以说“依所缘同类性”,意思是依所缘的同类性、相似性。它开示有学,是为了通过共相来显示,从而确立于别相,同时也是因为那些话是以有学为范围的。巴利
7. Adhippetassa atthassa aniyametvā vacanaṃ uddeso, niyametvā vacanaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘yoti uddesavacanaṃ, soti niddesavacana’’nti. Sampiṇḍanatthoti samuccayattho. Sampiṇḍanañca sabhāgatāvasena hotīti āha – ‘‘ārammaṇasabhāgenā’’ti, ārammaṇassa sabhāgatāya sadisatāyāti attho. Sekkhaṃ dasseti sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, sekkhavisayattā ca tassa vacanassa.
问“以什么意义”时,因为以智慧应当被通达的,就是它的意义、它的自性,所以这是在问:以什么意义、以什么自性、以什么特征而称为有学?然而,因为是在证得有学法之后,才对补特伽罗施设“有学”这个称呼,所以说“由获得有学法而有学”。有学法,就是在四圣道以及较低的三果中的正见等法。因此他说“以有学的正见……比丘仅以这一点就成为有学”。这样依阿毗达摩的方式显示了有学的特征之后,现在为了也依经教的方式显示它,而说了“再者”等话。其中,以“他学习”这句话,显示具足三学、但修学尚未完成的人是有学。因此他说“他学习”等。这里重复说“他学习、他学习”,是为了表明与诸学恒常相应。或者,学习就是“学”,他以学为习性,所以叫有学。因为他学业尚未完成,又心倾向于它,所以唯独以学习为习性;不像无学者那样学业已经完成,对学处已止息功用,心得安息;也不像众多弃学的凡夫那样,对学处没有倾向。或者,依圣种姓而生于三学之中,或存在于其中,所以叫有学。或者,以它来看,所以叫“看”,即道与果的正见;与正见一起,所以叫有学。巴利
Kenaṭṭhenāti yasmā ñāṇena araṇīyato attho sabhāvo, tasmā kenaṭṭhena kena sabhāvena kena lakkhaṇena sekkho nāma hotīti attho. Yasmā pana sekkhadhammādhigamena puggale sekkhavohārappavatti, tasmā ‘‘sekkhadhammapaṭilābhato sekkho’’ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhadhammā nāma catūsu maggesu, heṭṭhimesu ca tīsu phalesu sammādiṭṭhiādayo. Tenāha ‘‘sekkhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā…pe… ettāvatā kho bhikkhu sekkho hotī’’ti. Evaṃ abhidhammapariyāyena sekkhalakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā idāni suttantikapariyāyenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sikkhatīti iminā sikkhāttayasamaṅgī apariniṭṭhitasikkho sekkhoti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘sikkhatī’’tiādi . Sikkhāhi niccasamāyogadīpanatthañcettha ‘‘sikkhati sikkhatī’’ti āmeḍitavacanaṃ. Atha vā sikkhanaṃ sikkhā, sā etassa sīlanti sekkho. So hi apariyositasikkhattā tadadhimuttattā ca ekantena sikkhanasīlo, na asekkho viya pariniṭṭhitasikkho tattha paṭippassaddhussukko, nāpi vissaṭṭhasikkho pacurajano viya tattha anadhimutto. Atha vā ariyāya jātiyā tīsu sikkhāsu jāto, tattha vā bhavoti sekkho. Atha vā ikkhati etāyāti ikkhā, maggaphalasammādiṭṭhi. Saha ikkhāyāti sekkho.
“随顺之道的圆满践行者”:那条从戒等开始、以观为终点的随顺之道,因随顺于通往苦的止息的出世间道,所以称为随顺之道。这个人因为圆满成就了这条道,所以叫圆满践行者。现在,为了以个人为立足点来展示这条道,所以说了“戒具足”等话。其中,“戒具足”是指具备巴帝摩卡防护戒,或者说具足圆满的巴帝摩卡戒。这里所说的“戒”,特指巴帝摩卡戒,因为它是根本。“守护根门”是指:面对色等所缘时,防止贪欲等生起,以此守护包括意根在内的六根,这就是守护根门。“于食知量”是指:在寻求食物等过程中,对饮食知道适当的限度。“专修警寤”是指:去除昏沉和睡眠后,日夜都投入业处作意,因此是专修警寤者。那么,怎样才是专修警寤呢?为了说明这一点,说了“初夜……中略……而住”。正如经文所说:“怎样是于初夜后夜专修警寤者呢?在此,比丘白天通过经行和禅坐,使心从障碍法中清净;夜晚初分,也通过经行……中略……使心清净。比丘,这就是于初夜后夜专修警寤者。”然而,在这个义理中,即“认为,或不认为”这句话所涉及的应当阐明之义中,所指的并不是凡夫,因为前面已经说过“未达心者,希求无上轭安稳”。巴利
Anulomapaṭipadāya paripūrakārīti yā sā sīlādikā vipassanantā dukkhanirodhagāminiyā lokuttarāya paṭipadāya anulomanato anulomapaṭipadā, tassā sampādanena paripūrakārīti. Idāni taṃ paṭipadaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlasampanno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sīlasampannoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlena samannāgato, paripuṇṇapātimokkhasīlo vā. Pātimokkhasīlañhi idha ‘‘sīla’’nti adhippetaṃ padhānabhāvato. Rūpādiārammaṇesu abhijjhādīnaṃ pavattinivāraṇasaṅkhātena manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ pidhānena indriyesu guttadvāro. Pariyesanādivasena bhojane pamāṇajānanena bhojane mattaññū. Vigatathinamiddho hutvā rattindivaṃ kammaṭṭhānamanasikāre yuttatāya jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto. Kathaṃ pana jāgariyānuyogo hotīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pubbarattā…pe… viharatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘kathañca pubbarattāpararattaṃ jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto hoti? Idha bhikkhu divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi cittaṃ parisodheti, rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ caṅkamena…pe… sodheti, evaṃ kho bhikkhu pubbarattāpararattaṃ jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto hotī’’ti (vibha. 519). Imasmiṃ panattheti ‘‘maññati, na maññatī’’ti ca vattabbabhāvasaṅkhāte atthe. No puthujjano adhippeto ‘‘appattamānaso, anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamāno’’ti ca vuttattā.
因为与意相应、在意的状态中存在,所以贪被称为“意所生”。如果把意本身就当作“意所”,那么心就是“意所”。再者,因为能毫无剩余地断除慢,所以最上的道称为“意所”。不过,由于阿拉汉果是由它(最上道)所生起的,所以应当知道阿拉汉果也具有“意所”这一层意义。“在众人中闻名”的意思是:在众人中、在一切众生世间里声名远播、广为人知。巴利
Sampayuttattā manasi bhavoti rāgo mānaso, mano eva mānasanti katvā cittaṃ mānasaṃ, anavasesato mānaṃ sīyati samucchindatīti aggamaggo mānasaṃ, tannibbattattā pana arahattassa mānasatā daṭṭhabbā. Janesutāti jane sakalasattaloke vissutā, patthaṭayasāti attho.
没有比这更高的,所以叫“无上”。而那个最殊胜的,必定是绝对无可比拟的,因此说“无上就是最胜、无可比拟”。“希求者”,就是正在渴爱的人。“虚妄愿求”,指由慢所生的种种虚妄计度。意思是说:凡在某个对象上生起渴爱、希求和虚妄计度,就正是在同一个对象上生起“我胜过他”之类的虚妄愿求。“已被动摇的”,就是被彻底浸染、左右。“于虚妄构造的诸境”,指被渴爱和邪见所虚构出来的种种所缘。“流”,指烦恼流。因为那烦恼流一旦断除,其余的流也就随之断除了。“已被摧坏的”,就是被毁灭的。而为了说明连令人毛发竖立的那一点点残余也不留下,所以说“已灭尽”,意思是令其完全无余。“由于信解,这里所指的希求变得明显”,所以说“倾向彼”,然而并非因为善欲即是信解。“信解者”,就是认可、接受。巴利
Natthi ito uttaranti anuttaraṃ. Taṃ pana sabbaseṭṭhaṃ hontaṃ ekantato sadisarahitameva hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ,asadisanti attho’’ti. Patthayamānassāti taṇhāyantassa. Pajappitānīti mānajappanāni. Yasmiñhi vatthusmiṃ taṇhāyanā patthayamānamaññanā sambhavati, tasmiṃyeva ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādīni pajappitāni sambhavantīti adhippāyo. Pavedhītanti parivāsitaṃ. Pakappitesūti taṇhādiṭṭhikappehi parikappitesu ārammaṇesu. Sotanti kilesasotaṃ . Tasmiñhi chinne itarasotaṃ chinnamevāti. Viddhastanti vināsitaṃ. Tañca kho lomahaṃsamattampi asesetvāti dassento āha ‘‘vinaḷīkata’’nti, vigatāvasesaṃ katanti attho. Adhimuttiyā idhādhippetapatthanā pākaṭā hotīti ‘‘tanninno’’tiādi vuttaṃ, na pana kusalacchandassa adhimuttibhāvato. Adhimuccantoti okappento.
对于一切行相都颠倒:意思是说,对于“净、乐、常”等一切应当执取的行相,由于它们全都以相反的面貌呈现,也就是毫无遗漏地执取与诸法自性相反的行相,这就是它的含义。以殊胜的智:不像非正知和邪知那样,既没有触及诸法的自性,也没有超越它,而是以不偏离、直接面对诸法自性的方式达到的殊胜智慧,也就是以知遍知为基础,包含度遍知和断遍知的一部分。因此他说“地……乃至……已说”。地的状态:指地当中应当被了知的状态。这里指的是相地,而它应当以“无常”等方式来了知。已了知后:就是以知遍知、度遍知、断遍知以及下位的道智,如此了知之后。认为我:由于未断除的妄想而执取“是我”,这叫mā;由于已断除的妄想而不再执取,这叫amaññī。他兼具mā和amaññī,所以叫māmaññī。这是从词的分拆来理解含义。其中,从“不认为”这一面来说,不能说他是“认为”。但从“认为”这一面来说,又不能说他是“不认为”。为了显示这种以遮止为主的含义,注疏中说“既不能说他认为,也不能说他不认为”。这里以遮止为主,应当理解为:即使还有妄想存在,也已经很微弱了。因此说“其余的则已变得微薄”。mā这个词是虚词,虚词有多种含义,所以根据这个意图说“在这个含义上安立这个词而说”。安立而说,意思是舍弃了通常区分等推断的方式,直接按照所说的含义如实显示出来。像凡夫一样:这里表明,他并没有以上位道所断的贪和慢来遮止妄想。巴利
Sabbākāraviparītāyāti ‘‘subhaṃ sukhaṃ nicca’’ntiādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ attanā gahetabbākārānaṃ vasena tabbiparītatāya, anavasesato dhammasabhāvaviparītākāragāhiniyāti attho. Abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇenāti asampajānanamicchājānanāni viya na dhammasabhāvaṃ appatvā nāpi atikkamitvā, atha kho avirajjhitvā dhammasabhāvassa abhimukhabhāvappattiyā abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena, ñātapariññādhiṭṭhānāya tīraṇapariññāya pahānapariññekadesena cāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘pathavīti…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Pathavībhāvanti pathaviyaṃ abhiññeyyabhāvaṃ. Lakkhaṇapathavī hi idhādhippetā, pariññeyyabhāvo panassā ‘‘aniccātipī’’tiādinā gahitoti. Abhiññatvāti ñātatīraṇapahānapariññāhi heṭṭhimamaggañāṇehi ca abhijānitvā. Māmaññīti appahīnānaṃ maññanānaṃ vasena māti maññatīti mā, pahīnānaṃ pana vasena na maññatīti amaññī, mā ca so amaññī ca māmaññīti evamettha padavibhāgato attho veditabbo. Tattha yena bhāgena amaññī, tena maññīti na vattabbo. Yena pana bhāgena maññī, tena amaññīti na vattabboti. Evaṃ paṭikkhepappadhānaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘maññī ca na maññī ca na vattabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭikkhepappadhānatā cettha labbhamānānampi maññanānaṃ dubbalabhāvato veditabbā. Tenevāha – ‘‘itarā pana tanubhāvaṃ gatā’’ti. Māti ca nipātapadametaṃ, anekatthā ca nipātāti adhippāyena ‘‘etasmiñhi atthe imaṃ padaṃ nipātetvā vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Nipātetvāti ca pakatiādivibhāganiddhāraṇe anumānanayaṃ muñcitvā yathāvutte atthe paccakkhatova dassetvāti attho. Puthujjano viyāti etenassa uparimaggavajjhataṇhāmānavasena maññanā na paṭikkhittāti dīpeti.
或者,“莫认为”这句话是用来否定虚妄分别的,就像“莫煮、莫衰老”这类说法一样,意思是“不应认为”。因为凡夫由于一切虚妄分别都未断除,只能说他在“认为”;而漏尽者由于一切虚妄分别都已断除,则完全不“认为”;但有学并不是这样。因为对他来说,一部分虚妄分别已断除,一部分尚未断除,所以由于兼具这两种情况,他既不能说是在“认为”,也不能说是不“认为”。难道不是因为他兼具两种情况,就可以从两方面来说吗?不可以。因为那些尚未断除的虚妄分别,在他身上也已经变得微薄,由于更明显的虚妄分别已不存在,仅凭那些微薄的虚妄分别,他也不会认为,更何况那些已断除的呢。因此世尊说:“莫认为。”所以论中说:“‘莫认为’这句话是用来否定虚妄分别的,就像‘莫煮、莫衰老’这类说法一样,意思是‘不应认为’。”不过,有学的这种“不认为”,是因为所依的对象仍属于应当被遍知,而不像无学那样,是因为已经遍知。因为当某事物决定性地必须被遍知、并且能够被遍知时,在这上面,凡夫式的认为就不可能生起,不会像在相反的情况下那样。因此他说:“我说那是应当被遍知的。”巴利
Atha vā mā maññīti parikappakiriyāpaṭikkhepavacanametaṃ ‘‘mā randhayuṃ, mā jīrī’’tiādīsu viya, na maññeyyāti vuttañhoti. Yathā hi puthujjano sabbaso appahīnamaññanattā ‘‘maññati’’cceva vattabbo, yathā ca khīṇāsavo sabbaso pahīnamaññanattā na maññati eva, na evaṃ sekkho. Tassa hi ekaccā maññanā pahīnā, ekaccā appahīnā, tasmā ubhayabhāvato ubhayathāpi na vattabbo. Nanu ca ubhayabhāvato ubhayathāpi vattabboti? Na. Yā hi appahīnā, tāpissa tanubhāvaṃ gatāti tāhipi so na maññeyya vibhūtatarāya maññanāya abhāvato, pageva itarāhi. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘mā maññī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mā maññīti parikappakiriyāpaṭikkhepavacanametaṃ ‘mā randhayuṃ, mā jīrī’tiādīsu viya, na maññeyyāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Ayañcassa amaññanā vatthuno pariññeyyattā, na asekkhassa viya pariññātattā. Yañhi ekantato parijānitabbaṃ parijānituṃ sakkā, na tattha tabbidhure viya puthujjanassa maññanā sambhavanti. Tenāha ‘‘pariññeyyaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti.
已入决定,是指已进入正性决定,也就是已踏上道流,这是它的意思。以正觉为归宿,是指以上层道的正觉为依靠,也就是为了证得它而倾向、低垂、朝向的状态。通过这两者,说明他必定会证得剩余的遍知。应遍知,是指作为应被遍知者而存在,或者能够被遍知。与它相反的,就是不应遍知。不像凡夫那样,这句话表明:这里所说的凡夫对于应遍知的状态根本不会有疑惑,因为他们没有资格。对于莫欢喜这句话,也应当按同样的方式来理解。巴利
Okkantaniyāmattāti anupaviṭṭhasammattaniyāmattā, otiṇṇamaggasotattāti attho. Sambodhiparāyaṇattāti uparimaggasambodhipaṭisaraṇattā, tadadhigamāya ninnapoṇapabbhārabhāvatoti attho. Ubhayenapi tassa avassaṃbhāvinī sesapariññāti dasseti. Pariññeyyanti parijānitabbabhāvena ṭhitaṃ, pariññātuṃ vā sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Tappaṭipakkhato apariññeyyaṃ. Puthujjanassa viyāti etena idhādhippetaputhujjanassa pariññeyyabhāvāsaṅkā eva natthi anadhikāratoti dasseti. ‘‘Mābhinandī’’ti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
漏尽者品第三等理趣的注释巴利
Khīṇāsavavāratatiyādinayavaṇṇanā
8 同类:因为具有见谛等共同性,所以叫同类。按照词源解释的方式说明了“远离烦恼所以称为阿拉汉”这个词的含义之后,为了使它和经文一致,就说了“此亦已说”等话。其中,“恶”:因为低劣,也因为能导致恶趣,所以叫恶。“不善”:因为有过失,也因为从不善巧所生,所以叫不善。“有杂染”:能导致杂染,或者系属于杂染,所以叫有杂染。“再有”:有造作后有的习性,或者能获得后有的果,所以叫再有。“有恼”:与恼害、热恼一起生起,所以叫有恼。“苦异熟”:这些异熟是苦的、辛辣的,或者彼等之异熟为难忍的,所以叫苦异熟。“生老死法”:因为使未来的生以及老死增长,所以叫生老死法。应当这样理解这些词的含义。虽然这是经的注释,但阿毗达摩的理趣是直接的,为了显示这一点,就说了“四漏”等。“已断已安息”:不只是彻底断尽,而且也已经安息,这是为了指出果的作用与道的作用相似。巴利
8.Sabhāgo diṭṭhasaccatādisāmaññena. Ārakā kilesehi arahanti padassa niruttinayena atthaṃ vatvā taṃ pāḷiyā samānento ‘‘vuttañceta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha pāpakāti lāmakaṭṭhena duggatisampāpanaṭṭhena ca pāpakā. Sāvajjaṭṭhena akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena ca akusalā. Saṃkilesaṃ arahanti, tattha vā niyuttāti saṃkilesikā. Punabbhavassa karaṇasīlā, punabbhavaphalaṃ arahantīti vā ponobhavikā. Saha darathena pariḷāhena pavattantīti sadarā. Dukkho kaṭuko, dukkhamo vā vipāko etesanti dukkhavipākā. Anāgate jātiyā ceva jarāmaraṇānañca vaḍḍhanena jātijarāmaraṇiyāti. Evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo. Kāmañcāyaṃ suttantavaṇṇanā, abhidhammanayo pana nippariyāyoti tena dassento ‘‘cattāro āsavā’’tiādimāha. Samucchinnā paṭippassaddhāti na kevalaṃ samucchinnā eva, atha kho paṭippassaddhāpīti maggakiccena sadisaṃ phalakiccampi niddhāreti.
以净戒等为基础,效仿尊长们的修行方式,这就是与尊长共住。圣道的修行本身就是与圣道共住。所谓十种圣者居处,就是指已断五支等。针对这些,曾这样说:巴利
Sīlavisodhanādinā garūnaṃ paṭipattiyā anukaraṇaṃ garusaṃvāso. Ariyamaggapaṭipatti eva ariyamaggasaṃvāso. Dasa ariyāvāsā nāma pañcaṅgavippahīnatādayo. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ –
比丘们,有十种圣者的住处,圣者们过去曾住过,现在正住着,将来也会住。是哪十种呢?比丘们,在这里,一位比丘断除了五种成分,具备了六种成分,拥有一重守护,具备四种依靠,舍弃了各自的偏见,完全放下了追求,思惟清净,身行轻安,心得善解脱,慧得善解脱。比丘们,这就是十种圣者的住处。巴利
‘‘Dasayime, bhikkhave, ariyāvāsā, ye ariyā āvasiṃsu vā āvasanti vā āvasissanti vā. Katame dasa? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti chaḷaṅgasamannāgato, ekārakkho, caturāpasseno, panuṇṇapaccekasacco, samavayasaṭṭhesano, anāvilasaṅkappo, passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro, suvimuttacitto, suvimuttapañño. Ime kho, bhikkhave, dasa ariyāvāsā’’ti (a. ni. 10.19).
“已住”是指圣道和圣果。阿拉汉因为具备这些,以强调的语气被称为“已住者”。所谓“应作”,说的是遍知、断除、修习、证悟。而这个应作之事,因为要通过四种圣道在四圣谛上完成,所以应当知道共有十六种。因此说“以四道所应作”。“正解脱者”,是指以最上道果之智,通过断尽和止息而完全解脱。“心寂静者”,是指正因为如此,一切烦恼的逼迫和热恼都已平息的心。“已破烦恼的漏尽比丘”,因为遍知等应作之事已经办完,不会再有造作,所以应作之事不复存在,也找不到。巴利
Vussatīti vā vusitaṃ, ariyamaggo, ariyaphalañca, taṃ etassa atthīti atisayavacanicchāvasena arahā ‘‘vusitavā’’ti vutto. Karaṇīyanti pariññāpahānabhāvanāsacchikiriyamāha. Taṃ pana yasmā catūhi maggehi catūsu saccesu kattabbattā soḷasavidhanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catūhi maggehikaraṇīya’’nti. Sammāvimuttassāti aggamaggaphalapaññāhi samucchedapaṭippassaddhīnaṃ vasena suṭṭhu vimuttassa. Santacittassāti tato eva sabbakilesadarathapariḷāhānaṃ vūpasantacittassa. Bhinnakilesassa khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno. Katassa pariññādikiccassa paṭicayo puna karaṇaṃ natthi, tato eva karaṇīyaṃ na vijjati na upalabbhati.
所谓“重担”,是因为它有让人沉下去的作用,所以像重担一样,就叫重担。正如经上说:“五蕴确实是重担”等等。所谓“依自己的如理作意”,是指系属于自己,因为属于自身相续,所以不离开自己。这一点虽然在一切没有过失的法里都可能存在,但在不动性、不退失之法中最殊胜的阿拉汉果里,才特别圆满,不是在其余地方。为了显示这个意思,所以说“或以自己的第一义”,意思是以最殊胜的状态。巴利
Bhārāti osīdāpanaṭṭhena bhārā viyāti bhārā. Vuttañhi ‘‘bhārā have pañcakkhandhā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.22). Attano yonisomanasikārāyattanti attupanibandhaṃ, sasantānapariyāpannattā attānaṃ avijahanaṃ. Tayidaṃ yadipi sabbasmiṃ anavajjadhamme sambhavati, akuppasabhāvāparihānadhammesu pana aggabhūte arahatte sātisayaṃ, netaresūti dassento āha ‘‘attano paramatthaṭṭhena vā’’ti, uttamaṭṭhabhāvenāti attho.
所谓“经说理趣”,其实就是“方便说理趣”。当以“无方便说”的方式显示诸结时,就说“有爱、嫉、悭结”,而不是说“色爱”等等。“于诸有中结缚”的意思是:它们成为烦恼、业、异熟轮转的缘,以不给予脱离的方式把人绑住。因为即使其他法有作为它们之缘的情况,若没有结,那些法也不可能成为它们的缘。而且,被下分结和上分结所摄的这些结,决定了各种有中生起之业的定则,也决定了有的定则;而已经断除结的人,即使曾造过业,那些业也不会再生起有。因此,应当只从这些结本身来理解“结”的意义。巴利
Suttantanayo nāma pariyāyanayoti nippariyāyanayena saṃyojanāni dassento ‘‘bhavarāgaissāmacchariyasaṃyojana’’nti āha, na pana ‘‘rūparāgo’’tiādinā. Bhavesu saṃyojantīti kilesakammavipākavaṭṭānaṃ paccayo hutvā nissarituṃ appadānavasena bandhanti. Satipi hi aññesaṃ tappaccayabhāve na vinā saṃyojanāni tesaṃ tappaccayabhāvo atthi, orambhāgiyauddhambhāgiyasaṅgahitehi ca tehi taṃtaṃbhavanibbattakakammaniyamo bhavaniyamo ca hoti , na ca upacchinnasaṃyojanassa katānipi kammāni bhavaṃ nibbattentīti tesaṃyeva saṃyojanaṭṭho daṭṭhabbo.
“正遍了知”:就是以能了知的最上道慧,正确地如实了知在苦等当中应当被了知的那个(对象),并且就这样了知了。“心解脱”:就是舍弃一切心的杂染。“涅槃胜解”:就是对涅槃胜解,倾向于它、朝向它、俯向它。“彼”:指地等(一切法)。“已遍知”:不像凡夫那样没有遍知,也不像有学那样还有待遍知。所以“因此”的意思,就是因为已经遍知了。巴利
Sammā aññāyāti ājānanabhūtāya aggamaggapaññāya sammā yathābhūtaṃ dukkhādīsu yo yathā jānitabbo, taṃ tathā jānitvā. Cittavimutti sabbassa cittasaṃkilesassa vissaggo. Nibbānādhimutti nibbāne adhimuccanaṃ tattha ninnapoṇapabbhāratā. Tanti pathavīādikaṃ. Pariññātaṃ, na puthujjanassa viya apariññātaṃ, sekkhassa viya pariññeyyaṃ vā. Tasmāti pariññātattā.
第四、第五、第六种模式之所以叫“涅槃模式”,是因为它们在各处都是围绕烦恼和涅槃来展开叙述的。其中,因为对地等已经遍知,所以是不思量;而那种遍知是通过贪等的灭尽而成就的。为了说明这个道理,经文才这样展开。开示这一点时说:“‘遍知了彼’应当与所有词连在一起,再接上‘由贪灭尽而离贪’,其余两种模式也应这样连接。”这里说的“其余”,就是指第五和第六种模式。如果真是这样,为什么经文里看不到这种连接呢?对此回答说:“因为在一处所说的开示,就等于在一切处都已说了,所以是简略说的。”巴利
Catutthapañcamachaṭṭhavārā tattha tattha kilesanibbānakittanavasena pavattattā nibbānavārā nāma. Tattha pathavīādīnaṃ pariññātattā amaññanā, sā pana pariññā rāgādīnaṃ khayena siddhāti imassa atthassa dīpanavasena pāḷi pavattāti dassento ‘‘pariññātaṃ tassāti sabbapadehi yojetvāpunakhayā rāgassa vītarāgattāti yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo itaresū’’ti āha. Tattha itaresūti pañcamachaṭṭhavāresu. Yadi evaṃ kasmā pāḷi evaṃ na dissatīti āha ‘‘desanā pana ekattha vuttaṃ sabbattha vuttameva hotīti saṃkhittā’’ti.
离贪并不是因为贪已经灭尽,因为他的贪还没有被彻底断除。这里说的是贪已被镇伏。这里提到外道,是因为这种状态在他们那里也能得到,而不是说只有他们才有这种状态。现在,为了说明即使不把“已遍知彼”和每一个词连起来,也能显示涅槃这一节的含义,所以说了“正如……”等话。其中,“于妄想而不妄想”的意思是妄想不再生起。虽然妄想仍可能被执取,但在这里,由于所妄想的事物已经包含在所缘之中,所以应当这样理解这里的含义。巴利
Na khayā rāgassa vītarāgo sabbaso appahīnarāgattā. Vikkhambhitarāgo hi soti. Bāhirakaggahaṇañcettha tathābhāvasseva tesu labbhanato, na tesu eva tathābhāvassa labbhanato. Idāni yā sā ‘‘pariññātaṃ tassā’’ti sabbapadehi yojanā vuttā, taṃ vināpi nibbānavāraatthayojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha maññanaṃ na maññatīti maññanā nappavattatīti attho. Maññanāya maññitabbattepi tassā vatthuantogadhattāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
即使开示涅槃的部分没有直接采用“遍知”这个词,但通过“灭尽”等词句,遍知的成就同样已经被显示出来了。那么,他们之间的差别到底在哪里呢?针对这个质疑,才说了“在此……”等话。这是为了显示道修习的圆满,因为道的最终作用就是遍知。其余……应当理解为对离贪等的说明。或者说,通过前面所说的两种原因来说明。所谓“两种原因”,就是前面提到的那两种。所谓“这位”,是指漏已尽的人。所谓“这个差别”,就是现在正在说的这个差别。虽然漏已尽的人绝对是离贪、离嗔、离痴的,但为了说明他们是依靠什么样的前行修行才被称为有差别的离贪等,才说了“在三者中……”等话。通过“染著者不了知义”等话观察贪的过患,认识到“贪是由贪著快乐而生起的,而快乐会变坏成为苦,其他就更不用说了”,这种对有因的贪观察过患,就是苦随观的所缘。苦随观因为与愿求对立,所以能圆满无愿解脱。因此说“于贪……成为离贪者”。同样,通过“嗔怒者不了知义”等话观察嗔的过患,认识到“嗔是缘于苦而生起的,这两者都不稳定、短暂、会坏灭”,这种对有因的嗔观察过患,就是无常随观的所缘。无常随观因为与常相等对立,所以能圆满无相解脱。因此说“于嗔……成为离嗔者”。同样,通过“愚痴者不了知义”等话观察痴的过患,认识到“痴就是偏离了如实把握事物”,这种对痴的调伏就是无我随观的所缘。无我随观因为与我执对立,所以能圆满空解脱。因此说“于痴……成为离痴者”。巴利
Yadipi pariññātapadaṃ aggahetvā nibbānavāradesanā pavattā, evampi ‘‘khayā’’tiādipadehi pariññāsiddhi eva pakāsīyatīti ko tesaṃ visesoti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Maggabhāvanāpāripūridassanatthaṃ vutto, maggakiccantā hi pariññāyoti adhippāyo. Itare…pe… veditabbā vītarāgādikittanatoti. Dvīhi vā kāraṇehīti yathāvuttakāraṇadvayena. Assāti khīṇāsavassa. Ayaṃ visesoti idāni vuccamāno viseso. Yadipi khīṇāsavo ekantena vītarāgo vītadoso vītamoho eva ca hoti, yāya pana pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya vītarāgatādayo savisesāti vattabbataṃ labhanti, taṃ dassento ‘‘tīsu hī’’tiādimāha . ‘‘Ratto atthaṃ na jānātī’’tiādinā (netti. 11) rāge ādīnavaṃ passato ‘‘rāgo ca nāma sukhābhisaṅgena uppajjati, sukhañca vipariṇāmato dukkhaṃ. Pageva itara’’nti sahetuke rāge ādīnavadassanaṃ dukkhānupassanāya nimittaṃ, dukkhānupassanā ca paṇidhiyā paṭipakkhabhāvato appaṇihitavimokkhaṃ paripuretīti āha ‘‘rāge…pe… vītarāgo hotī’’ti. Tathā ‘‘duṭṭho atthaṃ na jānātī’’tiādinā (itivu. 88) dose ādīnavaṃ passato ‘‘doso ca nāma dukkhaṃ paṭicca uppajjati, tañca ubhayaṃ anavaṭṭhitaṃ ittaraṃ pabhaṅgū’’ti sahetuke dose ādīnavadassanaṃ aniccānupassanāya nimittaṃ, aniccānupassanā ca niccanimittādīnaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato animittavimokkhaṃ paripūretīti āha ‘‘dose…pe… hotī’’ti. Tathā ‘‘mūḷho atthaṃ na jānātī’’tiādinā (itivu. 88) mohe ādīnavaṃ passato ‘‘moho nāma yathāsabhāvaggahaṇassa paribbhamanto’’ti mohassa vikkhambhanaṃ anattānupassanāya nimittaṃ, anattānupassanāya ca attābhinivesassa paṭipakkhabhāvato suññataṃ vimokkhaṃ paripūretīti āha ‘‘mohe…pe… vītamoho hotī’’ti.
如果离贪等是依照解脱的类别来说的,那就是这样。所谓“因此”,是因为没有按解脱门和解脱来限定之后再说,所以才说“因此”。凡是阿拉汉身上可能出现的任何情况,都要分别加以说明——这就是作了三次开示。为了显示这个意思,才说了“阿拉汉的……”等这些话。巴利
Evaṃ santeti yadi vītarāgatādayo vimokkhavibhāgena vuttā, evaṃ sante. Tasmāti yasmā vimokkhamukhavimokkhānaṃ vasena niyametvā na vuttaṃ, tasmā. Yaṃ kiñci arahato sambhavantaṃ vibhajitvā vuccatīti vārattayadesanā katāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yaṃ arahato’’tiādinā.
像这样,通过解脱的区分说明了漏尽者的区分,并且把它关联到三种开示上;现在,为了说明即使不加区分,在那里,遍知的领域和随眠的领域也各有区分,以及这种区分的依据,所以说了“以无差别……”等话。其中,特别说到:舍受是“行是苦”的愚痴依止,所以说“行……愚痴”。其余部分,因为和前面已说的方式相同,所以很容易理解。巴利
Evaṃ vimuttivibhāgena khīṇāsavassa vibhāgaṃ vārattayadesanānibandhanaṃ dassetvā idāni avibhāgenapi tattha pariññāvisayassa anusayavisayassa ca vibhāgaṃ tassa nibandhanaṃ dassento ‘‘avisesenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha upekkhāvedanā visesato saṅkhāradukkhaṃ sammohādhiṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāra…pe… moho’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva.
如来部第七理的注释巴利
Tathāgatavārasattamanayavaṇṇanā
12 世尊因为具备那些殊胜功德、以这些功德为标志,才被称为“如来”。为了说明这一点,才说“世尊以八种原因而称为如来”等等。其实,世尊的一切名称,都是以功德为标志的。正如所说的:巴利
12. Yehi (dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 1.7.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.170) guṇavisesehi nimittabhūtehi bhagavati ‘‘tathāgato’’ti ayaṃ samaññā pavattā, taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Guṇanemittakāneva hi bhagavato sabbāni nāmāni. Yathāha –
“ 大仙的种种名号多得数不清,每一个都跟他的功德相应。
以功德来命名,即使从上千个名号中选取也是如此。”巴利
‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1313; udā. aṭṭha. 53; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.76; dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 1.7.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.170) –
在“Tathā āgato”(如来)这个说法里,这里的“tathā”(如)一词,是通过确定特征来设立比喻的。“āgata”(来)一词,因为共相的表达要落在殊胜之处,所以是指依修行之道而“来”,不是像“tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato”(已来入真如之相)等句里那样指智的通达,也不是像“大沙门已来到摩揭陀国的耆利跋耆”等句里那样指身体的行来。在这里,当“如”一词的用意是通过确定特征来设立比喻时,因为以悲悯为上首,所以从大悲门,把过去诸佛的来路作为范例,从共相上加以显示。由于关系代词(yaṃ、taṃ)之间有必然的关联,所以先以普遍的方式说:“如同一切世间……都已到来”;接着,为了依据《大本经》等处多次详细宣说、广为人知又与我们邻近的维巴斯等六位正自觉者,把这条道显示得更清楚,于是说:“如同世尊维巴斯……”等等。这里的“以何种发愿”,是指具足人身、性别成就、因缘、见导师、出家、神通等功德成就、胜行、意欲这八个条件的“身决定”与“大决定”。因为一切正自觉者的身决定,正是以这种方式成就的。巴利
Tathā āgatoti ettha ākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhatīti paṭipādagamanattho āgata-saddo, na ñāṇagamanattho ‘‘tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.12; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.78; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170; udā. aṭṭha. 18; itivu. aṭṭha. 38; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.1.3; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 2.bāhiranidāna; mahāni. aṭṭha. 14) viya, nāpi kāyagamanādiattho ‘‘āgato kho mahāsamaṇo, māgadhānaṃ giribbaja’’ntiādīsu (mahāva. 63) viya. Tattha yadākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo, taṃ karuṇāppadhānattā mahākaruṇāmukhena purimabuddhānaṃ āgamanapaṭipadaṃ udāharaṇavasena sāmaññato dassento yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ ekantasambandhabhāvato ‘‘yathā sabbaloka…pe… āgatā’’ti sādhāraṇato vatvā puna taṃ paṭipadaṃ mahāpadānasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 2.4) sambahulaniddesena supākaṭānaṃ āsannānañca vipassīādīnaṃ channaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ vasena dassento ‘‘yathā vipassī bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yena abhinīhārenāti manussatta-liṅgasampatti-hetu-satthāradassana-pabbajjā-abhiññādiguṇasampatti-adhikāra-chandānaṃ vasena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena kāyapaṇidhānamahāpaṇidhānena. Sabbesañhi sammāsambuddhānaṃ kāyapaṇidhānaṃ imināva nīhārena samijjhatīti.
像这样,先按大誓愿的角度解释了“如来”这个词的含义,现在为了从圆满诸巴拉密的角度来说明,又说了“或者,如同维巴西世尊……乃至……如同迦叶世尊圆满了布施巴拉密之后……”等等。不过在这个地方,本来应该讲述巴拉密论,让经师们对大菩提乘的修行方式生起善巧;但这部份内容在《所行藏注》(所行藏·杂集论)里已经全面详尽地解说了,所以想了解的人,应该按照那里所说的方法来理解。正如过去维巴斯等正自觉者立足于誓愿成就,以极为清净的修行方式,毫无遗漏地圆满了一切巴拉密;同样,我们的世尊也圆满了。为了说明这个意思,才说“圆满了三十种巴拉密”。虽然舍弃肢节等行为本身就属于布施巴拉密,但为了显示这类布施的殊胜特征和极其难行的程度,特别单独列出了“五种大舍弃”;同样,为了显示它与舍弃肢节不同的特征,又特别列出了“施舍眼睛”;虽然同属放弃对事物的执著,但为了区别于舍弃财物和舍弃王位,又另外列出了“施舍妻子”。巴利
Evaṃ mahābhinīhāravasena ‘‘tathāgato’’ti padassa atthaṃ vatvā idāni pāramīpūraṇavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā dānapāramiṃ pūretvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne suttantikānaṃ mahābodhiyānapaṭipadāya kosallajananatthaṃ pāramīkathā vattabbā, sā pana sabbākārasampannā cariyāpiṭakavaṇṇanāya (cariyā. pakiṇṇakakathā) vitthārato niddiṭṭhā, tasmā atthikehi tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Yathā pana pubbe vipassīādayo sammāsambuddhā abhinīhārasampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhāya suvisuddhāya paṭipadāya anavasesato sammadeva sabbā pāramiyo paripūresuṃ, evaṃ amhākampi bhagavā paripūresīti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘samattiṃ sapāramiyo pūretvā’’ti. Satipi aṅgapariccāgādīnaṃ dānapāramibhāve pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca ‘‘pañca mahāpariccāge’’ti visuṃ gahaṇaṃ, tatoyeva ca aṅgapariccāgato visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇampi kataṃ, pariggahapariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi dhanarajjapariccāgato puttadārapariccāgaggahaṇañca kataṃ.
与圆满往返等义务的前行道一起,成就神通与等至,是前瑜伽;在布施等当中成就特别殊胜的修行,叫做前所行,这种所行收录在《所行藏》里。有些人说:发愿是前瑜伽,布施等实践,或者依身远离而独处修行,是前所行。为了阐明布施等、少欲等,以及轮回与涅槃的过患和利益,为了把众生安立、成熟于三种菩提而进行的说法,就是法开示。为亲属做利益之事,就是利益亲属行,那也完全是出于悲悯。“等”这个字包含了利益世间行等。依业属于自己的智而运作,通过对无过失的职业、技艺、学问的熟悉,通过对蕴、处等的熟悉,以及对三相的推察,这样的智慧运作就是智慧行;不过它实质上就是智慧巴拉密,只是为了显示智慧资粮才单独列出来。“俱胝”的意思是边际、极限,也就是“最高”的意思。巴利
Gatapaccāgatikavattapūraṇādikāya pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya saddhiṃ abhiññāsamāpattinipphādanaṃ pubbayogo, dānādīsuyeva sātisayapaṭipattinipphādanaṃ pubbacariyā, sā cariyāpiṭakasaṅgahitā. Abhinīhāro pubbayogo, dānādipaṭipatti, kāyavivekavasena ekacariyā vā pubbacariyāti keci. Dānādīnañceva appicchatādīnañca saṃsāranibbānesu ādīnavānisaṃsānañca vibhāvanavasena sattānaṃ bodhittaye patiṭṭhāpanaparipācanavasena ca pavattā kathā dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātīnaṃ atthacariyā ñātatthacariyā, sāpi karuṇāya vaseneva. Ādi-saddena lokatthacariyādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Kammassakatañāṇavasena, anavajjakammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānaparicayavasena khandhāyatanādiparicayavasena, lakkhaṇattayatīraṇavasena ca ñāṇacāro buddhicariyā, sā pana atthato paññāpāramīyeva, ñāṇasambhāradassanatthaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Koṭīti pariyanto, ukkaṃsoti attho.
修习、增长四念处,这是句子的连接关系。其中,修习是指使它们生起;增长是指使它们壮大。举出四念处等,是为了显示将修行之道推进到最终目标。或者,应当把四念处等理解为本身就与观相应。在这里,通过“以何种发愿”等语句,开示了修行之道的开端;通过“布施巴拉密”等语句,开示了中段;通过“四念处”等语句,开示了终点。巴利
Cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāvetvā brūhetvāti sambandho. Tattha bhāvetvāti uppādetvā. Brūhetvāti vaḍḍhetvā. Satipaṭṭhānādiggahaṇena āgamanapaṭipadaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dasseti. Vipassanāsahagatā eva vā satipaṭṭhānādayo daṭṭhabbā. Ettha ca ‘‘yena abhinīhārenā’’tiādinā āgamanapaṭipadāya ādiṃ dasseti, ‘‘dānapāramī’’tiādinā majjhaṃ, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne’’tiādinā pariyosānanti veditabbaṃ.
“刚出生”是指:才出生一小会儿,刚从人们手里脱出,而不是刚从母胎里出来。因为这位大士刚出胎时,先是梵天神们用金网接住;从他们手里,四大天王用羚羊皮垫接住;从他们手里,人们再用细布卷接住。从人们手里脱出后,他才站到地上。正如世尊在《大本经》的开示中所说。
“白伞盖”是指天界的白色宝盖。“被持举着”是指正被执持着。这里要知道,仅凭“伞盖”一词,实际上也已经包含了宝刀等五种标帜物。因为当时剑、拂尘、孔雀翎扇、椰子叶扇、头巾等,都和宝伞一起出现了,但当时只显现出伞盖等物,并没有显现出执持伞盖等物的人。
“一切方”是指十方。这遍观一切方的行为,不应理解为发生在行走七步之后。因为这位大士从人们手里脱出、站到地上后,便望向东方。那里的天与人以香、花等供养,说道:“大人,这里没有能与您相等的人,更不用说超过您的了!”他这样遍观了四方、四维、下方与上方的一切方向,在一切处都没看到有能与自己相等的人,于是说“这是北方”,便在那里以行走七步的方式前行。
“牛王”是指最上等。“最上”是指一切之中第一。“最长”和“最胜”也是同一个意思的异名。他宣说了:“这是我最后一生,从此不再有后有。”就在这个身体上,他宣称证得了应当证得的阿拉汉果。巴利
Sampatijātoti muhuttajāto manussānaṃ hatthato muttamatto, na mātukucchito nikkhantamatto. Nikkhantamattañhi mahāsattaṃ paṭhamaṃ brahmāno suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tesaṃ hatthato cattāro mahārājāno ajinappaveṇiyā, tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitoti. Yathāha bhagavā mahāpadānadesanāyaṃ. Setamhi chatteti dibbasetacchatte. Anudhārīyamāneti dhārīyamāne. Ettha ca chattaggahaṇeneva khaggādīni pañca kakudhabhaṇṭānipi vuttānevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Khaggatālavaṇṭamorahatthakavālabījanīuṇhīsapaṭṭāpi hi chattena saha tadā upaṭṭhitā ahesuṃ, chattādīniyeva ca tadā paññāyiṃsu, na chattādiggāhakā. Sabbā ca disāti dasapi disā. Nayidaṃ sabbadisāvilokanaṃ sattapadavītihāruttarakālaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimadisaṃ olokesi. Tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā, catasso anudisā; heṭṭhā, uparīti sabbā disā anuviloketvā sabbattha attanā sadisaṃ adisvā ‘‘ayaṃ uttarā disā’’ti tattha sattapadavītihārena agamāsi. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ. Aggoti sabbapaṭhamo. Jeṭṭho seṭṭhoti ca tasseva vevacanaṃ. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavoti imasmiṃ attabhāve pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ byākāsi.
以“作为众多殊胜证得的前兆”为理由,用“凡……”等语句来详细说明简要所说的义理。其中,“于此”是指——巴利
Anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvenāti saṃkhittena vuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yañhī’’tiādinā vitthārato dasseti. Tattha etthāti –
“ 有着许多枝干和上千个圆环。
天众在虚空中举着伞盖;
金柄拂尘来回拂动,
看不见拿拂尘和伞盖的人了。”巴利
‘‘Anekasākhañca sahassamaṇḍalaṃ, Chattaṃ marū dhārayumantalikkhe; Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā, Na dissare cāmarachattagāhakā’’ti. (su. ni. 693);
对于这首偈颂,一切知智本身因为在一切处都能无阻碍地运作,所以被称为无障智,因此说“获得一切知无障智”。同样,这位世尊也以……作为前兆而前往;以此说明,在降生时依自然法则而生起的种种殊胜,是一切菩萨所共通的。因为这些确实是巴拉密的果报。巴利
Imissā gāthāya. Sabbaññutaññāṇameva sabbattha appaṭihatacāratāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti āha ‘‘sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassā’’ti. Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato…pe… pubbanimittabhāvenāti etena abhijātiyaṃ dhammatāvasena uppajjanakavisesā sabbabodhisattānaṃ sādhāraṇāti dasseti. Pāramitānissandā hi teti.
“行走”是指前行。“天神”是指诸天神。“平等”是指因为观察时平等,所以相同、相似。因为大士看一个方向时,也同样看其余各个方向,他在观察上任何地方都没有障碍。或者,“平等”是指适合观察,也就是没有偏斜。因为那时,菩萨面前各方并没有显现出丑陋、可怖、不均衡而不适合观察的相。巴利
Vikkamīti agamāsi. Marūti devā. Samāti vilokanasamatāya samā sadisiyo. Mahāpuriso hi yathā ekaṃ disaṃ vilokesi, evaṃ sesadisāpi, na katthaci vilokane vibandho tassa ahosīti. Samāti vā viloketuṃ yuttā, visamarahitāti attho. Na hi tadā bodhisattassa virūpabībhacchavisamarūpāni viloketuṃ ayuttāni disāsu upaṭṭhahantīti.
像这样,先用“去”这个字从身体行走的意义上解释了“如来”这个词;现在为了从智慧行走的意义上说明它,就说了“或者”等话。其中,“以出离”是指以无贪为主的善心生起。因为在这里,善法就叫作出离,而不是指出家等;他们也说这是“初禅”。“舍离”就是舍弃。“去”是指证得、行道于更上的殊胜,这是它的意思。或者,“舍离”是指舍离的因,或者以舍离为特征。因为这里的“舍离”这个词含有因和相的意思。以舍离爱欲等为因,这里所说的“去”就是通达,或者只是行道,并且以舍离爱欲等为特征。对于“破开”等说法,也应当这样理解。“以无嗔”就是依于慈。“以光明想”就是通过让光明显著之后作意,以及让光明想现起。“以无散乱”就是依于定。“以法抉择”就是对善等诸法如实确定。他们也说:“以有因有缘的名色抉择。”巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘tathā gato’’ti kāyagamanaṭṭhena gata-saddena tathāgata-saddaṃ niddisitvā idāni ñāṇagamanaṭṭhena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha nekkhammenāti alobhappadhānena kusalacittuppādena . Kusalā hi dhammā idha nekkhammaṃ, na pabbajjādayo, ‘‘paṭhamajjhāna’’nti (dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 1.7.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.170) ca vadanti. Pahāyāti pajahitvā. Gato adhigato, paṭipanno uttarivisesanti attho. Pahāyāti vā pahānahetu, pahānalakkhaṇaṃ vā. Hetulakkhaṇattho hi ayaṃ pahāya-saddo. Kāmacchandādippahānahetukaṃ ‘‘gato’’ti hettha vuttaṃ gamanaṃ avabodho, paṭipatti eva vā kāmacchandādippahānena ca lakkhīyatīti. Esa nayo padāletvātiādīsupi. Abyāpādenāti mettāya. Ālokasaññāyāti vibhūtaṃ katvā manasikaraṇena (dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 1.7.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā) upaṭṭhitaālokasañcānanena. Avikkhepenāti samādhinā. Dhammavavatthānenāti kusalādidhammānaṃ yāthāvanicchayena. ‘‘Sappaccayanāmarūpavavatthānenā’’tipi vadanti.
像这样,通过舍断欲贪等五盖,依据“在世间舍离贪求”等经文所说的初禅前行道,显示了世尊的如来境界之后,现在为了连同方法一起,用八等至和十八大观来显示它,所以说了“以智”等话。因为,对于被名色执取和度疑所束缚的愚痴已经去除、安住在已知遍知中的人来说,无常想等就能成就;同样,在禅那和等至中,也能以欢喜为因的喜悦而成就。其中,“去除不喜乐后证得禅那等”是等至和观禅去除不喜乐、破除无明等的方法;而按照逆序的说明,应当理解为是为了显示属于盖之本质的无明也包含在更下面的诸盖之中。由于诸盖障碍进入等至安住,就像门扇一样,所以说“打开盖的门扇”。在“夜间寻思伺察后,白天从事工作”所说的场合,寻与伺被比喻为冒烟,所以说“寻与伺之烟”。虽然初禅的近行阶段就已经舍断了苦,第四禅的近行阶段就已经舍断了乐,但这里是针对更殊胜的舍断而说“以第四禅舍断乐与苦”。巴利
Evaṃ kāmacchandādinīvaraṇappahānena ‘‘abhijjhaṃ loke pahāyā’’tiādinā (vibha. 508) vuttāya paṭhamajjhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhagavato tathāgatabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni saha upāyena aṭṭhahi samāpattīhi aṭṭhārasahi ca mahāvipassanāhi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇenā’’tiādimāha. Nāmarūpapariggahakaṅkhāvitaraṇānañhi vinibandhabhūtassa mohassa dūrīkaraṇena ñātapariññāyaṃ ṭhitassa aniccasaññādayo sijjhanti, tathā jhānasamāpattīsu abhiratinimittena pāmojjena. Tattha ‘‘anabhiratiyā vinoditāya jhānādīnaṃ samadhigamo’’ti samāpattivipassanānaṃ arativinodanaavijjāpadālanādīni upāyo, uppaṭipāṭiniddeso pana nīvaraṇasabhāvāya avijjāya heṭṭhā nivaraṇesupi saṅgahadassanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Samāpattivihārappavesavibandhanena nīvaraṇāni kavāṭasadisānīti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā’’ti. ‘‘Rattiṃ anuvitakketvā anuvicāretvā divā kammante payojetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.251) vuttaṭṭhāne vitakkavicārā dhūmāyanāti adhippetāti āha ‘‘vitakkavicāradhūma’’nti. Kiñcāpi paṭhamajjhānupacāreyeva dukkhaṃ, catutthajjhānupacāre ca sukhaṃ pahīyati, atisayappahānaṃ pana sandhāyāha ‘‘catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāyā’’ti.
“无常”以及“以无常的方式随观”,就是无常随观;这是执取三界诸法的无常性而生起的观,这个名称就指它。“常想”:在有为法上,以“常、永恒”这种方式生起的错误想。应当知道,这是以想为代表,同时也包含了邪见之心。以下各项也应依此类推。“厌离随观”:在诸行上以厌离的方式生起的随观。“喜”:带有喜悦的渴爱。“离贪随观”:在诸行上以离贪的方式生起的随观。“灭随观”:对诸行之灭的随观。或者说,诸行确实灭尽,未来不再以再有之因而生起,这样随观就是灭随观。因此他说:“以灭随观而令灭,不是令生起。”因为这时想解脱的意欲已经变得强有力。“弃舍随观”:以弃舍的方式生起的随观,因为这是安住于审察。“执取”:以常等方式抓取。“密集想”:依相续、组合、作用、所缘,把一切执取为单一整体。“积集”:就是造作。“特殊状态的出现”:就是变异。“坚固想”:执取为稳固。“相”:依组合等密集,以及依各自作用的区分,对诸行执取为有形体。“愿求”:就是贪等愿望。从意义上说,它是出于渴爱而对诸行的执著。“执著”:就是我见。巴利
Aniccassa, aniccanti ca anupassanā aniccānupassanā, tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññanti saṅkhatadhammesu ‘‘niccā sassatā’’ti evaṃpavattamicchāsaññaṃ. Saññāsīsena diṭṭhicittānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbijjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nandinti sappītikataṇhaṃ. Virāgānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. Yathā vā saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva, āyatiṃ punabbhavavasena na uppajjanti, evaṃ anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Tenevāha ‘‘nirodhānupassanāya nirodheti, no samudetī’’ti. Muccitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattāti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā, paṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā hi ayaṃ. Ādānanti niccādivasena gahaṇaṃ. Santatisamūhakiccārammaṇānaṃ vasena ekattaggahaṇaṃ ghanasaññā. Āyūhanaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ. Avatthāvisesāpatti vipariṇāmo. Dhuvasaññanti thirabhāvaggahaṇaṃ. Nimittanti samūhādighanavasena sakiccaparicchedatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ saviggahaggahaṇaṃ. Paṇidhinti rāgādipaṇidhiṃ. Sā panatthato taṇhāvasena saṅkhāresu ninnatā. Abhinivesanti attānudiṭṭhiṃ.
以无常、苦等来审察一切法,这就是增上慧法观。执取坚实,是指在并非坚实的事物中执取为坚实,这是一种颠倒。认为世间是由自在天等所造而生的执著,就是痴执。不过有些人说:以“我过去世是否存在”等方式生起的疑惑,也是痴执。在诸行中执取庇护所和皈依处,就是阿赖耶执。根据“乐于阿赖耶、喜于阿赖耶”这句话,阿赖耶就是渴爱;有些论师说,这渴爱本身以执著的方式在眼等和色等中现起,就是阿赖耶执。了知“如是诸行被舍断”的智,就是审察随观。因为远离了轮回转起,所以叫离转起,也就是涅槃;在涅槃中以所缘作意的方式生起随观,就是离转起随观,也就是种姓智。结缚执,是指以结缚的方式住著于诸行。见相应,是指与见同生、同灭的同一处。粗,是相对于上上道所断的烦恼而说的;否则,以见道所断来说,第二道所断的也可称为粗。细随行,是指微细的烦恼,这是相对于下下道所断而言的。一切烦恼,是指剩余的一切烦恼。因为初道等已断的烦恼,不会再被断除。巴利
Aniccadukkhādivasena sabbadhammatīraṇaṃ adhipaññādhammavipassanā. Sārādānābhinivesanti asāresu sāraggahaṇavipallāsaṃ. Issarakuttādivasena loko samuppannoti abhiniveso sammohābhiniveso. Keci pana ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānantiādinā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) pavattasaṃsayāpatti sammohābhiniveso’’ti vadanti. Saṅkhāresu leṇatāṇabhāvaggahaṇaṃ ālayābhiniveso. ‘‘Ālayaratā ālayasammuditā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.64, 67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7, 8) vacanato ālayo taṇhā, sāyeva cakkhādīsu rūpādīsu ca abhinivisanavasena pavattiyā ālayābhinivesoti keci. ‘‘Evaṃvidhā saṅkhārā paṭinissajjīyantī’’ti pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanā. Vaṭṭato vigatattā vivaṭṭaṃ, nibbānaṃ, tattha ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātena anupassanena pavattiyā vivaṭṭānupassanā, gotrabhū. Saṃyogābhinivesanti saṃyujjanavasena saṅkhāresu nivisanaṃ. Diṭṭhekaṭṭheti diṭṭhiyā sahajātekaṭṭhe pahānekaṭṭhe ca. Oḷāriketi uparimaggavajjhakilese apekkhitvā vuttaṃ, aññathā dassanena pahātabbāpi dutiyamaggavajjhehi oḷārikāti. Aṇusahagateti aṇubhūte. Idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggavajjhe apekkhitvā vuttaṃ. Sabbakileseti avasiṭṭhasabbakilese. Na hi paṭhamādimaggehi pahīnā kilesā puna pahīyantīti.
坚硬性就是硬的状态。流动就是液体的状态。就像世间的风把风箱吹得鼓起来一样,那种风让各种色聚膨胀,或者变得僵硬,这就是支持性。即使在存在着其他色聚与其他色聚相接触时,各类色聚之间彼此分离,这色法的边界就是虚空。对于那些被划定了界限的色聚来说,它们是不接触虚空的。如果不是这样,那么色聚的界限自性就不可能成立,因为如果变成周遍的话,不接触就无法成立。正因为不周遍,所以才是不接触。在某个色聚中,色聚的界限与那些界的不接触状态,就是不接触相。因此世尊在解说虚空界时(《法集论》637)说:不被四大种所触。巴利
Kakkhaḷattaṃ kathinabhāvo. Paggharaṇaṃ dravabhāvo. Lokiyavāyunā bhastassa viya yena vāyunā taṃtaṃkalāpassa uddhumāyanaṃ, thaddhabhāvo vā, taṃ vitthambhanaṃ. Vijjamānepi kalāpantarabhūtānaṃ kalāpantarabhūtehi samphuṭṭhabhāve taṃtaṃbhūtavivittatā rūpapariyanto ākāsoti yesaṃ yo paricchedo, tehi so asamphuṭṭhova, aññathā bhūtānaṃ paricchedasabhāvo na siyā byāpībhāvāpattito, abyāpitāva asamphuṭṭhatāti yasmiṃ kalāpe bhūtānaṃ paricchedo, tehi asamphuṭṭhabhāvo asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ākāsadhātuniddese (dha. sa. 637) ‘‘asamphuṭṭhaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehī’’ti.
当与相违的缘会合时,生起不相似的状态,这就是“变坏”。因为思是主导,所以对于行蕴所摄的诸法,是依思的作用而说“诸行以造作为特相”。正如在经分别的行蕴分别中(《分别论》92),以“眼触所生的思”等语句,只对思作了分别。而思确实具有造作的特相。就像所说的:“其中,什么是福行?就是属于欲界的善思”等等。“遍满”就是广大的状态。“于无信”就是以无信为因,这里的格位表示原因。在“于懈怠”等语句中也是同样的道理。“寂止特相”是指身心热恼止息的特相。在远离昏沉掉举的增上心中生起时,由于对策励、抑制、令欢喜不加以干预,故为舍;由于审察截断偏执,故为舍。巴利
Virodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti ruppanaṃ. Cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhadhammānaṃ cetanāvasenetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇa’’nti. Tathā hi suttantabhājanīye saṅkhārakkhandhavibhaṅge (vibha. 92) ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā cetanāva vibhattā. Abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇā ca cetanā. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamo puññābhisaṅkhāro? Kusalā cetanā kāmāvacarā’’tiādi. Pharaṇaṃ savipphārikatā. Assaddhiyeti asaddhiyahetu. Nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Esa nayo kosajjetiādīsu. Upasamalakkhaṇanti kāyacittapariḷāhūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Līnuddhaccarahite adhicitte pavattamāne paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭatāya ajjhupekkhanaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ pakkhapātupacchedato.
正语以妄语等为对立面,因为妄语等的作用是欺骗等,性质粗涩,不能摄持;而正语的本性正好能摄持。由于正语性质柔润,它能摄持与它相应的法、以正语为缘的善说以及听法的人,所以说正语以摄持为特相。身体的行为能发起某些应当做的事,它本身生起就是行动,因此应当理解:名为正业的远离以发起为特相。或者说,它能提起并令生起相应诸法,就像身体的动作举起重物一样。对于活着的众生,或者对于相应诸法的命根持续,或者就活命本身而言,就是清净、净化。对于相应的心,不让它堕入杂染那一方,而是正确地把它提起来,这就是策励。巴利
Musāvādādīnaṃ visaṃvādanādikiccatāya lūkhānaṃ apariggāhakānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato pariggāhakasabhāvā sammāvācā siniddhabhāvato sampayuttadhamme sammāvācāpaccayasubhāsitānaṃ sotārañca puggalaṃ pariggaṇhātīti tassā pariggāhalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāyikakiriyā kiñci kattabbaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, sayañca samuṭṭhahanaṃ ghaṭanaṃ hotīti sammākammanta saṅkhātāya viratiyā samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā ukkhipanaṃ samuṭṭhāpanaṃ kāyikakiriyāya bhārukkhipanaṃ viya. Jīvamānassa sattassa, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā jīvitindriyappavattiyā, ājīvasseva vā suddhi vodānaṃ. Sasampayuttadhammassa cittassa saṃkilesapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sammadeva paggaṇhanaṃ paggaho.
这里说的“行”,指的是思。所以说“诸行的特相是思”。朝向,是面向所缘的状态。处,是生起、运作。因为心与心所法就是被称为“来”的东西,它们是依靠诸处才生起运作的。渴爱的因相,是指它是轮回生起的因;而道的因相,是指它能使人到达涅槃。这就是它们之间的差别。巴利
‘‘Saṅkhārā’’ti idha cetanā adhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇa’’nti. Namanaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhabhāvo. Āyatanaṃ pavattanaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ vasena hi āyasaṅkhātānaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ pavatti. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇanti vaṭṭassa janakahetubhāvo, maggassa pana nibbānasampāpakattanti ayametesaṃ viseso.
如实相就是不颠倒的自性。一味是彼此不超越、不增不减的状态。双运就是止和观。他们也说这是信与慧、策励与不散乱。巴利
Tathalakkhaṇaṃ aviparītasabhāvo. Ekaraso aññamaññānativattanaṃ anūnānadhikabhāvo. Yuganaddhā samathavipassanāva. Saddhāpaññā paggahāvikkhepātipi vadanti.
“已灭尽”是指烦恼被断除、被舍弃,所以是灭尽,也就是道。“不再生起”是指以不再生起为最终归宿,所以是不再生起,也就是果。“轻安”是烦恼的止息。“欲的”是指想要去做的欲。“根本特相”是作为立足处的状态。“生起的状态”是生起特相,因为能让所缘呈现出来,所以成为相应法生起的因。“结合”是指以境等聚集的方式应当被把握的样态,这被称为和合;或者说,相应法依它而平等地、一同地安立,所以叫结合,也就是触。“汇入”是指众法在这里聚集、会合。相应法如果离开受就不能运转,就好像是为了体验受而汇聚在一起那样,所以这样说。就像椽子以屋脊为顶端一样,相应法以它为最前的状态,就是“首领特相”。“从此更进一步”,是指相对于这些相应法来说,它更为殊胜、更为首要,因为善法以慧为最上。“解脱的”是指果。这个果因为是以戒等功德的精髓达到最高超的状态,所以是精髓。再者,应当知道,这些特相的分类,是依据六界、五禅支等,随顺各别经文的语句,以及古注所传的理路而说的。同样,某些先前已说过的法,为了显示另一种角度的理趣,也会再次被指出。正因如此,才依据经文语句“以欲为根的善法,从作意生起,以触为结合,以受为汇入”“善法以慧为最上”“此梵行以解脱为精髓”“梵行确实以涅槃为归宿,以涅槃为最终目的”等,而说了“欲的根本特相”等这些内容。巴利
Khīṇoti kilese khepatīti khayo, maggo. Anuppādapariyosānatāya anuppādo, phalaṃ. Passaddhi kilesavūpasamo. Chandassāti kattukāmatāchandassa. Mūlalakkhaṇaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvo. Samuṭṭhānabhāvo samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ ārammaṇapaṭipādakatāya sampayuttadhammānaṃ uppattihetutā. Samodhānaṃ visayādisannipātena gahetabbākāro, yā saṅgatīti vuccati. Samaṃ saha odahanti anena sampayuttadhammāti vā samodhānaṃ, phasso. Samosaranti sannipatanti etthāti samosaraṇaṃ. Vedanāya vinā appavattamānā sampayuttadhammā vedanānubhavananimittaṃ samosaṭā viya hontīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Gopānasīnaṃ kūṭaṃ viya sampayuttānaṃ pāmokkhabhāvo pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Tato, tesaṃ vā sampayuttadhammānaṃ uttari padhānanti tatuttari, paññuttarā hi kusalā dhammā. Vimuttiyāti phalassa. Tañhi sīlādiguṇasārassa paramukkaṃsabhāvena sāraṃ. Ayañca lakkhaṇavibhāgo chadhātupañcajhānaṅgādivasena taṃtaṃsuttapadānusārena porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatanayena ca katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi pubbe vuttopi koci dhammo pariyāyantarapakāsanatthaṃ puna dassito. Tato eva ca ‘‘chandamūlakā kusalā dhammā manasikārasamuṭṭhānā phassasamodhānā vedanāsamosaraṇā’’ti, ‘‘paññuttarā kusalā dhammā’’ti, ‘‘vimuttisāramidaṃ brahmacariya’’nti, ‘‘nibbānogadhañhi āvuso brahmacariyaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.466) ca suttapadānaṃ vasena ‘‘chandassa mūlalakkhaṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
所谓“如实法”,就是指四圣谛,因为它们的自性不颠倒。说“如”,是因为它们就是那样的自性。说“不虚妄”,是因为它们没有虚假的自性。说“不异”,是因为它们完全没有别的样子。关于“由生为缘而生起、集起的状态”:以生为缘,生起之后,对于具足自身缘的(老死),向上转起的状态,意思就是随转。或者也可以这样理解:生的状态和集起的状态合在一起,就是“生起集起的状态”。老死不会脱离生而存在,也不会离开生而从别的地方产生,这就是“由生为缘而生起”的意思。它这样从生而集起,所以叫“由生为缘而集起”,意思是:无论什么样的生、以什么样的方式作为缘,它就相应地显现出来。“无明是行的缘”这里也是一样:无明并非不是行的缘,行也不会在没有无明的情况下生起;无论什么样的无明,对于哪些行、以什么样的方式成为缘,这就是无明作为行的缘的状态,也就是缘性。巴利
Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni aviparītasabhāvattā. Tathāni taṃsabhāvattā. Avitathāni amusāsabhāvattā. Anaññathāni aññākārarahitattā. Jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭhoti jātipaccayā sambhūtaṃ hutvā sahitassa attano paccayānurūpassa uddhaṃ āgatabhāvo, anupavattanaṭṭhoti attho. Atha vā sambhūtaṭṭho ca samudāgataṭṭho ca sambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho, na jātito jarāmaraṇaṃ na hoti, na ca jātiṃ vinā aññato hotīti jātipaccayasambhūtaṭṭho. Itthañca jātito samudāgacchatīti jātipaccayasamudāgataṭṭho, yā yā jāti yathā yathā paccayo hoti, tadanurūpaṃ pātubhāvoti attho. Avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭhoti etthāpi na avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo na hoti, na ca avijjaṃ vinā saṅkhārā uppajjanti, yā yā avijjā yesaṃ yesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ yathā yathā paccayo hoti, ayaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho paccayabhāvoti attho.
世尊以一切方式了知它、彻见它,这就是它们之间的关联。“以此”指的是以此世尊。“这被分别的”应当这样配合理解。“它”指的是色处。“可爱、不可爱等”——“等”这个字包含了中性,也同样涵盖了过去、未来、现在、有限、内、外、彼两者等种种分类。依可获得的语句来说:从“色处是所见,声处是所闻,香处、味处、触处是所觉,一切色皆被意识所识知”这一说法可知,在色所缘上既能得到“所见”这个词,也能得到“所识知”这个词。色所缘是可爱、不可爱、中性、有限、过去、未来、现在、内、外、所见、所识知、色、色处、色界、色彩、有形象、可见、有对、青色、黄色等,它有这样许许多多的名称。巴利
Bhagavā taṃ sabbākārato jānāti passatīti sambandho. Tenāti bhagavatā. Taṃ vibhajjamānanti yojetabbaṃ. Tanti rupāyatanaṃ. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīti ādi-saddena majjhattaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, tathā atītānāgatapaccuppannaparittaajjhattabahiddhātadubhayādibhedaṃ. Labbhamānakapadavasenāti ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, saddāyatanaṃ sutaṃ, gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ mutaṃ, sabbaṃ rūpaṃ manasā viññāta’’nti (dha. sa. 966) vacanato diṭṭhapadañca viññātapadañca rūpārammaṇe labbhati, rūpārammaṇaṃ iṭṭhaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ majjhattaṃ parittaṃ atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā diṭṭhaṃ viññātaṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ rūpadhātu vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītakanti evamādīhi anekehi nāmehi.
“以十三种方式”这句话,是针对色蕴部分(《法集论》616节)中出现的十三种解说方式而说的。而在每一种方式中,又依据对四种、四种分别确定的理路,所以说“以五十二种理路”。这正是因为所见不颠倒,而且其教法不可退转。应当这样理解:说“我了知、我证知”,是通过显示智在现在时和过去时中的运作,来说明智在未来时也同样在运作。“识知”这个词,应当理解为不区分时间阶段,就像在“所见、所闻、所觉”等说法中那样。“不现起”是指不以我或我所的方式去执取。“如来”一词的成立应当这样理解:如同色所缘等诸法,具有怎样的自性、怎样的形态,他就那样去看、去知、去行,所以称为如来。不过也有人这样解释:依照语源学的方式,或者采用像“毕苏陀罗”那样的词形变化规则,省略了表示“见”的词根,再加上表示“来”的音素,从而构成“如来”这个称呼。巴利
Terasahi vārehīti rūpakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 616) āgate terasa niddesavāre sandhāyāha. Ekekasmiñca vāre catunnaṃ catunnaṃ vavatthāpananayānaṃ vasena ‘‘dvepaññāsāya nayehī’’ti āha. Tathameva aviparītadassitāya appaṭivattiyadesanatāya ca. ‘‘Jānāmi abhiññāsi’’nti vattamānātītakālesu ñāṇappavattidassanena anāgatepi ñāṇappavatti vuttāyevāti daṭṭhabbā. Vidita-saddo anāmaṭṭhakālaviseso veditabbo ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 966) viya. Na upaṭṭhāsīti attattaniyavasena na upagacchi. Yathā rūpārammaṇādayo dhammā yaṃsabhāvā yaṃpakārā ca, tathā ne passati jānāti gacchatīti tathāgatoti evaṃ padasambhavo veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘niruttinayena pisodarādipakkhepena (pāṇini 6.3.109) vā dassi-saddassa lopaṃ, āgata-saddassa cāgamaṃ katvā tathāgato’’ti vaṇṇenti.
因为没有过失,所以是无可指责的。因为没有需要添加的东西,所以是无不足。因为没有需要去除的东西,所以是无多余。因为义理和文句等方面都圆满具备,所以是一切行相圆满。说“并非其他”,就是用否定的方式来完成前面所说的“正是那样”这个意思。由此说明:为了什么目的而说,就一定会实现那个目的;因此,世尊所说的正如他所说的那样,这显示了他的说法是不颠倒的。由“说”这个含义,以此显示:他如实而说,所以称为如来。这里按照语源学的方式,把“达”音转成了“他”音。巴利
Niddosatāya anupavajjaṃ. Pakkhipitabbābhāvena anūnaṃ. Apanetabbābhāvena anadhikaṃ. Atthabyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ. No aññathāti ‘‘tathevā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ byatirekena sampādeti. Tena yadatthaṃ bhāsitaṃ, ekantena tadatthanipphādanato yathā bhāsitaṃ bhagavatā, tathevāti aviparītadesanataṃ dasseti. Gadaatthoti etena tathaṃ gadatīti tathāgatoti da-kārassa ta-kāro kato niruttinayenāti dasseti.
“他这样去”所以是如来。“去”指的是身体和语言的活动。当说“这样”的时候,由于“那”“彼”这些词有不违背的关联性,“随如”这个意思就自然显现出来了。为了说明身行和语行彼此随顺——想说话的时候,身体与语言、语言与身体,以相互关联的方式一起呈现——为了说明这个意思,所以说“因为世尊……”等等。在这个含义里,由于他是那样说的人,“如来”这个意思也成立。而这个意思前面已经用另一种方式说明了,所以说“像这样,因为他是那样做的人,所以是如来”。巴利
Tathā gatamassāti tathāgato. Gatanti ca kāyavācāpavattīti attho. Tathāti ca vutte yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ abyabhicārisambandhitāya yathāti ayamattho upaṭṭhitoyeva hoti, kāyavacīkiriyānañca aññamaññānulomena vacanicchāyaṃ kāyassa vācā, vācāya ca kāyo sambandhībhāvena upatiṭṭhatīti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ pana atthe tathāvādītāya tathāgatoti ayampi attho siddho hoti. So pana pubbe pakārantarena dassitoti āha ‘‘evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato’’ti.
横向有无量的世界界这句话,否定了有些人说的像横向一样,上方和下方也有世界界。这只是说法庄严所成,也就是说法庄严所成,就像福德所成布施所成等说法中的用法一样。巴利
Tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsūti etena yadeke ‘‘tiriyaṃ viya upari adho ca santi lokadhātuyo’’ti vadanti, taṃ paṭisedheti. Desanāvilāsoyeva desanāvilāsamayo yathā ‘‘puññamayaṃ, dānamaya’’ntiādīsu.
当不变词与能诠词放在一起时,因为不变词是以显示该词含义的方式出现的,所以“gata”这个词本身就既表示“已了知”的意思,也表示“已过去”的意思。因此说:“gato”就是已了知、已过去。巴利
Nipātānaṃ vācakasaddasannidhāne tadatthajotanabhāvena pavattanato gata-saddoyeva avagatatthaṃ atītatthañca vadatīti āha ‘‘gatoti avagato atīto’’ti.
或者,从最初发愿开始,一直到成正觉,在这整个过程中,因为在大菩提乘的修行路上,不存在退失、停滞、杂染和退转,所以他按照当初的发愿去修行,随顺发愿而行,因此称为如来。或者,因为他具有大神通,达到了无碍解的最高成就,又具备无障智,在任何地方都没有障碍,所以他的身、语、意都随他的意愿而行、而运作、而生起,因此称为如来。又因为在世间,“种类”“相应”“已去”“方式”这些词被认为是同义的,所以就像维巴西佛等世尊是那种类型,这位世尊也是那种类型,因此称为如来;就像那些世尊是那样相应的,这位世尊也是那样相应的,因此称为如来。或者,因为“真实、如实、如是”是智慧的同义词,他以如是之智慧而来,所以称为如来。“如来”这个词的含义,也应该这样理解。巴利
Atha vā abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva sammāsambodhi, etthantare mahābodhiyānapaṭipattiyā hānaṭṭhānasaṃkilesanivattīnaṃ abhāvato yathā paṇidhānaṃ, tathā gato abhinīhārānurūpaṃ paṭipannoti tathāgato. Atha vā mahiddhikatāya paṭisambhidānaṃ ukkaṃsādhigamena anāvaraṇañāṇatāya ca katthacipi paṭighātābhāvato yathā ruci, tathā kāyavacīcittānaṃ gatāni gamanāni pavattiyo etassāti tathāgato. Yasmā ca loke vidha-yutta-gata-ppakāra-saddā samānatthā dissanti. Tasmā yathāvidhā vipassīādayo bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tathāvidhoti tathāgato, yathāyuttā ca te bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tathāyuttoti tathāgato. Atha vā yasmā saccaṃ tacchaṃ tathanti ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā tathena ñāṇena āgatoti tathāgato. Evampi tathāgata-saddassa attho veditabbo.
舍弃了欲贪等污垢之后,像那样而去。
以定与智(具足)的维巴西佛等
伟大的修行者释迦牟尼,光辉的持有者,
如是而去,因此被认为是如来。
如是,界、处等的特相,
依自性与共性的分别而区分。
胜者以自证自悟的智慧而圆满具足,
如来,就称为释迦族中最杰出者。
以遍一切的眼,如实了知那些真理,
同样地,此缘性也完全地。
因为已经通过不依赖他人的智慧把它完全显明,
那位胜者正是如其所是的那位如来。
纵于种种差别之世间界,
胜者之行境,以色处等为所行。
同样以种种差别而见。
如来因此被称为具普眼者。
当他如实宣说正法,
他的行为随顺自己的言语。
以功德征服世间而行。
如来也同样是世间的导师。
按照他本来的发愿,按照他自己的喜好,
言语的运作,因为心的状态微细。
就像从前那些大仙以某种方式……
那位胜者就是这样,所以称为如来。巴利
Pahāya kāmādimale yathā gatā, Samādhiñāṇehi vipassiādayo; Mahesino sakyamunī jutindharo, Tathā gato tena mato tathāgato. Tathañca dhātāyatanādilakkhaṇaṃ, Sabhāvasāmaññavibhāgabhedato; Sayambhuñāṇena jino samāgato, Tathāgato vuccati sakyapuṅgavo. Tathāni saccāni samantacakkhunā, Tathā idappaccayatā ca sabbaso; Anaññaneyyena yato vibhāvitā, Yāthāvato tena jino tathāgato. Anekabhedāsupi lokadhātusu, Jinassa rūpāyatanādigocare; Vicitrabhedaṃ tathameva dassanaṃ, Tathāgato tena samantalocano. Yato ca dhammaṃ tathameva bhāsati, Karoti vācāyanulomamattano; Guṇehi lokaṃ abhibhuyyirīyati, Tathāgato tenapi lokanāyako. Yathābhinīhāramato yathāruci, Pavattavācā tanucittabhāvato; Yathāvidhā yena purā mahesino, Tathāvidho tena jino tathāgatoti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 38; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7 cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā);
“Ārakattā”等词句的含义,应当完全按照《清净道论》(visuddhi. 1.125)中佛随念注释所说的方式来理解。通过“正确且完全地是一切法的觉者”这一句,说明他证得了被称为无碍智的一切知智——这种智不依赖他人的教导,能够以一切方式觉悟一切法,并且只在有意愿时才运作。巴利
Ārakattātiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.125) buddhānussatisaṃvaṇṇanāya vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattāti imināssa paropadesarahitassa sabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa adhigamo dassito.
难道《如是语注》第38段说,无碍智不同于一切知智,这样不就矛盾了吗?如果真是这样,那么“六种不共智就是佛智”这句话就说不通了。其实并不矛盾。这是为了从所缘范围和生起方式的差别上,说明它们与其他不共智的不同,而对同一个智作了两种表述。因为那同一个智,以无余的有为法、无为法和假立法为所缘,所以叫一切知智;而在其中,由于没有障碍、运行无滞,所以叫无碍智。正如《无碍解道》1.119所说:“能知一切有为、无为、无余,所以叫一切知智;其中没有障碍,所以叫无碍智。”因此,二者在意义上并没有差别。必须这样理解,否则一切知智和无碍智就会有障碍,也不会以一切法为所缘。因为世尊的智连极微小的障碍都没有;如果无碍智不以一切法为所缘,那么它不运作的地方就有障碍存在,这样它就不能成为无碍了。或者,就算承认无碍智与一切知智是各自不同的,但在这里,由于它在一切处都无碍地运作,所以这里所说的无碍智,指的就是一切知智本身。正因为证得了这个智,世尊才被称为一切知者、一切见者、正自觉者,而不是因为一次就通达了一切法。同样,《无碍解道》1.162也说:“诸佛、世尊在菩提树下,与一切知智同时获得、现证、安立此解脱究竟智,这就是‘佛’。”因为证得了能通达一切法的智,世尊的心相续中才有了无余地通达一切法的能力。巴利
Nanu ca (itivu. aṭṭha. 38) sabbaññutaññāṇato aññaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, aññathā cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni buddhañāṇānīti vacanaṃ virujjheyyāti? Na virujjhati visayappavattibhedavasena aññehi asādhāraṇañāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ ekasseva ñāṇassa dvidhā vuttattā. Ekameva hi taṃ ñāṇaṃ anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammavisayatāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha ca āvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgacāramupādāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti vuttaṃ. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.119) ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatamanavasesaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tatthāvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi, tasmā natthi nesaṃ atthato bhedo, ekantena cetaṃ evamicchitabbaṃ, aññathā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇānaṃ sāvaraṇatā asabbadhammārammaṇatā ca āpajjeyya. Na hi bhagavato ñāṇassa aṇumatampi āvaraṇaṃ atthi, anāvaraṇañāṇassa ca asabbadhammārammaṇabhāve yattha taṃ nappavattati, tatthāvaraṇasabbhāvato anāvaraṇabhāvoyeva na siyā. Atha vā pana hotu aññameva anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇato, idha pana sabbattha appaṭihatavuttitāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti sabbaññutaññāṇameva adhippetaṃ, tassa cādhigamena bhagavā sabbaññū sabbavidū sammāsambuddhoti ca vuccati, na sakimeva sabbadhammāvabodhato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.162) ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddho’’ti. Sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthañāṇasamadhigamena hi bhagavato santāne anavasesadhamme paṭivijjhituṃ samatthatā ahosīti.
这里有人问:那么,这智在运作时,是一次就作用于一切所缘,还是依次第而运作呢?对此又该怎么说呢?如果它一次就作用于一切所缘,那么,当以过去、未来、现在、内、外等差别而分开的诸有为法,以及无为法和假立法,同时呈现时,就会像远远地看一幅图画那样,无法分辨清楚了知。这样一来,就有这样的过失:如同修观的人以“一切法无我”的无我相来观照那样,世尊的智也会以未经分辨的形态,把一切法当作所缘。有些人说:“诸佛的智恒时以一切可知法的住立相为所缘,远离分别而运作,因此他们被称为一切知者。这样一来,‘行走时入定的龙,站立时也入定’这句话也就成为善说了。”他们的说法同样不能避免上述过失。因为如果是以住立相为所缘,那么过去法、未来法和假立法就没有住立相,这样一来,世尊的智就只能以一部分为所缘了。所以,“智一次就运作”是不合理的。巴利
Etthāha – kiṃ panidaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattamānaṃ sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, udāhu kamenāti. Kiñcettha – yadi tāva sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, atītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhādibhedena bhinnānaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ asaṅkhatasammutidhammānañca ekajjhaṃ upaṭṭhāne dūrato cittapaṭaṃ avekkhantassa viya paṭivibhāgenāvabodho na siyā, tathā ca sati ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ anattākārena viya sabbe dhammā anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇassa visayā hontīti āpajjati. Yepi ‘‘sabbañeyyadhammānaṃ ṭhitalakkhaṇavisayaṃ vikapparahitaṃ sabbakālaṃ buddhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tena te sabbavidūti vuccanti. Evañca katvā ‘caraṃ samāhito nāgo, tiṭṭhantopi samāhito’ti idampi vacanaṃ suvuttaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, tesampi vuttadosānativatti. Ṭhitalakkhaṇārammaṇatāya hi atītānāgatasammutidhammānaṃ tadabhāvato ekadesavisayameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ siyā, tasmā sakiṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti na yujjati.
那么,如果认为智是依次在一切对象上生起的,这也不合理。因为所知的对象由于种类、地域、本质等方面的差别,以及方位、处所、时间等方面的差别,有着种种不同;如果依次去把握,由于所知的对象没有边际,就不可能对它毫无遗漏地完全通达。有些人说:“由于不违背真实义,先现见所知对象的一部分,然后以胜解认定其余部分也是如此,通过这样的确定,世尊便是一切知者;而且这种智不是推论性的智,因为它没有疑惑。而世间的推论之智总是伴随着疑惑。”这种说法也不合理。因为如果并非一切对象都是现见的,那么通过不违背真实义,先现见一部分,再以胜解认定其余部分也是如此,这种确定就无法成立。因为被称为“其余”的那部分,就是非现见的;如果那部分也是现见的,那它就不可能是“其余”的部分了。所有这些说法都站不住脚。为什么?因为这是不应思议的领域。世尊确实说过:“比丘们,佛陀的境界是不应思议的,不应去思惟。如果有人去思惟,他就会陷入迷乱和苦恼。”(《增支部》4.77)在这里应当确定的是:无论世尊想要了知的是全部还是一部分,由于他的智运作无碍,所以能直接现证;又因为他恒常处于定中,没有散乱。而如果他想了知的对象在整体上不是他的智所能触及的,那他的了知就不可能随他的意愿而运作。而他的了知一定是随他的意愿而运作的,因为经中说:“一切法都是随佛陀世尊的作意而运作的,随他的意愿而运作的,随他的注意而运作的,随他的心生起而运作的。”(《大义释》69, 156;《小义释》85;《无碍解道》3.5)世尊的智对于过去和未来的对象,也同样是直接现证的,因为它不依赖推论、传承和推理来把握。巴利
Atha kamena sabbasmiṃ visaye ñāṇaṃ pavattati, evampi na yujjati. Na hi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne neyye kamena gayhamāne tassa anavasesapaṭivedho sambhavati apariyantabhāvato ñeyyassa. Ye pana ‘‘atthassa avisaṃvādanato ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanena sabbaññū bhagavā, tañca ñāṇaṃ ananumānikaṃ saṃsayābhāvato. Saṃsayānubandhañhi loke anumānañāṇa’’nti vadanti, tesampi taṃ na yuttaṃ. Sabbassa hi appaccakkhabhāve atthassa avisaṃvādanena ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanassa asambhavato. Yañhi taṃ sesaṃ, taṃ appaccakkhanti. Atha tampi paccakkhaṃ, tassa sesabhāvo eva na siyāti? Sabbametaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Avisayavicāraṇabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘buddhavisayo bhikkhave, acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yo cinteyya, ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ sakalamekadeso vā, tattha appaṭihatavuttitāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati, niccasamādhānañca vikkhepābhāvato, ñātuṃ icchitassa ca sakalassa avisayabhāve tassa ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhavuttitā na siyā, ekanteneva ca sā icchitabbā ‘‘sabbe dhammā buddhassa bhagavato āvajjanapaṭibaddhā ākaṅkhapaṭibaddhā manasikārapaṭibaddhā cittuppādapaṭibaddhā’’ti (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato. Atītānāgatavisayampi bhagavato ñāṇaṃ anumānāgamatakkagahaṇavirahitattā paccakkhameva.
难道在这个主张下,当世尊想一次性了知全部时,他的智就会以整体为所缘、以尚未分辨的形态生起,因此还是逃不过前面说的过失吗?不是的,因为那个领域已经被净化了。这个佛的境界被净化了,所以说是不可思议的。否则,如果诸佛世尊的智跟普通人的智一样运作,那它就不会有不可思议的性质了。因此,即使以一切法为所缘,它也能像以单一法为所缘那样,把那些法完全清晰地确定下来之后才生起——这就是此处不可思议的地方,而且智跟所知一样没有边际。正如经中所说:“所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少;智以所知为边界,所知以智为边界。”同样,无论是整体地、个别地、一次性还是按顺序,都能随其所愿,由自己正确地觉悟一切法,所以称为正自觉者。巴利
Nanu ca etasmimpi pakkhe yadā sakalaṃ ñātuṃ icchitaṃ, tadā sakiṃyeva sakalavisayatāya anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavatteyyāti vuttadosānativattiyevāti? Na, tassa visodhitattā. Visodhito hi so buddhavisayo acinteyyoti. Aññathā pacurajanañāṇasamānavuttitāya buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ ñāṇassa acinteyyatā na siyā, tasmā sakaladhammārammaṇampi taṃ ekadhammārammaṇaṃ viya suvavatthāpiteyeva te dhamme katvā pavattatīti idamettha acinteyyaṃ, anantañca ñāṇaṃ ñeyyaṃ viya. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyya’’nti (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Evamekajjhaṃ, visuṃ sakiṃ, kamena vā icchānurūpaṃ sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho.
所谓“那”,就是指前面所说的地大等类别。“遍知了”的意思是:周遍地、完全地、从一切方面了知,也就是说,对于应当遍知的法,没有任何剩余地全部了知。为了说明“遍知了”这个词所表达的正是这个含义,所以说了“遍知了名为……”等话。“以各各之道断除烦恼没有差别”这句话,是就诸佛与声闻应当断除的烦恼,都是通过各自相应的那条道来断除这一点上的共通性而说的,并不是说声闻和诸佛在断除烦恼上没有差别。因为只有正自觉者才能连习气烦恼一起断尽,声闻则不能。“仅一分的”,是指仅限自身相续中的法。即使仅仅遍知了自己相续所摄的法,四谛业处的修习也能成就。因此说:“正是在这具有想与意、仅一寻大的身躯中,我宣说世间,也宣说世间的集起”等等。微尘量……也没有,他们说,因为佛陀的大金刚智是以三十六万亿种方式生起的。巴利
Tanti yathāvuttaṃ pathavīādibhedaṃ. Pariññātanti parito samantato sabbākārato ñātaṃ, taṃ parijānitabbabhāvaṃ kiñci asesetvā ñātanti attho. Ayameva hi attho ‘‘pariññātanta’’nti imināpi padena pakāsitoti dassento ‘‘pariññātantaṃ nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tena tena maggena kilesappahānena viseso natthīti idaṃ taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ buddhānaṃ sāvakānañca tena tena maggeneva pahātabbabhāvasāmaññaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sāvakehi buddhānaṃ kilesappahānavisesābhāvato. Tathā hi sammāsambuddhā eva savāsanakilese jahanti, na sāvakā. Ekadesamevāti attano santānagatameva. Sasantatipariyāpannadhammapariññāmattenapi hi catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanā samijjhati. Tenevāha – ‘‘imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññapemi lokasamudayañca paññapemī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45). Aṇuppamāṇampi…pe… natthi, yato chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena buddhānaṃ mahāvajirañāṇaṃ pavattatīti vadanti.
如来品第八种方式的注释巴利
Tathāgatavāraaṭṭhamanayavaṇṇanā
13 前际渴爱:就是在过去诸有中产生、并且成为现在这个生命体之因的渴爱。通过把握这个词,就应该理解:属于过去一类的无明和行,连同取也一起被包含进来了。这里:指“从有而有生”这一句。以那个再生有:指“从有而有生”这句话中,以“生”这个名目所说的那个再生有。已生者的:指已经出生的。然而,因为他被称为众生,所以表述为“众生的”。这样了知之后:这是表明,在“已生者有老死”这一句中,也应该把“这样了知”这个短语引过来,结合起来理解。巴利
13.Purimataṇhāti purimataresu bhavesu nibbattā paccuppannattabhāvahetubhūtā taṇhā. Taggahaṇeneva ca atītaddhasaṅgahā avijjāsaṅkhārā saddhiṃ upādānena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā. Etthāti ‘‘bhavā jātī’’ti etasmiṃ pade. Tena upapattibhavenāti ‘‘bhavā jātī’’ti jātisīsena vuttaupapattibhavena. Bhūtassāti nibbattassa. So pana yasmā satto nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sattassā’’ti. Evañca jānitvāti iminā ‘‘bhūtassa jarāmaraṇa’’nti etthāpi ‘‘iti viditvā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbanti dasseti.
三界的取蕴虽然也应该按照“凡是任何色……”等的方式(《分别论》2;《中部》1.244),归入十一种场合中并加以审察,然而,因为世尊是以“因什么存在而老死存在?以什么为缘而有老死?”等的方式(《长部》2.57;《相应部》2.4、10),从缘起的角度来审察它们的,而缘起作为流转和流转之因,只属于前二谛,所以,为了阐明“缘起的现观就是由于没有妄想而通达缘相”,他说了“在菩提树下……显示……”等话。
“略说”:在这里,无明等和识等就是略说;或者说,过去因等以“因、果”的方式被略摄,所以是略说。略说这个词应当看作“部分”的同义词。因此说“部分,就是这个意思”。而在这些当中,过去因是略说,现在果是略说,现在因是略说,未来果是略说,这样就有四个略说,这就是“四略说”。因与果的连接、果与因的连接、再次因与果的连接,这样就有三个连接,这就是“三连接”。过去、现在、未来的差别就是三时,这就是“三时”。虽然从各自的具体形态上没有说出来,但在每一个略说中它们都被散布出来,通过无明、行等的列举而被显示出来,所以是“行相”;或者说,过去因等的种种样式就是行相,在每一个略说中各五个,共二十个行相,这就是“二十行相”。巴利
Yadipi tebhūmakā upādānakkhandhā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpa’’ntiādinā (vibha. 2; ma. ni. 1.244) ekādasasu okāsesu pakkhipitabbā sammasitabbā ca, te pana yasmā bhagavatā ‘‘kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, kiṃpaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4, 10) paṭiccasamuppādamukhena sammasitā, paṭiccasamuppādo ca pavattipavattihetubhāvato purimasaccadvayameva hoti, tasmā tadabhisamayaṃ ‘‘maññanābhāvahetu paccayākārapaṭivedho’’ti vibhāvento ‘‘yaṃ bodhirukkhamūle…pe… dassento’’ti āha. Saṃkhippanti ettha avijjādayo viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepā, atīte hetuādayo ‘‘hetu, phala’’nti evaṃ saṃkhippantīti vā saṅkhepā, avijjādayo viññāṇādayo ca. Saṅkhepa-saddo bhāgādhivacananti daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha ‘‘koṭṭhāsāti attho’’ti. Te pana atīte hetusaṅkhepo, etarahi phalasaṅkhepo, etarahi hetusaṅkhepo, āyatiṃ phalasaṅkhepoti cattāro saṅkhepā etassāti catusaṅkhepo, taṃ catusaṅkhepaṃ. Hetuphalasandhi, phalahetusandhi, puna hetuphalasandhīti evaṃ tayo sandhī etassāti tisandhi, taṃ tisandhiṃ. Atītapaccuppannānāgatabhedā tayo addhā etassāti tiyaddho, taṃ tiyaddhaṃ. Sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅkhepe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atītahetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā, te ekekasaṅkhepe pañca pañca katvā vīsati ākārā etassāti vīsatākāro, taṃ vīsatākāraṃ.
这“一切”就是指这种四略说等分类的全部,没有剩余的任何一种缘。所谓“以缘相”,意思是以缘的状态,也就是作为它自己果——结生识——的缘的状态;所谓“以不离相”,就是这个意思。因为就像没有渴爱,无明等就不会成为识的缘一样,没有无明等,渴爱也不会成为识的缘。在这里,通过“苦”这个说法,识、名色、六处、触、受已经被包含在内;通过“有”这个说法,渴爱、行、取也已经被包含在内。这个道理前面已经说过,所以不再重复。巴利
Esasabboti esa catusaṅkhepādipabhedo anavaseso paccayo. Paccayalakkhaṇenāti paccayabhāvena attano phalassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccayabhāvena, avinābhāvalakkhaṇenāti attho. Yathā hi taṇhaṃ vinā avijjādayo viññāṇassa paccayā na honti, evaṃ taṇhāpi avijjādike vināti. Ettha dukkhaggahaṇena viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanānaṃ, bhavaggahaṇena ca taṇhāsaṅkhārupādānānaṃ gahitatā vuttanayā evāti na uddhaṭā.
现在,为了用《无碍解道》的经文来说明那二十种行相,所以说了“如是这些”等话。其中,“在前业有中”:就是在过去的业有中,在过去世造业的时候。“痴”就是“无明”:那时对苦等事物所起的痴,因为被它蒙蔽而造业,这就是无明。“造作”就是“行”:在造那种业的时候,以准备布施物品、与人结缘等方式生起的那些先前的思,这些就是行。而把应当布施的东西交到接受者手中的那个思,则是“有”。或者,在一个转向心和七个速行心中,前面的思是造作,是行;第七个思是“有”。又或者,任何一个思是“有”,与它相应的造作就是“行”。“喜好”就是“渴爱”:造业的人对于这个业将来会在再生有中产生果报,生起喜爱和希求,这就叫做渴爱。“近取”就是“取”:作为业有的缘,以“我造了这个业之后,将在某某地方享受欲乐,或者我将断灭”等方式生起的接近、执取、紧抓不放,这就叫做取。“思”就是“有”:在两种义释中,这是指造作结束时所说的那个思;而在第三种义释中,与造作相应的思就是“有”。这样,这五种法在前业有中,是这里结生的缘:意思是,如上所说的痴等五种法,在过去业有中成立,而成为现在结生的缘。巴利
Idāni te vīsati ākāre paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘evamete’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.47) purimakammabhavasminti purime kammabhave, atītajātiyaṃ kammabhave kayiramāneti attho. Moho avijjāti yo tadā dukkhādīsu moho, yena mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjā. Āyūhanā saṅkhārāti taṃ taṃ kammaṃ karonto dānupakaraṇādi sajjanādivasena yā purimacetanāyo, te saṅkhārā. Paṭiggāhakānaṃ pana hatthe deyyadhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpayato cetanā bhavo. Ekāvajjanajavanesu vā purimā cetanā āyūhanā saṅkhārā, sattamā bhavo. Yā kāci vā pana cetanā bhavo, sampayuttā āyūhanā saṅkhārā. Nikanti taṇhāti yaṃ kammaṃ karontassa upapattibhave tassa phalassa nikāmanā patthanā, sā taṇhā nāma. Upagamanaṃ upādānanti yaṃ kammabhavassa paccayabhūtaṃ ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ katvā asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne kāme sevissāmi ucchijjissāmī’’tiādinā nayena pavattaṃ upagamanaṃ gahaṇaṃ parāmasanaṃ, idaṃ upādānaṃ nāma. Cetanā bhavoti dvīsu atthavikappesu vuttassa āyūhanassa avasāne vuttacetanā, tatiye pana āyūhanasampayuttacetanā bhavo. Iti ime pañca dhammā purimakammabhavasmiṃ idha paṭisandhiyā paccayāti ime yathāvuttā mohādayo pañca dhammā atītakammabhavasiddhā etarahi paṭisandhiyā paccayabhūtāti attho.
这里,“结生识”是指:因为它是依着投生到下一世的方式生起的,所以称为结生,那个识就是结生识。“入胎是名色”是指:那些色法和非色法进入母胎,就像到来并进入一样,这就是名色。“净色是处”是指:这是就眼等五处来说的。“所触是触”是指:那个以所缘为对象、正在接触而生起的,就是触。“所感受是受”是指:与结生识一起生起,或者由六处为缘、或者与触同时生起的异熟感受,那就是受。这样,这些识等五种组成部分的法,是前一世所造之业的、业相续的缘;因为是缘,依靠那个缘,在如今这个投生有中,以投生有的状态生起,这就是它的含义。巴利
Idha paṭisandhiviññāṇanti yaṃ bhavantarapaṭisandhānavasena uppannattā paṭisandhīti vuccati, taṃ viññāṇaṃ. Okkanti nāmarūpanti yā gabbhe rūpārūpadhammānaṃ okkanti āgantvā pavisantī viya, idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Pasādo āyatananti idaṃ cakkhādipañcāyatanavasena vuttaṃ. Phuṭṭho phassoti yo ārammaṇaṃ phuṭṭho phusanto uppanno, ayaṃ phasso. Vedayitaṃvedanāti yaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇena vā saḷāyatanapaccayena vā phassena sahuppannaṃ vipākavedayitaṃ, sā vedanā. Iti ime…pe… paccayāti ime viññāṇādayo pañca koṭṭhāsikā dhammā purimabhave katassa kammassa kammavaṭṭassa paccayā, paccayabhāvato taṃ paṭicca idha etarahi upapattibhavasmiṃ upapattibhavabhāvena vā hontīti attho.
这里,由于诸处已经成熟,所以说“痴”,这是为了显示:当诸处成熟、正在造业的时候,没有痴的状态。因为年幼者的心路过程大多以有分为主,大多数情况下还没有能力造作能引生下一世的业。而“正在造业的时候”这个说法,是用它来总括一切作为业之缘的痴,并不是只指与心相应的痴。其余部分,按照前面所说的方式理解即可。巴利
Idhaparipakkattā āyatanānaṃ mohoti paripakkāyatanassa kammakaraṇakāle asammohaṃ dasseti. Daharassa hi cittappavatti bhavaṅgabahulā yebhuyyena bhavantarajanakakammāyūhanasamatthā na hotīti. Kammakaraṇakāleti ca iminā sabbo kammassa paccayabhūto sammoho gahito, na sampayuttova. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
“关于词句的连结”,是指把“因此”等词连同它们之间的关联一起理解。“义理的归结”,是指这第八种说法的教法归结。“喜”,是指前面所说的这一切渴爱,也就是“喜是苦的根”这样说的、以“喜”这一欢喜之义的共通名称、用单数来表达的一切渴爱;这些渴爱,按相续、所缘、相应法、现行方式等种种差别,有无量种类。“尽”等词只是断除的同义词,因为经中说“究竟尽”。“这是四种道共通的”,意思是说,“尽”等词是对四种圣道断除作用的一种共通的总称。为了说明这些道是依次生起的,也就是按作用的次第来说明,所以才说了“离贪”等,于是说“从彼……应连结”。即便如此,“尽”等词虽然是断除的同义词,但为了说明所应断除的、因所缘不同而有差别的渴爱已经毫无剩余地断尽,所以又采用了“尽”等其他同义词,因此说“以此”等。由于作为前面所说生起之因等的渴爱已被断除,所以作了“已断除”的说明之后,所说的“尽”等词,无论如何也不会违背法的道理,所以说“没有任何违理”。巴利
Padayojanāyāti ‘‘tasmā’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ sambandhena saha. Atthanigamananti imasmiṃ aṭṭhamavāre desanatthanigamanaṃ. Nandīti evaṃ vuttānaṃ sabbataṇhānanti ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’nti evaṃ nandanatthasāmaññato ekavacanena vuttānaṃ sabbataṇhānaṃ santānārammaṇasampayuttadhammappavattiākārādibhedena anekabhedānaṃ sabbāsaṃ taṇhānaṃ. Khayavevacanānevāti samucchedapahānavevacanāneva. ‘‘Accantakkhayā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Catumaggakiccasādhāraṇametanti catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ pahānakiccassa sādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññato gahaṇaṃ etaṃ khayādivacananti attho. Tesaṃ pana maggānaṃ kamena pavattanaṃ kiccakameneva dassetuṃ ‘‘virāgā’’tiādi vuttanti dassento ‘‘tato…pe… yojetabba’’nti āha. Tathā satipi khayādisaddānaṃ pahānapariyāyabhāve pahātabbāya pana visayabhedabhinnāya taṇhāya anavasesato pahīnabhāvadīpanatthaṃ khayādipariyāyantaraggahaṇaṃ katanti dassento ‘‘yāhī’’tiādimāha. Yathāvuttasañjananādihetubhūtāya taṇhāya pahīnattā tappahānadīpanaṃ katvā vuccamānaṃ khayādivacanaṃ na kathañci dhammataṃ vilometīti vuttaṃ ‘‘na kiñci virujjhatī’’ti.
“无上离”是指:因为有能力超越自己,所以远离了更高、更殊胜的境地。而他的这种远离更高者的特质,正是由于他自身就是最殊胜的,因此说“一切最胜”。就像“sammā”和“saṃ”这两个词,既能表达“不颠倒、平等”这些含义,也能表达赞叹和美好的意思,所以说“正确且亲自觉悟的、值得赞叹的、美好的觉悟”。在这里,觉悟——即现观四圣谛,或者了知一切应知之法——这棵树就是菩提树;而依之觉悟的道路,就是菩提道;同样地,一切知智也是菩提智;至于涅槃,因为它是应当被觉悟的,所以也是菩提。这里应当这样理解其词义解析。即使在概念名称中,也确实有“菩提”一词,比如“菩提王子”等例子。其他论师:指那些精通要义集的老师们。至于在这里解释带前缀的“菩提”一词的含义时,为什么要举无前缀的用法作为例子,其理由前面已经说过了。巴利
Uttaravirahitanti attānaṃ uttarituṃ samatthattā uttarena adhikena virahitaṃ. Ayañcassa uttaravirahatā attano seṭṭhabhāvenāti āha ‘‘sabbaseṭṭha’’nti. Yathā sammā-saṃ-saddā ‘‘aviparītaṃ, sāma’’nti imesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ vadanti, evaṃ pāsaṃsasobhanatthepīti āha ‘‘sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhi’’nti. Bujjhi ettha paṭivijjhi cattāri ariyasaccāni, sabbampi vā neyyanti rukkho bodhi, bujjhati etenāti pana maggo bodhi, tathā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, nibbānaṃ pana bujjhitabbato bodhīti ayamettha sādhanavibhāgo daṭṭhabbo. Paṇṇattiyampi attheva bodhi-saddo ‘‘bodhirājakumāro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.324; cūḷava. 268). Apareti sārasamāsācariyā. Ettha ca saupasaggassa bodhi-saddassa atthuddhāre anupasaggānaṃ udāharaṇe kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
或者,因为它是出世间法,而且在这种出世间法中,跟较低的道相比,并没有比它更高的道,所以针对“会不会有无上正觉呢?”这种疑虑,为了消除它,才说了“声闻的……”等话。由于宏愿的圆满成就,以及那些作为殊胜果报之差别的一一智慧——有些智慧是某些圣者才有的,有些则是全部智慧共同具足的——这道在成就时,就像是在给圣者们赋予种种不同的智慧等。因此说它并不具备能给予一切功德的特性。由此表明:依靠那不共于他人的宏愿成就而成立、并伴随着无上功德的阿拉汉道,才名为无上正觉。声闻巴拉密智,不是其他声闻所共有的,而是唯有大上首弟子们才独具的智慧。各自分别地觉悟诸谛,所以叫独觉佛,也就是独觉。难道不是一切圣者都各自分别地证知诸谛吗?因为法是应当亲自体证的呀。确实如此,但这里并不是针对那种亲证的意义而说的。实际情况是:声闻是依靠他人的教导才证知诸谛的,因为如果没有他人的音声教导,他们的见道就不会生起;而正自觉者,则是以成为他人依靠的方式觉悟诸谛。但这些独觉佛不是这样,他们不依赖他人引导,也没有导师,自己证悟诸谛。因此说“各自分别地觉悟诸谛,所以叫独觉佛”。巴利
Lokuttarabhāvato vā tatthāpi heṭṭhimamaggānaṃ viya tatuttarimaggābhāvato ca ‘‘siyā nu kho anuttarā bodhī’’ti āsaṅkaṃ sandhāya taṃ vidhamituṃ ‘‘sāvakāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Abhinīhārasampattiyā phalavisesabhūtehi ñāṇavisesehi ekaccehi sakalehi saddhiṃ samijjhamāno maggo ariyānaṃ taṃ taṃ ñāṇavisesādiṃ dento viya hotīti tassa asabbaguṇadāyakattaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena anaññasādhāraṇābhinīhārasampadāsiddhassa niratisaya-guṇānubandhassa vasena arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi nāma hotīti dasseti. Sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ aññehi sāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ mahāsāvakānaṃyeva āveṇikaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Paccekaṃ saccāni buddhavantoti paccekabuddhā. Nanu ca sabbepi ariyā paccekameva saccāni paṭivijjhanti dhammassa paccattaṃ vedanīyabhāvatoti? Saccaṃ, nayidamīdisaṃ paṭivedhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, yathā pana sāvakā aññasannissayena saccāni paṭivijjhanti paratoghosena vinā tesaṃ dassanamaggassa anuppajjanato, yathā ca sammāsambuddho aññesaṃ nissayabhāvena saccāni abhisambujjhanti, na evamete, ete pana aparaneyyā hutvā apariṇāyakabhāvena saccāni paṭivijjhanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paccekaṃ saccāni buddhavantoti paccekabuddhā’’ti.
所谓“iti”,就是被造作、被说出的意思,所以叫“iti”这个词。它的用意是表示原因,但形式并不固定,因此说“所以”。由此便说“因为……”。前面先把“iti”这个词当作表示方式,译成“这样了知后”;这里也同样把它当作表示方式,这样也讲得通。怎么讲得通呢?因为“了知”这个词应当理解为表示原因,就像“以智慧观察后而见”以及“喝了酥油就有力气”这类说法一样。所以,即使“iti”表示方式,由于已经了知缘起,也仍然能得到“以此为原因”的意思。在“了知缘起”这一说法中,当“了知”表示原因时,前面所说的意义关联同样完全成立。这里,第一种解释先说明:了知缘起是不起妄执的原因;由于已经指出以渴爱为本的缘起,所以这里指出断除渴爱是证得正等觉的原因。说明了这一点之后,就应当理解“不思量地……”等结论。第二种解释则说,了知缘起是断除渴爱的原因,这就表明该断除渴爱是正等觉不起妄执的原因——这就是两种解释的差别。因此说“喜是苦的根”。巴利
Itīti karīyati uccārīyatīti itikāro, iti-saddo. Kāraṇattho aniyamarūpenāti adhippāyo, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘yasmā cā’’ti. Pubbe pana iti-saddaṃ pakāratthaṃ katvā ‘‘evaṃ jānitvā’’ti vuttaṃ, idhāpi taṃ pakāratthameva katvā atho yujjati. Kathaṃ? Viditvāti hi padaṃ hetuatthe daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘paññāya cassa disvā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.271), ‘‘ghataṃ pivitvā balaṃ hotī’’ti ca evamādīsu viya, tasmā pakāratthepi iti-sadde paṭiccasamuppādassa viditattāti ayaṃ attho labbhateva. Paṭiccasamuppādaṃ viditvāti etthāpi hetuatthe viditvā-sadde yathāvuttā atthayojanā yujjateva. Ettha ca paṭhamavikappe paṭiccasamupādassa viditatthaṃ maññanābhāvassa kāraṇaṃ vatvā taṇhāmūlakassa paṭiccasamuppādassa dassitattā ettha taṇhāppahānaṃ sammāsambodhiyā adhigamanakāraṇaṃ uddhatanti dassitaṃ, tasmā ‘‘pathaviṃ na maññatī’’tiādi nigamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dutiyavikappe pana paṭiccasamuppādavedanaṃ taṇhāppahānassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ abhisambodhiyā abhisambodhimaññanābhāvassāti ayamattho dassitoti ayametesaṃ dvinnaṃ atthavikappānaṃ viseso, tasmā ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’nti vuttaṃ.
针对“这从哪里能得到呢?”这个质问,就说了“凡于任何处……”等话。因为这种教法中的关联方式在教法中也同样可见,所以才这样说。确实,即使在世间,“yaṃ”和“taṃ”这类词的对应关联,其确定不移的性质也早已成立。巴利
Taṃ kuto labbhatīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yattha yattha hī’’tiādi. Sāsanayutti ayaṃ sāsanepi evaṃ sambandho dissatīti katvā. Lokepi hi yaṃ-taṃ-saddānaṃ abyabhicārisambandhatā siddhā.
我说“我这样宣称已成正等觉”,是因为已经把握了成正等觉的状态,也是因为不是一切知者就不可能这样开示,所以接着说了“展示一切知智”等话。巴利
Evaṃ abhisambuddhoti vadāmīti abhisambuddhabhāvassa gahitattā, asabbaññunā evaṃ desetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dassento’’tiādimāha.
这段开示具足了种种理趣和说法方式的庄严。也就是说,它和两种理趣以及说法庄严相应:一是按照凡夫品等分类而区分的种种经教理趣,二是按照相、业、渴爱、妄想等分类而区分的种种义理理趣,三是由欢喜、缘相了别等殊胜安立所成立的说法庄严。经文说“正如他们不了知的那样,他开示了”,这也是在说明世尊说法方式的庄严。所谓“正是那地”,这里提到“地”只是一种标示,水等情况下也是如此;同样,对于“这里所说的地到底指什么?为什么只取四大种色,而不取其余色?”这类问题,也应该析出他们由此产生的疑惑。另外,“如何说此名?”中的“iti”一词表示方式。因此应当知道,这部经已经涵盖了他们所有疑惑的生起。“边”就是界限,指教说的终结界限,也就是所谓的“连结”。“端”就是边际,指教说的结束。通过这两者,说明了经中的意乐连结和随法连结。巴利
Vicitranayadesanāvilāsayuttanti puthujjanavārādivibhāgabhinnehi vicittehi tanti nayehi, lakkhaṇakammataṇhāmaññanādivibhāgabhinnehi vicittehi atthanayehi, abhinandanapaccayākārādivisesāpadesasiddhena desanāvilāsena ca yuttaṃ. Yathā te na jānanti, tathā desesīti imināpi bhagavato desanāvilāsaṃyeva vibhāveti. Taṃyeva kira pathavinti ettha pathavīgahaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ āpādivasenapi, tathā ‘‘kīdisā nu kho idha pathavī adhippetā, kasmā ca bhūtarūpāniyeva gahitāni, na sesarūpānī’’tiādināpi tesaṃ saṃsayuppatti niddhāretabbā. Atha vā kathaṃ nāmidanti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho. Tena imasmiṃ sutte sabbāyapi tesaṃ saṃsayuppattiyā pariggahitattā daṭṭhabbā. Antanti mariyādaṃ, desanāya antaṃ paricchedanti attho, yo anusandhīti vuccati. Koṭinti pariyantaṃ, desanāya pariyosānanti attho. Ubhayena sutte ajjhāsayānusandhi yathānusandhīti vadati.
“中间话题”是指:在业处、作意、诵示、遍问等事情之间,另外插入的某个话题。“未竟话题”是指:还没有结束、还没有达到顶点的话题。“随疑惑相应”是指:与那时聚集在法堂里的比丘们的心意倾向相应。“此”是指:现在所说的《根本法门本生》。巴利
Antarākathāti kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādīnaṃ antarā aññā ekā tathā. Vippakathāti aniṭṭhitā sikhaṃ appattā. Kaṅkhaṇānurūpenāti tasmiṃ khaṇe dhammasabhāyaṃ sannipatitānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpena. Idanti idāni vuccamānaṃ mūlapariyāyajātakaṃ.
各方之魁首:因为具有智慧者的品质,所以在一切方所中都是居于首位的人。婆罗门:所谓婆罗门,就是念诵梵典的人,意思是讽诵咒语。三吠陀:指梨俱吠陀、夜柔吠陀、娑摩吠陀。到达彼岸:从义理和文句两方面都到达了究竟的尽头。连同尼犍度与劫波:指包含这些在内。尼犍度是说明树木等事物异名的论书。劫波是关于仪轨作法的分别,是能给诗人带来帮助的论书。连同字分:指包含这些在内,也就是具备语音学、语法学等。以第五为如是语者:把阿闼婆吠陀作为第四,再把那些与“如是曾有,如是曾有”这类言辞相连、名为“如是语”的古代故事作为第五,所以称为具有如是语为第五。句读者、语法家:指能诵持、学习、了知句读以及其余语法的人。所谓顺世论,就是诡辩论书。大人相:是阐明佛陀等大人之相的著作。于他们中无缺少、行圆满者为无减:指在其中没有缺少、行持完全圆满的人。巴利
Disāpāmokkhoti paṇḍitabhāvena sabbadisāsu pamukhabhūto. Brāhmaṇoti brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇo, mante sajjhāyatīti attho. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti iruveda-yajuveda-sāmavedānaṃ. Pāragūti atthaso byañjanaso ca pāraṃ pariyantaṃ gato. Saha nighaṇḍunā ca keṭubhena cāti sanighaṇḍukeṭubhā, tesaṃ. Nighaṇḍūti rukkhādīnaṃ vevacanappakāsakaṃ satthaṃ. Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo, kavīnaṃ upakārāvahaṃ satthaṃ. Saha akkharappabhedenāti sākkharappabhedā, tesaṃ, sikkhāniruttisahitānanti attho. Itihāsapañcamānanti āthabbaṇavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā ‘‘itiha asa, itiha asā’’ti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā, tesaṃ. Padaṃ tadavasesañca byākaraṇaṃ kāyati ajjheti vedeti cāti padako, veyyākaraṇo. Lokāyataṃ vuccati vitaṇḍasatthaṃ. Mahāpurisānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ lakkhaṇadīpanagantho mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ. Tesu anūno paripūrakārīti anavayo.
“Mante”指的是吠陀。虽然吠陀分为“咒语、梵书、仪轨”三种,但咒语才是根本吠陀;解释其含义的是梵书;按照其中所说的方法制定祭祀规则的是仪轨。因此说“mante 即吠陀”。“智者”指有智慧的人。确实如此:他们凭广博的智慧,把成千上万卷的论书都弄清楚并学习、掌握;凭敏捷的智慧,轻松迅速地掌握;凭锐利的智慧,善加思择而毫无差错;由于念与择法具足,他们所学到的东西不会消失,也不会忘失。一切工巧,指十八明处等种种应当学习的东西,都算作工巧。一切外道论书虽然被认为能带来解脱,实际上并不能带来解脱,所以说它们只求“现世与来世的利益”。“聚集在一起”的意思是:像朋友一样,以群聚的方式会合在一起。他们心里想:“这样理解的话,会和开头矛盾;那样理解的话,又和结尾相违。”对于想要求知的意义,无法得到前后不矛盾的定解,因此看不到开头,也看不到结尾。巴利
Manteti vede. Yadipi vedo ‘‘manto, brahmaṃ, kappo’’ti tividho, manto eva pana mūlavedo, tadatthavivaraṇaṃ brahmaṃ, tattha vuttanayena yaññakiriyāvidhānaṃ kappo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘manteti vede’’ti. Paṇḍitāti paññāvanto. Tathā hi te puthupaññātāya bahuṃ sahassadvisahassādiparimāṇaṃ ganthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā gaṇhanti uggaṇhanti, javanapaññatāya lahuṃ sīghaṃ gaṇhanti, tikkhapaññatāya suṭṭhu avirajjhantā upadhārenti, satinepakkasampattiyā gahitañca nesaṃ na vinassati na sammussatīti. Sabbampi sippanti aṭṭhārasavijjāṭṭhānādibhedaṃ sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sippanti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ sabbaṃ bāhirakasatthaṃ mokkhāvahasammatampi na mokkhaṃ āvahatīti āha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammasamparāyahita’’nti. Sampiṇḍitā hutvāti yathā mittā, tathā piṇḍitavasena sannipatitā hutvā. ‘‘Evaṃ gayhamāne ādinā virujjheyya, evaṃ antenā’’ti cintentā ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa pubbenāparaṃ aviruddhaṃ nicchayaṃ gahetuṃ asakkontā na ādiṃ, na antaṃ addasaṃsu.
“多毛的”是指身上长毛的,意思是毛发和胡须浓密。因为头发也被“毛”这个词涵盖,就像说“碰到须发和指甲后要弄干净”那样。“像耳朵一样”中的“耳朵”,指的是慧,因为靠它听闻并成办应做之事,所以说“有耳朵的就是有慧的”。巴利
Lomasānīti lomavantāni, ghanakesamassuvānīti attho. Kesāpi hi lomaggahaṇena gayhanti yathā ‘‘lomanakhaṃ phusitvā suddhi kātabbā’’ti. Kaṇṇaṃ viyāti kaṇṇaṃ, paññā, tāya sutvā kātabbakiccasādhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘kaṇṇavāti paññavā’’ti.
因为众生在时间不断流逝的过程中,寿命、容貌等会逐渐衰损,所以把时间当作像是作者一样来说,因此说“他们的寿命……被吞噬,称为……”。巴利
Yasmā sattānaṃ gacchante gacchante kāle āyuvaṇṇādiparikkhayo hoti, tasmā taṃ kālena kataṃ viya katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘nesaṃ āyu…pe… khādatīti vuccatī’’ti.
“以证知”是指:对于应当开示的法,无论是按善等类别来分,还是按蕴等类别来分;对于应受教化众生的意乐、随眠、行趣、解脱等种种差别;以及对他们应如何开示的方式——这一切都如实彻知之后。“我说法”是指:我宣说能带来现世利益、来世利益和涅槃利益的正法。“并非未证知而说”是指:不像那些外道,因为不是正自觉者,不了知上面所说的方式,就讲一些被推论所击破、跟随推度、出于自己灵感的东西;我不是那样说的,这就是意思。“有因缘”是指:有原因,或者随顺应受教化者的意乐,或者因为有人提问,或者因为有事发生,具有相状、理由和譬喻。“有教诫神变”是指:具有出离和对治,通过克服对立面而成为具有教诫神变之后,我才说法。不过另有一种说法:“随其所应,具有神通、记说和教诫神变。”然而,只要教诫神变能带来利益,开示就没有不具足的。带来利益的开示是教诫,那本身就是教诲。或者,教诫以未发生的事为对象,教诲以已发生的事为对象。或者,最初的教导是教诫,其余的是教诲。“Alañca pana”是指:确实合适。“Niṭṭhamagamāsi”是指:达到了义理成就。巴利
Abhiññāyāti kusalādibhedaṃ khandhādibhedañca desetabbaṃ dhammaṃ, veneyyānañca āsayānusayacariyāvimuttiādibhedaṃ, tassa ca nesaṃ desetabbappakāraṃ yāthāvato abhijānitvā. Dhammaṃ desemīti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikanibbānahitāvahaṃ saddhammaṃ kathayāmi. Noanabhiññāyāti yathā bāhirakā asammāsambuddhattā vuttavidhiṃ ajānantāyaṃ kiñci takkapariyāhataṃ vīmaṃsānucaritaṃ sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ kathenti, evaṃ na desemīti attho. Sanidānanti sakāraṇaṃ, veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vā pucchāya vā aṭṭhuppattiyā vā sanimittaṃ hetuudāharaṇasahitañcāti attho. Sappāṭihāriyanti sanissaraṇaṃ sappaṭiharaṇaṃ, paccanīkapaṭiharaṇena sappāṭihāriyameva katvā desemīti attho. Apare pana ‘‘yathārahaṃ iddhiādesanānusāsanipāṭihāriyasahita’’nti vadanti, anusāsanipāṭihāriyahitā pana desanā natthīti. Hitūpadesanā ovādo, sā eva anusāsanī. Anotiṇṇavatthuvisayo vā ovādo, otiṇṇavatthuvisayā anusāsanī. Paṭhamūpadeso vā ovādo, itarā anusāsanī. Alañca panāti yuttameva. Niṭṭhamagamāsīti atthasiddhiṃ gatā.
《引导理趣》的注释。巴利
Nettinayavaṇṇanā
现在,我们要按照这部论著的理路来注释巴利圣典的意义。而这一注释,因为要先确定了说法的起因、目的、对象分类以及总体含义之后,才会更容易理解、更容易明白,所以我们先来确定这部经的说法的起因等项目。其中,起因首先是指依靠所学的教理而生起我慢,目的是摧伏我慢。注释书中这样说:“听闻所学的教理……而开始。”另外,对于应当受教化的人来说,了知在依地界、水界等种种差别而区分的自身当中,凡夫和有学等圣者各自伴随着原因,以妄计或不妄计的方式所呈现的不同状态,这就是起因;清楚了知上述这些分类,就是目的。因为对于应当受教化的人来说,在所涉及的对象范围内,了知上述那些人伴随着原因,以妄计或不妄计的方式所呈现的种种状态,这种了知就是目的。巴利
Idāni (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.149; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.nettinayavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. nettinayavaṇṇanā) pakaraṇanayena pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma. Sā panāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā yasmā desanāya samuṭṭhānapayojanabhājanesu piṇḍatthesu ca niddhāritesu sutarā hoti suviññeyyā ca, tasmā suttadesanāya samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamaṃ niddhārayissāma. Tattha samuṭṭhānaṃ tāva pariyattiṃ nissāya mānuppādo, payojanaṃmānamaddanaṃ. Vuttañhi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sutapariyattiṃ…pe… ārabhī’’ti. Apica veneyyānaṃ pathavīādibhūtādibhedabhinne sakkāye puthujjanassa sekkhādiariyassa ca saddhiṃ hetunā maññanāmaññanavasena pavattivibhāgānavabodho samuṭṭhānaṃ, yathāvuttavibhāgāvabodho payojanaṃ, veneyyānañhi vuttappakāre visaye yathāvuttānaṃ puggalānaṃ saddhiṃ hetunā maññanāmaññanavasena pavattivibhāgāvabodho payojanaṃ.
另外,“生起处”指的是说法的因缘。它分为共通和不共通两种。其中,共通的又按内在和外在分为两种。共通的内在生起处,就是世间怙主的大悲心。正是被大悲心所激励,世尊才生起了为应受教化者说法的念头。关于这一点,经文里说“因为悲悯众生,以佛眼观察世间”等等。这里应当理解,即使是在大悲心生起的当下,也含摄了大悲的作用,因为大悲的生起,正是为了让众生从轮回的大洪流中被救度出来,方式是给予正法教导的援手。就像大悲一样,一切知智、十力智等,也应当说成是说法内在的生起处。因为世尊如实了知一切应知之法、为它们应说的方式,以及众生的意乐、随眠等,以对处与非处的善巧,随顺应受教化者的意乐,而转动种种不同理路的说法。而共通的外在生起处,则是一万梵天神围绕的娑婆主大梵天王的劝请。正是在劝请之后,世尊先前因观察法甚深而生的不热衷心态得以平息,法主才生起了说法的热忱。不共通的也按内在和外在分为两种。其中,内在的应当理解为:推动这部经讲述的大悲与说法智这两者。外在的则是:那五百位婆罗门种姓的比丘,依着所学教理而生起慢心,这一点在义注中已经说过。巴利
Apica samuṭṭhānaṃ nāma desanānidānaṃ. Taṃ sādhāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇampi ajjhattikabāhirabhedato duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ ajjhattikasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma lokanāthassa mahākaruṇā. Tāya hi samussāhitassa bhagavato veneyyānaṃ dhammadesanāya cittaṃ udapādi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sattesu ca kāruññataṃ paṭicca buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokesī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.283; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 9). Ettha ca hetāvatthāyapi mahākaruṇāya saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo yāvadeva saṃsāramahoghato saddhammadesanāhatthadānehi sattasantāraṇatthaṃ taduppattito. Yathā ca mahākaruṇā, evaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dasabalañāṇādīni ca desanāya abbhantarasamuṭṭhānabhāve vattabbāni. Sabbampi hi ñeyyadhammaṃ, tesaṃ desetabbappakāraṃ, sattānañca āsayānusayādiṃ yāthāvato jānanto bhagavā ṭhānāṭṭhānādīsu kosallena veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vicittanayadesanaṃ pavattesīti. Bāhiraṃ pana sādhāraṇaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ dasasahassabrahmaparivāritassa sahampatimahābrahmuno ajjhesanaṃ. Tadajjhesanuttarakālañhi dhammagambhīratāpaccavekkhaṇājanitaṃ appossukkataṃ paṭippassambhetvā dhammassāmī dhammadesanāya ussāhajāto ahosi. Asādhāraṇampi ambhantarabāhirabhedato duvidhameva. Tattha abbhantaraṃ yāya mahākaruṇāya yena ca desanāñāṇena idaṃ suttaṃ pavattitaṃ, tadubhayaṃ veditabbaṃ. Bāhiraṃ pana pañcasatānaṃ brāhmaṇajātikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pariyattiṃ nissāya mānuppādanaṃ, vuttameva taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ.
利益也有共通和不共通两种。其中,共通的是指:世尊的说法依次第直到无取著般涅槃,都带有解脱的滋味。因此经中说:“为此目的而如是,为此目的而议论”等等。正是通过这一点,应当看到它也统摄了这样的种种利益:让轮回之轮停止、让正法之轮转动、驳斥常见等邪说、以正语为先、根除不善根、培植善根、关闭恶趣之门、打开天界与解脱之门、止息缠缚烦恼、断除随眠烦恼、不违背先前“我已解脱,将令他人解脱”的承诺、让与它敌对的魔罗之愿落空、摧破外道的教法、建立佛陀的教法。而不共通的利益,则是摧伏那些比丘的骄慢。注释书中也这样说:“善于说法的世尊,为了摧破骄慢,开始了《一切法根本理趣经》的说法。”这两种利益都只是外在的。不过,如果把“说法之力成就所期望的意义”也看作教化对象心相续中的利益,那么由于所期望的意义得以达成,对于像世尊这样慈悲的人来说,成就所期望的利益也就是世尊自己的利益;按照这个理路,也可以知道它有内在的一面。巴利
Payojanampi sādhāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ anukkamena yāva anupādāparinibbānaṃ vimuttirasattā bhagavato desanāya. Tenevāha ‘‘etadatthā tathā, etadatthā mantanā’’tiādi (pari. 366). Eteneva ca saṃsāracakkanivatti saddhammacakkappavatti sassatādimicchāvādanirākaraṇaṃ sammāvādapurekkhāro akusalamūlasamūhananaṃ kusalamūlasaṃropanaṃ apāyadvārapidahanaṃ saggamokkhadvāravivaraṇaṃ pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanaṃ anusayasamugghātanaṃ ‘‘mutto mocessāmī’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 18; itivu. aṭṭha. 38) purimapaṭiññāavisaṃvādanaṃ tappaṭipakkhamāramanorathavisaṃvādanaṃ titthiyadhammanimmathanaṃ buddhadhammapatiṭṭhāpananti evamādīnampi payojanānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Asādhāraṇaṃ pana tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ mānamaddanaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1) ‘‘desanākusalo bhagavā mānabhañjanatthaṃ ‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’nti desanaṃ ārabhī’’ti. Ubhayampetaṃ bāhiyameva. Sace pana veneyyasantānagatampi desanābalasiddhisaṅkhātaṃ payojanaṃ adhippāyasamijjhanabhāvato yathādhippetatthasiddhiyā yathākāruṇikassa bhagavatopi payojanamevāti gaṇheyya, iminā pariyāyenassa abbhantaratāpi veditabbā.
再者,对于应当受教化的人来说,要让他们明白:在依地等元素、界差别而区分的自身(五取蕴)中,凡夫和有学等圣者,连同其因缘,是怎样以“有妄想”和“无妄想”的方式而表现出不同状态的——对这件事的不了知,就是这部经的“生起缘由”;而如实通达这部经中所说的这些区分,就是它的“利益”——这个意思前面已经讲过了。因为对应当受教化的人来说,在他们所处的范围内,了知前面所说的那些人和因缘如何随着有妄想、无妄想而表现出不同状态,这种了知就使这次开示成为有利益的事,所以说“这次开示是以实现这个目的为宗旨”。因为开示所要达成的果,正是值得希求的,正是它促使开示者为这个目的而开示,所以称为“利益”。同样,对于应当受教化的人,应当在这里了知的利益还有:完全或部分地不断除种种妄想、在其中见过患、不了解那些毫无拘束的妄想在自己身上有种种施设表现的特殊状态、不了解已断除妄想之后的修行、以及以渴爱为入口而不了解缘起道理等等。巴利
Apica veneyyānaṃ pathavīādibhūtādivibhāgabhinne sakkāye puthujjanassa sekkhādiariyassa ca saddhiṃ hetunā maññanāmaññanavasena pavattivibhāgānavabodho samuṭṭhānaṃ, imassa suttassa yathāvuttavibhāgāvabodho payojananti vuttovāyamattho. Veneyyānañhi vuttappakāre visaye yathāvuttānaṃ puggalānaṃ saddhiṃ hetunā maññanāmaññanānaṃ vasena pavattivibhāgāvabodho imaṃ desanaṃ payojeti ‘‘tannipphādanaparāyaṃ desanā’’ti katvā. Yañhi desanāya sādhetabbaṃ phalaṃ, taṃ ākaṅkhitabbattā desakaṃ desanāya payojetīti payojananti vuccati. Tathā veneyyānaṃ sabbaso ekadesato ca maññanānaṃ appahānaṃ, tattha ca ādīnavādassanaṃ, niraṅkusānaṃ maññanānaṃ anekākāravohārassa sakkāye pavattivisesassa ajānanaṃ, tattha ca pahīnamaññanānaṃ paṭipattiyā ajānanaṃ, taṇhāmukhena paccayākārassa ca anavabodhoti evamādīni ca payojanāni idha veditabbāni.
属于三地范畴、以对无为法未完成了知等为作用的有为法,以及不了知正自觉者修行的人;背向听闻、持守、熟习、通达正法的人——这些就是这说法的堪受者。而在总括义理方面:像经文以“无闻”等语句所显示的那样——不如理作意的习惯、与不善根结合、执取退缩与过度、被不恰当的方法束缚而不加以培养、具有邪执、无明与爱染的清净、在三有轮回中不得止息、不能解脱于漏、流、轭、结、趣、渴爱生起、取,不能超越心的荒芜、心的系缚、喜贪、盖障、染着,不会彻底舍断争论的根源、不断除随眠、不超出邪性、依止于以渴爱为根本之法、随顺不善业道、身心充满一切烦恼的燃烧与躁动——这些都被揭示了出来。而通过“他依地为地而了知”等经文,描述了爱染游履的方式、慢心的表露、颠倒的执取、杂染、对自身的执取、愚人的特征、三种歪曲的阐明、与多利益相违背的作法、三种所依的揭露,以及漏尽的教说等,这些也都得到彰显。巴利
Bhūmittayapariyāpannesu asaṅkhātadhammavippakatapariññādikiccasaṅkhātadhammānaṃ sammāsambuddhassa ca paṭipattiṃ ajānantā asaddhammassavanadhāraṇaparicayamanasikāraparā saddhammassavana-dhāraṇaparicayapaṭivedhavimukhā ca veneyyā imissā desanāya bhājanaṃ. Piṇḍatthā pana ‘‘assutavā’’tiādinā ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro akusalamūla-samāyogo olīyanātidhāvanāpariggaho upāyavinibaddhānubrūhanā micchābhinivesasamannāgamo avijjātaṇhā-parisuddhi vaṭṭattayānuparamo āsavoghayogaganthāgatitaṇhuppādupādānāviyogo cetokhila-cetovinibaddhaabhinandana-nīvaraṇasaṅgānatikkamo vivādamūlāpariccāgo anusayānupacchedo micchattānativattanaṃ taṇhāmūladhammasannissayatā akusalakammapathānuyogo sabbakilesa-pariḷāhasāraddhakāyacittatāti evamādayo dīpitā honti. ‘‘Pathaviṃ pathavito sañjānātī’’tiādinā taṇhāvicaritaniddeso mānajappanā vipariyesābhiniveso saṃkileso sakkāyapariggaho bālalakkhaṇāpadeso vaṅkattayavibhāvanānuyogo bahukārapaṭipakkhadīpanā tividhanissayasaṃsūcanā āsavakkhayakathananti evamādayo dīpitā honti.
1 2 3